Home

R&S FSH Operating Manual

1. Datasets on PC Report Output Current Folder GSMSO0_1 La Lr ONE Name Size Time O Bn Z Show Marker Data LD d 45deg set 455KB 2 20720121231 53 Z iL 45deg set 7 Show Measurement Results D 3 TL dtt_ 45deg set S dtt_ 45deg set 455KB 2 20 2012 12 31 dier sot Show Measurement Settings L 1 45deg set 455KB 2 20 2012 1231 7 d _ 45deg set Z Show R amp S logo in footer CY dtf_ 45deg set 455KB 2 20 2012 12 31 Kl isolation set Show Company logo C isolation set 484KB 2 20 201212 31 Select Company logo mr O HTML O RTF Preview Print v Open after save Save O Load Save Close Source folder of the datasets Preview of a particular dataset Measurement data to be included in the report Selection of the included information on each report page Selection of the output format Save load a report aOnarkWN A With the report editor you can create measurement reports for the full measurement set or a selection of dataset only You can also perform simple tasks like activating or deactivating markers that have been set during the measurement gt Add the results you want to include in the report by setting a checkmark or removing the checkmark in the report pane gt Select the report format you would like gt Create the report with the Save button Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 38 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode P
2. ccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45 0 i cere 86 211 DOwer SenSor ssenssenisssesererrreserernrntnsettrnrntserretennnsnent 123 SpECHogia Misata o a TE 73 TOMA Mee 49 ue EE 117 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 Reference Doelton A 85 172 192 Reference Dower sssssssssssssrissrsessrrrnntetrrernnststsrernnsrerernnt 247 Reference sign 275 Lee 172 191 etler on e gedekgkoekeg Erde dabeCeeEOAEdEdENEdEdEES ENEE 182 Resolution bandwidt 89 92 Result summary IXEV DO EE 250 CDMA 2000 eege dears cnsy sate dE degt E 238 ELE 218 TD SCDMA dees en ananena anaE LE SETAn La aeni 255 W CDMA neien a aTa AEE A aR 225 Result table spectrum emission maek 62 SPUNOUS EMISSION sdrrre hisenda sinies poraa aaia 68 RF attenuation ssrin ntele iiaia 87 Rho PEV RE CDMA2000 RMS oooi RMS detector Rotary knob Sample SCALING steed fede dei Assadi inant Aiea uated es horizontal AXIS codec veces ceveecevantechessees congacteaseeneheaedincveenarss 81 Scrambling COME i ciesiccsesvervecncveessteceosseceseasioneatdcenseedes 233 266 graphic Ee 234 Sereen AV EE 10 IXEV DO E 250 AM modulation det 65 CDMA2000 EE 238 Channel power 40 code domain channel blei 231 243 261 code domain Dower sssesesseeeeieesserrrreseeses 229 241 259 constellation diagram c ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeettteeeeeeeeeeeee DTF UE measurement wizard occupied bandwidth power meter
3. Ke we el Ile La E POSIU OM EE Gul UE search M cassai E E Ceged e elele i o p AA E N O E eege SMIN CHAN EE Marker list AM modulation det Harmonic IStOriOn dacia aata e edel EE Matbematiee iscsi ciscseccentaccnctatacancthenccrdiecs dE eegen OER d ule BEEE Max peak Measurement AM modulation depth audio demodulation Cable loss NA Carrier to interferenCe oo eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee CANIEMO NOISE siii ss ceciectcawdanesestenstndaveds iivadh channel POW seve cecdicvesnccedvesedvetveaveasedssualsenedeteasviacdvesseasas directional power Sensor seessessererirsesrrrieesrrrrre ee 127 detance jo Zauh eee cette eeeneeeeeneeeenee 183 electrical ne LE 167 frequency COUNTE iisssiiiiiiisicirinirasiiiinanei eii rasaik nans 107 group Re E 166 harmonic distortion eee ee cceeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeees 63 isotropic antenna seeseseseiriteesreirittetstrrrnnerrrrrrnneeens 79 magnitude EE 165 el e WT 108 noise power density cccccecssceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeee 107 POWEP sensOt cece eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeaees 122 POFLECTION ccc eeeeeeeeseeeeeeseessssststsestststseesseseeseeseeeesenenees 182 reflection NM seed ege ei nial Ae el 178 reflection COePFICIONE cccceeeeeseeessssssseeeeseeseseeeeeees 166 FETIECHON SCAlAM eegen gees ERe 158 eene 163 e 156 elle CAME EE 166 BE CHrogtetn deeg EES eg EES acide 70 Spectrum ANALYZE sssri siriana sap
4. After you have activated the second trace this is also the active one All actions like changing the detector or trace mathematics apply to the active trace Center 1 GHz Trace 1 Span 6 MHz Mode Detector Show Memory Trace The trace indicator shows the currently active trace with a white background ictal gt Press the Select Trace softkey Trace 1 becomes the active trace You can put both traces into the internal memory of the R amp S FSH and restore them later Note that the memory trace 1 and memory trace 2 have the same color i e white EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 100 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 5 4 Working with Memory Traces You can save the image of both traces to the memory of the R amp S FSH and later restore it and compare it to a live trace The memory trace is always colored white to distinguish it from the live trace Measurement settings Because the memory trace is just a bitmap any modifications to measurement settings like span or reference level are nor reflected in the memory trace When you save a data set the R amp S FSH also stores the associated trace in the trace memory If you restore it at a later time you can display the memory trace as if it is a normal memory trace gt Press the TRACE key gt Select the trace you want to store Ref 20 0 dBm RBW 300kHz SWT 20ms Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB V
5. Center 937 8 MHz Bei Levet 50 0 dBm Sweep Single C zen Ref Offset 0046 Trigger Free Rue Att 00 4B BCC TSC Auto Preamp On RF Channel Power 63 97 dBm Burst Power 6334 dBm BSIC NCC BCC 75 Carrier Freq Error 231 91 Hz Traffic Activity 47 50 a Got 15 88 dB 6 Modulation Accuracy Biet Analyzed Phase Error 123 Siet EVM 3 16 Mag Errer 1 Current type of result display 2 Currently selected standard 3 General settings 4 Global results 5 Channel results 6 Synchronization state green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed 7 GSM softkey menu 9 3 1 1 General Settings For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 209 In addition the application features some settings specific to the 3GPP standard For more information on each type of parameter see Configuring the Measurement on page 233 Trigger Shows the current trigger mode For more information see Working with Trigger Functionality on page 93 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 218 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on GSM Signals BSIC NCC BCC Shows the way you have selected to determine the training sequence In case of manual selection the field shows the actual number of the training sequence In case of automatic selection the field shows an Auto label For more information see Selecting the Training Sequence on pag
6. Ke ip E SiS dina Delete Selected Depending on measurement mode Delete All Delta Delete All N dB Down 3 0 dB Nomg dB Magn Phase Re Functions of the Network Analyzer Softkeys in the Marker To Menu Selected Markers Center Level Marker Camel A Level Marker Level Functions of the Power Meter 10 4 Functions of the Power Meter This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in power meter mode 10 4 1 Power Meter Measurements The MEAS key opens a menu that contains the functionality to configure measurements with the power meter Power Meter ee eee eent ee em kend Directional Power Meter Ces 2 JE kd dB Return Loss 10 4 2 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens a menu that contains the functionality to set the frequency p eee ee ee a 10 4 3 Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key contains functionality to configure level parameters p ee ee ee a 10 4 4 Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains functionality to configure the sweep GE at el bel bel e eg Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 er Functions of the Distance to Fault Mode 10 5 Functions of the Distance to Fault Mode This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in distance to fault mode Distance to fault functionality is available with option R amp S FSH K41 10 5 1 Measurement Configuration The MEAS key opens the
7. Marker T Marker Marker Mode Result display trace 1 Result display trace 2 Measurement mode Trace window 1 Trace information trace 1 S matrix calibration status measurement format 6 Trace window 2 7 Measurement format trace 2 8 Active trace indicator OO E ob After activating the second trace trace 1 is always the active trace Only the active trace can be configured while the other is passive gt To activate trace 2 press the Select Trace softkey in the trace menu When pressing the Select Trace softkey the R amp S FSH switches between trace 1 and 2 The trace indicator shows the currently active trace Trace 1 After selecting trace 2 you can set the measurement parameters for trace 2 while the first trace is passive Note that you can display all four S parameters at the same time in dual trace mode by displaying the transmission measurement in both directions in one window and displaying the reflection measurement on both ports in the other window For more information see Performing Scalar Measurements on page 156 You can also use the trace memory using the Show softkey in the Trace menu Restoring a saved trace is possible only for the currently active trace i e screen 1 or screen 2 For more information see Working with Memory Traces on page 101 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 171 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results 6 4 2 Configuring the Vertic
8. You can unwrap the phase to expand the range of the phase gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range softkey gt Select the Phase Wrap or Phase Unwrap menu item Available for all vector measurements Simultaneous display of magnitude and phase characteristics Selecting the Magnitude Phase format results in a split screen that shows the magnitude characteristics in the upper screen and the phase in the lower screen Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 165 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results VSWR Shows the voltage standing wave ratio of the DUT The VSWR is the ratio of the maximum to the minimum voltage that occur in an electrical transmission line It is a measure of the reflected power at the input of the DUT The results are displayed in a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic vertical axis Available for vector reflection measurements Reflection coefficient Shows the reflection coefficient of the DUT The reflection coefficient is the ratio of the amplitude of a reflected wave and that of the incidental wave that occur in an electrical transmission line You can set the unit for the reflection coefficient gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Unit softkey Available for vector reflection measurements Smith chart Shows the measurement results in the Smith chart The Smith chart is a circular diagram that primarily shows impedance or reflection characteristics o
9. 1 2 5 Remote Operation Remote operation is a way to control the R amp S FSH from another device like a PC To use the R amp S FSH this way you have to establish a connection between both devices via the LAN or USB interfaces of the R amp S FSH The product range of the R amp S FSH provides several tools for remote operation Remote control with R amp S FSH K40 The R amp S FSH K40 is a firmware option to control the R amp S FSH with remote control commands that are compatible to the SCPI standard You can download the user manual for the R amp S FSH K40 from the R amp S website Remote desktop with R amp S FSH4View The remote desktop is an application provided by the R amp S FSH4View software You can use it to access and control the R amp S FSH in the R amp S FSH4View environment While the R amp S FSH is running and connected to the control computer the screen contents and control elements keys softkeys etc are displayed Thus you can operate the R amp S FSH just like the hardware itself gt Connect the R amp S FSH to the control computer gt Start the R amp S FSH4View software gt Press the Remote Display button in the user interface The software opens the remote display to operate the R amp S FSH remotely Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 13 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Presetting the R amp S FSH 1 3 Presetting the R amp S FSH Before you prepare a measurement it is recommended to preset
10. 12 Preview dataset button OO JO om P ob Ke gt Setup the measurement set as you like by adding or removing datasets The editor also allows you to add comments to each measurement that is part of the measurement set You can also rename the measurement gt Select one of the datasets and click on the afe button The R amp S FSH opens another dialog box R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard Installing Firmware Options Measurement edma2k2G dtf set Measurement Name Instructions Instruction Picture Hardware Settings BNC1 Trigger Input sl BNC 2 IF Out a Internal DC Bias ort Intemal DC Bias Level Mot 12 sl Calibration Settings Specific Calibration Factor xj Bos _ Clear Set To default In this dialog box you can see the name of the selected dataset define a name for the corresponding measurement include instructions verbal or graphical about performing the measurement define several hardware settings as described in the Quick Start Guide select a calibration method specific for that measurement You can add instructions for every measurement that you include in the set to avoid handling measurements incorrectly The R amp S FSH shows these instructions before the measurement starts Password protection for measurement sets It is possible to protect the contents of measurement sets wit
11. 24 272 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals Carrier Freq Error Shows the frequency error in relation to the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH For more information see Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error on page 282 Concerning uncertainty of the reference frequency of the GPS receiver refer to the data sheet Sync Signal Power Shows the power of the synchronization signal For more information see Selecting the Synchronization Signal on page 282 OSTP Shows the OSTP of the signal RSRP 3GPP TS 36 214 Shows the Reference Signal Received Power RSRP The RSRP is the average power of the cell specific reference signals It is calculated over all subcarriers and the complete channel bandwidth Note that the R amp S FSH bases its calculation of the RSRP on the channel bandwidth you have selected for measurement not the channel bandwidth it actually receives Occupied Bandwidth Shows the occupied bandwidth of the signal in Hz You can control if the occupied bandwidth is measured or not By default it is not gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Settings softkey gt Select the Occupied Bandwidth menu item The R amp S FSH determines the occupied bandwidth in addition to the other global results When the measurement has been turned on the menu item is marked by an X Cell Identity Grp ID Shows the cell identity cell group and cell
12. Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 239 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals PN Found The PN offset found during auto PN offset operation Tau According to the CDMA2000 standard Tau shows the timing error of the signal The maximum offset is specified at 10 us Active Channels Number of currently active channels 9 5 1 3 Channel Results Channel results contain various results specific to one or more channels The table contains e the absolute channel power in dBm e the channel power in relation to the total signal power in dB e the channel power in relation to the pilot channel in dB for the pilot channel PICH and the synchronization channel SYNC The pilot channel always occupies code 0 and the synchronization channel always occupies code number 32 Ee SSS SSS See Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 240 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer EH Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 2 The Code Domain Analyzer If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K46E code domain analysis becomes available to visualize the results in a diagram gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Code Domain Power menu item The R amp S FSH starts the code domain analyzer Screen layout of the code domain power result display 01 06 11 09 17 Le Ref 25 0 dBm Bit Reverse Sweep Cont Base SF 128 O Att 5 dB Preamp On Trig Free Run PN Offset Auto GPS
13. R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals gt Enter the number of component carriers in your system The R amp S FSH adjusts the size of the result summary accordingly each carrier is represented by one column in the result summary table gt Alternatively press the FREQ key and select the number of carriers via the Number of Carriers softkey Defining the frequency of the component carrier Each component carrier in the system is transmitted on a different frequency Thus you have to provide their frequencies for valid measurement results gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Select Carrier softkey gt Select the carrier you want to define the frequency for Carrier lt x gt menu item gt Press the Center Freq softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the frequency gt Enter the frequency of the component carrier Defining the bandwidth of the carriers You can select a different bandwidth for each component carrier in the system gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Channel BW Carrier lt x gt menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the channel bandwidth gt Select the required bandwidth The available bandwidth for component carriers are the same as those for measurements on regular systems C UUU M Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 284 General Functions 10 Menu and Softkey Overview This ch
14. R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select either the Hadamard or the BitReverse menu item The R amp S FSH adjusts the code display accordingly 18 01 10 22 _ 18 01 10 23 OOdBm Hadamard peveep Single PN Ofiser 0 Bet 0 0d8m Bit E n PN Oftser bR o ve p D 128 Pilot Power Bei to Pilot Ch umber Sync Power Rel to Pilot Channel Band Page Power Re lot Carrier Freg Error Channel Power 12 4 EE me T wo DA ei to Pilot Rel to Pilot 50 we Ki GH CT Hi Su CH so mo GE uo GE CH 9 5 5 3 Changing the Reference Power The y axis represents the power of the signal The power of the codes is relative either to the total power of the signal or relative to the power of the pilot channel PICH gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Power Settings softkey gt Select either the Code Power Relative To Pilot or Code Power Relative To Total menu item By default the R amp S FSH displays the power in the unit dBm 9 5 5 4 Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSH and that of the device under test If the frequency error is more than 1 kHz the R amp S FSH is not able to synchronize with the signal If possible you should synchronize the receiver and the transmitter The carrier frequency error c
15. a a power meter directional report Generators ee EES dansandi resource allocations ec eee ee eeeeeeseeeeteneeeeenaees SPECIOGIAM EE spectrum emission MaSK ssssseseseeieeseeesrrersneerrrrnsnsee SPUFIOUS emmleslon ee cece e cence eeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaes TOMA Mee TE MDES CDMA E time domain Dower cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeettaeeeeeeetees triANQUIATION 220 eee cece eee eee ee eeetteeeeee eee eeeeaeeeeeeeteeenaeeeeeeess Wi ACTIVE MANKEMS gucken gVeEEE NES EEEEheEEdEKENEREEEENeEEeEe 320 R amp S FSH Index SCIESNSNOL i csiccsscsccscevesstesvassccasessecvessetacaspeseaventasacteseavastans 18 Search limits E 106 Secondary Transcducer eir eeseirr treneren 116 Signal power IXEV DO inas isens arri dddo ideie 251 MAUL sie coicatvedbccedvaedvasveandenchaasieeconssevededanevedsdey 239 Single SWEEP E 92 193 St llen En GE 167 Softkey New marker narrat ararat arar araranat rnrn na TEE network analyzer power meter recehyer ee spectrum analysis display configuration display le EE e EE ET EE PlayOACK e cacti asset iether Ea POCONG TE reference EVEL EE tme E Spectrogram color Spectrogram bisetopy seitdiiren iann ka aiaaia a Tei Spectrum emission mask nnne 60 AC USE SCUINGS E result TEE Standard Spectrum overview Split screen Spreading factor Spurious emission result e E 68 Channel Hee EE 41 directional power Sensor cece eee eect eeeeeeeeeeee
16. After finishing the automatic measurement the R amp S FSH sets the optimal reference level Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 41 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 2 3 Setting the Channel Bandwidth The channel bandwidth specifies the frequency range around the center frequency over which the R amp S FSH performs the power measurement gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Chan BW softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to specify the channel bandwidth gt Enter the channel bandwidth you need The R amp S FSH sets the appropriate span for the channel bandwidth that you have entered span 1 2 x channel bandwidth This ensures that no incorrect channel power measurements are made The minimum channel bandwidth that you can set is 833 Hz at a span of 1 kHz 3 1 2 4 Changing the Span Usually the span the R amp S FSH sets yields optimal results But sometimes you also need to see the spectrum outside the current span to detect other signal components that you need to include in the measurement Therefore you can adjust the span to up to ten times the channel bandwidth and hence still be able to see the spectrum outside the measurement channel gt Press the SPAN key In the default configuration Auto Span is active The R amp S FSH automatically sets the optimal span for the channel power measurement gt Press the Manual Span softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input fie
17. Full Span softkey The R amp S FSH displays the spectrum over its entire frequency range gt Press the Last Span softkey The R amp S FSH restores the span that you have set just before displaying the entire frequency range Time domain measurements You can also activate time domain measurements without having to enter the value manually When measuring in the time domain the span is 0 Hz In that state the R amp S FSH measures the signal at the current center frequency only Instead of displaying the spectrum the R amp S FSH shows the signal power over a certain time period The horizontal axis becomes the time axis The display always starts at 0 s and stops after the currently set sweep time gt Press the SPAN key gt Press the Zero Span softkey The R amp S FSH sets a span of 0 Hz and performs the measurement in the time domain er SSeS eee Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 84 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 2 Configuring the Vertical Axis All relevant settings to configure the vertical axis are available in the amplitude menu You can access it via the AMPT key 3 2 2 1 Setting the Reference Level The reference level is represented graphically by the grid line at the top of the diagram The reference level sets the input signal gain up to the display stage If the reference level is low the gain is high That means that even weak signals are displayed clearly
18. Press the Scan Start softkey Enter the frequency you want the scan to start at gt Press the Scan Stop softkey Enter the frequency you want the scan to stop at gt Press the Scan Step softkey Enter the step size you want to apply The R amp S FSH starts the scan as soon as you have finished defining the scan range Performing a channel scan Instead of a frequency scan you can also perform a channel scan A channel scan is based on the contents of a channel table In case of measurements based on a channel table the set of receive frequencies or channels is defined in a channel table Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 201 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Selecting the Measurement Mode In a channel table you can define the amp Ref Ai Cafe cRBW 120kHz MT 100ms Trace Clear Wrie Att 0 dB Trig Free Run Detect RMS receive frequencies as you wish The number of receive frequencies depends on the number of channels included in the channel table and there may even be gaps between the receive frequencies gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Channel Mode softkey Start 911 3 MHz or Marker gt Press the Channel Table softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the channel table For more information on working with channel tables see Working with Channel Tables on page 115 8 1 2 2 Using Markers The scan measurement in receiver mode features the same marker functi
19. Shows the ratio of the power of the pilot channel to the total power of the signal Therefore this value shows the usable part of the signal P CPICH Symbol EVM rms Shows the averaged root mean square EVM on symbol level of the P CPICH P CCPCH Power Shows the power of the P CCPCH in dBm The abbreviation in brackets shows if it is the absolute power or the power in relation to the pilot channel P CPICH P CCPCH Ec lo Shows the ratio of the power of the control channel to the total power of the signal Therefore this value shows the usable part of the signal P CCPCH Symbol EVM rms Shows the averaged root mean square EVM on symbol level of the P CCPCH P SCH Power Shows the power of the P SCH in dBm The abbreviation in brackets shows if it is the absolute power or the power in relation to the pilot channel P CPICH S SCH Power Shows the power of the S SCH in dBm The abbreviation in brackets shows if it is the absolute power or the power in relation to the pilot channel P CPICH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 228 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 2 The Code Domain Analyzer If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K44E code domain analysis becomes available to visualize the results in a diagram gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Code Domain Power menu item The R amp S FSH starts the code domain analyzer Screen layout o
20. dBuA m W m2 The unit dB does not change the unit set on the R amp S FSH It can be used for instance to compensate for frequency dependent loss and gain at the input of the R amp S FSH The units dBuV m and dBpA m convert the output power of an antenna into electric or magnetic field strength The unit W m2 is used to calculate and display the power flux density For example to compensate for the cable loss between the transducer and the RF input the R amp S FSH can use two transducers at the same time One of them must have the unit dB however i e it must correspond to one loss or gain value gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Transducer softkey Transducer factor availability Transducer factors are not available for measurements with the tracking generator or the Power Sensors The Transducer softkey is therefore inactive Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 116 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using Transducer Factors You can select two transducer factors a primary transducer and a secondary transducer If a transducer factor is active the menu item has an X in front of it gt Select the Select Primary Transducer menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the transducer factor gt Select the transducer factor you need gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH shows the name of the active transducer on the display An example would be the transducer
21. frequency response it is necessary to correct the measurement results by these characteristics The transducer factors for each of the supported isotropic antennas are provided with the R amp S FSH The factors contain typical correction values for all three antenna elements as well as the correction values for the cable gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Transducer softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the transducer factor gt Select the Primary Transducer menu item gt Select the transducer factor The file you have to select depends on the antenna you are using The file type of transducer factors for isotropic antennas is isotrd gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 19 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements If you are using the extension cable R amp S TS EMFZ2 you have to take this into account as a secondary transducer gt Press the Transducer softkey gt Select the Select Secondary Transducer menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select transducer factors with the unit dB gt Select the transducer factor for the extension cable gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey For more information see Using Transducer Factors on page 116 You can create and edit transducer factor with the R amp S FSH4View software package and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S
22. gt Perform calibration For more information see Performing Calibration gt Reconnect the DUT The R amp S FSH shows the characteristics of the DUT magnitude and phase as numerical values You can change the measurement configuration e g the sweep time or format see Selecting the Measurement Format without affecting the accuracy of the measurement Note that for calibration to remain valid frequency parameters bandwidth and attenuation have to remain the same Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 178 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 6 5 3 Evaluating the Results 6 5 3 1 Selecting the Measurement Format Depending on the result display reflection or transmission you can select one of several measurement formats Each of the measurement formats shows a different aspect of the measurement results For more information see Selecting the Measurement Format on page 165 Vector Voltmeter In addition to the measurement formats also available for scalar and vector measurement the vector voltmeter provides the vector voltmeter format This shows the results as numerical values and is the default format 6 5 3 2 Comparing Results If you perform measurements on different DUTs whose results you d like to compare you can save the current results as reference values gt Press the MEAS key 04 01 11 17 10 i gt Press the Ref softkey amp sro CVATE 3 Att 0 dB Trig F
23. rl_ 45deg Please connect ZVH Port 1 with antenna 45 The message box contains the information and instructions on how to prepare and perform the measurement that you have defined with the R amp S FSH4View software gt Make the necessary preparations like connecting the cable gt Press the Confirm softkey Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 35 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard Installing Firmware Options The R amp S FSH performs the measurement as defined in the dataset and measurement set When finished it shows the measurement results and says Measurement Done Note that it is not possible to change any measurement parameters while using the measurement wizard Marker functionality and scaling parameters are however available Changing cable characteristics If necessary you can define different cable characteristics cable model and length after each individual measurement This is useful for example if you want to do the same measurements on different cables at one go This feature is available when you turn on Prompt User to Change Cable Settings in the Wizard Set Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software When this function is on the R amp S FSH asks you to select new cable characteristics during the preparation of a measurement gt Press the Yes softkey if changes are required and select new cable characteristics before proceeding with the measurement gt Press the No sof
24. set an attenuation of 0 dB the output level is 0 dBm If you set an attenuation of 40 dB the output level is 40 dBm C UUU ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 149 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Calibrating Measurements 6 1 Calibrating Measurements In its default state the R amp S FSH uses factory calibration Factory calibration is a full 2 port calibration over the current frequency range i e span of the R amp S FSH When factory calibration is active the status line reads E In many cases this calibration already provides accurate results To get the best and most accurate results however you have to calibrate the measurement manually because factory calibration does not take the actual test setup into account e g cables The R amp S FSH provides several calibration methods You will need one of the available calibration standards R amp S FSH Z28 Z29 order no 1300 7804 03 and 1300 7504 03 or R amp S ZV Z121 order no 1164 0496 02 03 Alternatively you can create customized calibration kits with the functionality of the R amp S FSH4View software package and transfer those to the R amp S FSH Before you calibrate the R amp S FSH for the current measurement you should set the frequency parameters reference level and attenuation levels If you change one of these parameters after a successful calibration it may become invalid To successfully calibrate the test setup you have to connect the calibration s
25. softkey The R amp S FSH performs a series of measurements to determine the ideal reference level for the current signal Note that the current signal level does not necessarily have to correspond to the reference level after an automatic adjustment This is because the R amp S FSH measures a frequency range that is larger than current span and adjusts the reference level to the measured peak which may be outside the visible span An automatic level adjustment will set the attenuation mode to Manual if it has been set to Auto Low Noise or Auto Low Distortion previously You can also determine the reference level manually gt Perform a measurement in spectrum mode with the largest resolution bandwidth 3 MHz and video bandwidth 3 MHz gt Activate the peak detector The trace maximum corresponds to the ideal reference level For more information see Setting the Reference Level on page 85 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 210 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer Ref Offset Shows the current reference level offset For more information see Setting a Reference Offset on page 86 Att enuation Shows the current RF attenuation of the R amp S FSH For more information see Setting the RF Attenuation on page 87 Preampi lification Shows the current state of the preamplifier For more information see Using the Preamplifier on page 88 Sweep Shows t
26. vertical lines Screen Layout for ACLR measurements Ref 20 0 dBm RBW 30 kHz SWT 100ms Trace Clear Write Artt 0 dB VBW 300 kHz Trig Free Run e Detect RMS 001040635 GHz 53 0 dBm 09 dim Lower Upper Adj Cha Lower 49 4 d8 490 Alti Span 26 224 MHz EN T e a aan Mode Standard Adjust Standard Marker information Limit check information Channel information TX channel red line Adjacent channel green line Alternate channels green lines Marker blue line ACLR softkey menu OO JO Om P Go EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 51 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements The predefined standards are the same as for channel power measurements 3GPP WCDMA cdmaOne and CDMA2000 1x systems However you can also customize the settings to set up the R amp S FSH for other radio communication standards You can define the settings directly on the R amp S FSH or define and manage them using the R amp S FSH4View software When customizing settings make sure to consider the following points to get valid and accurate measurement results e Reference level Make sure not to overload the R amp S FSH as the power is measured with a resolution bandwidth that is small in comparison with the signal bandwidth As with Channel Power measurements automatically set the reference to an optimal level with the Level Adjust softkey e Setting the span The frequency span must at lea
27. 153 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Calibrating Measurements The R amp S FSH calibrates the Load gt Disconnect the Load Next the R amp S FSH asks you to set up a Through connection from port 1 to For calibration please replace the DUT by a THROUGH connection port 2 Press Continue to start the calibration gt Firmly connect the Through connection to port 1 and port 2 gt Press the Continue softkey to start calibration The R amp S FSH calibrates the Through connection After finishing the calibration routine the R amp S FSH shows that calibration is finished for a short time iibrationdene The status line now says Cal to indicate successful calibration Selecting a calibration kit To avoid phase errors you have to define the characteristics of the calibration kit you d like to use and then select the calibration kit in use The R amp S FSH then corrects the measurement results accordingly You can either use one of the calibration kits specifically designed for use with the R amp S FSH e g the R amp S FSH Z28 and Z29 calibration kits Those provide an Open Short and Load calibration standard in one piece The characteristics of these calibration kits are already part of the R amp S FSH firmware You can create and edit calibration kits with the R amp S FSH4View software and transfer them to the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of standards the R amp S FS
28. 295 103 8 Limit BET 295 10 39 MIKES natai T E hAEEEdEEehtE 295 10 4 Functions of the Power Meter ssssnuessununrunnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 297 10 4 1 Power Meter Measurements 297 10 4 2 Frequency Parameters 22 ccccccecceceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeneeeeeueeeeeedaneeeeeeeneeeseseneeenedeeeeeeeeeeees 297 10 4 3 Amplitude Parametr Sanvi i a a A 297 10 44 Sweep Configuration sis cst ceseiiaiseetecaseceilaceersaeeiveacseeendisenesiateareaantaenineaeaanaleee 297 10 5 Functions of the Distance to Fault Mode s nsrensrenrrnnrnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 298 10 5 1 Measurement Configuration eeseeessseeeesseeesrneseerrnsssnunseinnaetinnnsennnaatannnadannaanannnaaanaaana 298 10 5 2 Frequency Parameters S arenen AAE 298 10 5 3 Te ERT 298 10 5 4 Amplitude Parameters 0 cccccceceeccececeeeeeeeeeaceeeeeeeeeececaaeaeeeeeeesesecaeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeees 299 10 5 5 Sweep Configuration ic c0 2ccececseetescceetieelelencetec tee clenenclbdteelelanteseuedneeiilneeialenteg 299 10 56 Bandwidth Selection i c ccice cciieceeeterestctinlectaceesenceteelcjestescdbcieeladiacessanlneesedneenclenteae 299 10 5 7 Trace FUNCHOMAlI Ys ecise ete icecseeteddieenedlete en die eed dng elt eel 300 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 6 R amp S FSH Table of Contents 1038 MarKes aesa T O a S 300 10 6 Functions of the Receiver Mode s ussssnunsunnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 301 10 6
29. Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals gt Select the Set Switch Point Manually menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to enter the switching point gt Enter the number of the time slot after which the switching point occurs 9 7 6 5 Selecting a Time Slot In the several result result displays the R amp S FSH shows the power of a particular time slot By default the R amp S FSH shows the results for slot 0 gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Slot Number menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select the slot gt Enter the number of the timeslot you want to analyze The R amp S FSH adjusts the results accordingly Note that you can select only slots that are assigned to the downlink The location of downlink slots is defined by the switching point 9 7 6 6 Changing the Code Power By default the application displays the absolute power of the code channels in the Code Domain Power result display Alternatively you can display the power relative to the RF channel power gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Power Settings softkey gt Select the Relative to RF Channel Power menu item The code domain power values are now relative to the RF channel power 9 7 6 7 Selecting a Code Channel The Code Domain Analyzer contains results for a particular code channel By default the R amp S FSH shows the results for the first active code channel in th
30. BW 10 MHz 50 RB Subtrames 10 64 56 dBm Cell Identity Crp T0 340 113 1 Overall EVM 11 99 Cyclic Prefix Normal Carrier Freq Error 427 47 Hz Traffic Activity CTT a Syne Signal Power 82 13 dBm SINR 027 dB OSTP T144 dBm RSSI 58 41 dBm papp 84 01 dBm pang 7 80 48 Antenma Power EVM Time Alignment Error to Astenna 1 1 84 23 dBm 9 63 0 00 s 2 83 72 dBm 13 95 26 54 ns Current type of result display Currently selected standard General settings Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed Global results Allocation summary or reference signal overview 7 LTE softkey menu ZS Oh A aun 9 8 1 1 General Settings For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 209 In addition the application features some settings specific to the 3GPP standard Ch BW Shows the current base channel bandwidth and number of resource blocks RB For more information see Selecting the Channel Bandwidth on page 280 UL DL Shows the configuration of the subframes in a radio frame for TDD systems For more information see Selecting the Subframe Configuration for TDD Signals on page 281 O UUU MI Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 271 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals Cell Grp ID Shows the identity of the radio cell that is tested If you enter a specific cel
31. FSH Each transducer factor may consist of up to 1000 reference values Display of the antenna directions An isotropic antenna consists of three orthogonal elements Each of these elements measures the field strength from a different direction x y and z axis Decrease of measurement speed Because the R amp S FSH performs a measurement on each of the three antenna axes the update rate of the results decreases slightly You can select to display different aspects of the measurement gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Iso Direction TT menu item The R amp S FSH opens a new menu to select the measurement aspect e Auto Shows the total field strength over all three antenna axes The displayed result is a combination of the results for each antenna element After measuring each of the three directions individually the R amp S FSH calculates the total field strength E based on the results for each antenna element E E E E e Shows the field strength measured on the antenna s x axis only e nye Shows the field strength measured on the antenna s y axis only e ZL Shows the field strength measured on the antenna s z axis only C LUU ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 80 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 1 Configuring the Horizontal Axis The FREQ key contains all necessary functions to configure
32. If you are measuring strong signals you have to set a high reference level in order to prevent an overload of the signal path of the analyzer and to keep the signal within the display range If you are measuring the spectrum of a composite signal make sure that the reference level is high enough to cover all signals and that all signals are within the measurement diagram gt Press the AMPT key When you press the AMPT key the R amp S FSH automatically opens an input field to define the center frequency If the input field is inactive you can open it with the Ref Level softkey gt Enter the reference level you require If you change the reference level the R amp S FSH adjusts the position of the trace as you make the changes By default the reference level corresponds to the grid line at the top of the diagram You can also change the position of the reference level to another grid line if you have a signal that would otherwise overlap with the top of the diagram area The R amp S FSH indicates the current reference level position with a triangle at the corresponding grid line on the vertical axis Eh gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range Ref Pos softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu gt Select the Ref Position 10 menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the reference position gt Enter the number of the grid line you want the reference level at The range is from 0 to 10 0 correspon
33. It then adjusts the frequency axis so that all harmonics are visible In zero span mode the center frequency remains the same gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Harmonic Distortion menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the harmonic distortion The search for harmonics starts as soon as you enter the Harmonic Distortion measurement Upon entering the measurement the R amp S FSH automatically adjusts the settings in order to display the selected number of harmonics default 2 on the screen Screen layout for the harmonic distortion measurement Ref 27 4 dBm REW 3MHz SWT 20ms Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB VBW 3 MHz Trig Free Run Detect RMS i00 7634 MHz 274 dBm 200 9532 MHz 68 9 dBm 300 3783 MHz 795 dBm 400 5681 MHz 808 dBm 500 7579 MHz 81 4 dBm DCK EW a Et 214 i On 474 4 4 4 M37 A 4 574 i 4 li 4 KM 74 gt 14 874 4 i i m n gt eem roe 1074 Center 301 143063 MHz Span 481 82882 MHz Sr pes O 6 Mode Harmonics list Total harmonic distortion in Total harmonic distortion in dB Trace Markers indicating harmonics blue lines Harmonic distortion softkey menu OO Om P Gab Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 63 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 7 1 Defining the Number of Harmonics By default the R amp S FSH shows the signal and its first harmonic Each harmonic is indicate
34. Lat 48 7 38 760 N Long 11 36 43 338 E Ak 575 9 m Center Frequency 3 4 EG MHz RF Channel Power RFCP 25 5 dBm Channel Number 799 Sync Power Rel to PECH 12 97 dB Channel Band edma2k JTACS CO 0 64 Rel to RFCP 7 02 dB Carrier Freq Error 11 2 Hz S Composite EVM 6 16 Pier Por 32 5 d n PN Found N A 58 t 4 9 Stop Code 127 1 Current type of result display 2 Currently selected standard 3 Header table 4 Diagram header 5 Diagram area 6 CDMA2000 softkey menu 9 5 2 1 Header Table and Diagram Header The header table and the diagram header contain an assortment of settings already discussed in the section about the result summary For more information see The Result Summary on page 238 In addition they contain the following information Code Order Shows the currently selected code order The code order is either Hadamard or BitReverse For more information see Changing the Code Order on page 246 Pilot Power Shows the power of the pilot channel Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 241 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals Sync Power Relative to lt Reference gt Shows the power of the synchronization channel SYNC in relation to the pilot channel or the RF channel power For more information see Changing the Reference Power on page 247 C lt x gt Ch SF Relative to lt Reference gt Shows the power of the currently selected code channel in relat
35. Meas softkey The R amp S FSH starts the measurement Note that the frequency range of the actual measurement depends on the start and stop frequency you have set for the carrier Correct measurement results are therefore only possible if the frequency ranges of the measurement are inside the current span of the R amp S FSH Screen Layout for the Spurious Emission measurement Ref 10 0 dBm Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB g FreeRun Detect RMS Limit Line SGPP BTS Category A 2 ra Range Hz RBW Hz Peak Freq Hz Peak Power 9 000 k 150 000 k 1k 17 837 k 43 46 dBm 150 000 k 39 000 M e 10k 159 997 k 46 45 dBm 30 000 M 1 000 C 100k 145 400000 M 25 52 dBm 1 000 G EH IM 1 8700000 C 11 80 dBm o Start 9 kHz Mode 1 Result display 2 Limit check 3 List of spurious emissions 4 Limit line red line 5 Trace yellow line 6 Spurious Emission softkey menu Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 67 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements Markers in the Spurious Emission measurement In addition to the normal marker functionality of the R amp S FSH the Spurious Emission measurement provides special markers labeled P1 to Px The R amp S FSH activates and positions these special markers automatically after displaying the trace Each of these markers marks the peak level in each Spurious Emission range The numerical marker information frequency and level for these markers is part of the result
36. Number of Points softkey gt Select the number of measurement points you require from the menu 7 2 4 4 Holding Measurements The measurement starts as soon as you start the R amp S FSH As the cable and antenna tester measures continuously the R amp S FSH provides a hold function that stops the display update and leaves room for further analysis of the measurement results gt Press the SWEEP BW key gt Press the Hold softkey The R amp S FSH interrupt the display update To resume the display update press the Hold softkey again 7 2 4 5 Working with Triggers To respond to events the R amp S FSH has a variety of trigger functions The trigger can either be external or generated internally gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey The submenu for setting the trigger opens By default Free Run is active Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 194 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 El Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests In CAT mode the R amp S FSH provides the following trigger functions Free Run A new sweep starts on completion of the previous sweep This is the default setting for the R amp S FSH External Rise External Fall A sweep starts on the rising edge RISE or on the falling edge FALL of an external trigger signal The external trigger signal is fed in via the BNC connector Ext Trigger The switching threshold is 1 4 V i e a TTL signal level gt Select th
37. Power 19 77 HI um Freep 200 MHz PT Freq Connected power sensor model Selected transmission standard Reference for relative power measurements Power offset Readout of the forward power Analog readout of the forward power Readout of the matching value Analog readout of the matching value Measurement frequency 0 Directional power sensor softkey menu SOON OO P h Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 125 R amp S FSH Power Meter Ell Using a Directional Power Sensor 4 2 1 Connecting a Directional Power Sensor The R amp S FSH controls and powers the directional power sensors via a special interface on the top of the instrument Connect the power sensor cable to the power sensor interface and screw it into position The power sensor itself is located between the source and the load of the test setup The figure below shows the way a test setup would look like The power sensors for the R amp S ZVH have an assymetrical design Hence you have to insert them into the test setup in such a way that the Forward arrow 1 gt 2 on the sensor points toward the load in the direction of the power flux If the R amp S FSH recognizes a power sensor it sets up a connection via the interface and after a few seconds shows the results It displays the type of the power sensor in the display header If an error occurs the R amp S FSH shows a corresponding message For more information see Connecting a Power Sensor
38. R amp S FSH K50 1304 5735 02 R amp S FSH K50E 1304 5793 02 R amp S FSH K51 1304 5812 02 R amp S FSH K51E 1304 5829 02 wa aS Ss e SS Ss a The contents of this manual correspond to firmware version 2 50 or higher 2014 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muehldorfstr 15 81671 Munich Germany Phone 49 89 4129 0 Fax 49 89 4129 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http www rohde schwarz com 81671 Munich Germany Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S FSH4 8 13 20 are abbreviated as R amp S FSH R amp S FSH4View is abbreviated as R amp S FSH4View R amp S FSH Table of Contents Table of Contents Documentation OVErVvieW ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 Conventions Used in the Documentation ccccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 1 Operating the R amp S FSH cca ccccvaecvecciec joscvaes secceset eege ek ees 10 1 1 Screen Layout and EleMents ceccccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeeeessenenenees 10 12 Means f Imp utisiiccccisccs ugeet ge cccsadneds Seas tencdewnus cucete anaandaa a iadaaa aE aniar ara 11 1 2 1 Using the Alphanumeric keys 11 1 2 2 Confirming and Cancelling Entries 2 0 0 0 ec cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesen
39. R amp S FSH can also handle 75 Q systems The R amp S FSH does not select a 75 Q RF input per se Instead it selects a 75 Q matching pad connected at the RF input The 50 75 Q matching pad R amp S RAZ is recommended for 75 Q matching see recommended accessories The R amp S FSH automatically considers the conversion factor when a value of 75 Q is set Press the AMPT key gt Press the RF Att Amp Imp softkey gt Select the impedance you need You can also use other matching pads e g R amp S RAM or R amp S FSH Z38 by activating transducer factors 3 2 2 8 Using Transducer Factors For more information see Using Transducer Factors Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 88 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 3 Setting Bandwidths The bandwidth menu contains all settings to set up filter bandwidths available in the R amp S FSH You can access it with the BW key 3 2 3 1 Setting the Resolution Bandwidth The resolution bandwidth in a spectrum analyzer determines the frequency resolution for frequency domain measurements and therefore determines how well it can separate adjacent frequencies The results as you see them on the display depend on the passband of a resolution filter The resolution bandwidth RBW has several effects on measurements e To be able to display two or more signals whose frequencies are close together separately you need a resolution filter whose bandwidth
40. Range Hz Frequency range The first number is the start frequency the second number the stop frequency of each defined frequency range The character following the number indicates the unit k kHz M MHz G GHz e RBW Hz Resolution bandwidth the corresponding frequency range is measured with e Peak Number of the peak marker Px e Freq Hz Frequency of the peak level that has been measured in each frequency range e Power Abs Absolute peak power in the corresponding frequency range e Power Rel Relative peak power in relation to the channel power of the reference channel e ALimit Minimum distance from the limit line to the trace in the corresponding frequency range Negative values or a zero indicate a passed SEM limit check positive values indicate a violation of the limit check Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 62 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 7 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion The Harmonic Distortion measurement is an easy way to identify the harmonics of a DUT In addition to the graphic display of the harmonics this measurement mode also calculates the Total Harmonic Distortion THD and shows the results You can perform a Harmonic Distortion measurement in frequency sweep span gt 0 and zero span mode span 0 When starting the measurement the R amp S FSH looks for the first harmonic of the signal the highest signal in the defined frequency range
41. S FSH opens an input field to set the reference level The R amp S FSH shows the currently set reference level in the diagram header For more information see Setting the reference level Selecting a standard To ensure that true results are output when measuring modulated signals the R amp S FSH offers the possibility of taking correction values into account for a number of common telecommunications standards gt Press the Standard softkey A menu to select a standard opens gt Select the required standard The R amp S FSH takes the selected standard into account The currently active standard is displayed in the display header Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 128 R amp S FSH Power Meter Ell Using a Directional Power Sensor Taking additional attenuation into account When the directional power sensor is connected to a test point not directly but via a cable the influence of cable attenuation can be taken into account For this purpose the cable attenuation for the measurement frequency in question is to be entered i e as a positive dB value if the power and matching are to be measured at the source and the cable is connected between the source and the power sensor and as a negative dB value if the power and matching are to be measured at the load and the cable is connected between the load and the power sensor The directional power sensor then corrects the power and matching values to produce the results that wo
42. S FSH switches into time domain as indicated in the display gt Press the Manual SWP Time softkey and set the sweep time in a way that the portion of interest of the signal is visible on the screen gt Press the Gate Delay softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the trigger delay gt Enter the delay time you need The measurement now starts after the delay time has passed gt Press the Gate Length softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the gate length gt Enter the length of the gate The R amp S FSH now measures over the period of the gate length After the gate has closed the R amp S FSH waits with the measurement until the next gate signal happens The delay time and gate length are represented by vertical red lines in the diagram area gt After setting the gate delay and gate length exit the gate settings menu with the Exit softkey The R amp S FSH returns to the frequency domain provided it was active before setting up the gated trigger The original span is restored The R amp S FSH is ready to perform measurements with an accurately set gate EE ee ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 96 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 5 Working with Traces The trace menu contains all functions available to customize the trace display 3 2 5 1 Selecting the Trace Mode The R amp S FSH provides several trace modes The trace mode define
43. S FSH4View software on your PC gt Select the Wizard Set Editor with the aS button The R amp S FSH opens a dialog that provides all functionality to manage measurement sets Measurement Set Name Description Options L ge G Desctiption Measurement Font Instrument x Sae Encryption Enabled Allow Variable Number of Sequence al Steps Allow to Skip Measurements and Finish P Wizard Sequence Defauit Calibration Factory z Cable Definition for Antenna amp Cable Test o teg Cable Length Meter Prompt User to change Cable Settings paiesets on PC Measurements Cunent Folder Datasets Je ei E E a v 06 06 2012 1206 06 06 2012 12 06 06 06 2012 12 06 LD at_Gsmg00 set 06 06 2012 12 06 D jisolation_gsm1800 set 06 06 2012 12 06 D isolation_GSM300 set 06 06 2012 12 06 LD t_gsm1800 set 06 06 2012 12 06 06 06 2012 12 06 Name of the measurement set Description of the measurement task Font type for on screen instructions latin and some asian fonts are supported Measurement set password protection Measurement sequence control Calibration method Cable characteristics length and model Control of cable characteristics model and length after individual measurements List of datasets that are available via the PC 10 List of datasets that are currently part of the measurement set 11 File management options
44. SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select GPS Sync menu item The R amp S FSH now synchronizes the sweep to the signal using the GPS receiver Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 253 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals Equipped with the software application R amp S FSH K48 you can perform measurements on downlink TD SCDMA signals in accordance to the 3GPP standard with your R amp S FSH gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Dig Mod Analyzer softkey gt Select the TD SCDMA BTS menu item The R amp S FSH starts the signal analysis After you have started the measurement the R amp S FSH first records a section of the signal that lasts at least two frames When it has found the beginning of a frame the R amp S FSH includes one frame in the signal analysis The R amp S FSH performs various general measurements based on the composite signal of one slot as well as measurements based on the special parts of the slot It then shows the results in tabular form in the Result Summary display To get highest measurement accuracy it is necessary to synchronize the reference frequency of the R amp S FSH with the base station via the EXT REF IN input ee SSS SSS eae Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 254 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 1 The Result Summary The result summary shows various meas
45. Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements In some cases it may be sufficient to get the results over a single sweep only e g if a particular trigger condition is met In single sweep mode the R amp S FSH performs the sweep a certain number of times depending on the number of averages you have set over the defined range of the horizontal axis frequency or time and then stops measuring It performs another sweep only after you tell it to For more information on setting the number of sweeps included in a single sweep see Selecting the Trace Mode Average gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Single Sweep softkey The R amp S FSH activates single sweep mode gt Press the Cont Sweep softkey The R amp S FSH again starts to measure continuously 3 2 4 3 Working with Trigger Functionality If you have to perform measurements according to certain signal conditions you can use a trigger A trigger responds to certain events If a trigger is active the R amp S FSH starts to measure if the trigger conditions are met The trigger can be generated either externally or internally The R amp S FSH provides the following trigger functions e Free Run A new sweep starts on completion of the previous sweep This is the default state of the R amp S FSH e Video Trigger A sweep starts when the video voltage exceeds a particular level The video trigger is available only in the time domain span 0 In the fr
46. The R amp S FSH adjusts the vertical axis accordingly 6 4 3 Using Markers The network analyzer mode also features markers The functionality is similar to that of the spectrum analyzer For more information see Using Markers on page 102 6 4 4 Working with Channel Tables The R amp S FSH allows you to use channel tables in network analyzer mode gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Channel Table softkey The R amp S FSH opens the list of channel tables loaded into the R amp S FSH via R amp S FSH4View gt Select the channel table you need The R amp S FSH scans the channel table for the channels with the lowest and highest frequencies and sets those as the start and stop frequency The R amp S FSH already comes with an assortment of channel tables that you can use without doing anything If you want to test telecommunications standards that are not listed you can also build channel tables manually with the Channel Table Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software package that is delivered with the R amp S FSH To use one of those you just have to copy the channel table to the R amp S FSH 6 4 5 Using Limit Lines When working with the magnitude format in the network analyzer you can use limit lines to set limits for level characteristics on the display that must not be exceeded You can create and edit limit lines with the R amp S FSH4View software and load them into the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The nu
47. This channel is required by the channel configuration without it synchronization is not possible Primary Common Control Physical Channel P CCPCH Primary Synchronization Channel P SCH Secondary Synchronization Channel S SCH For the CPICH and P CCPCH channels the R amp S FSH measures the power level and the Ec lo For the P SCH and S SCH channels the R amp S FSH measures the power level The 3GPP option provides several result displays to display the measurement results C UUU UM Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 224 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 1 The Result Summary The default result display is the result summary The result summary shows various measurement results and hardware settings in numerical form gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Result Summary menu item The R amp S FSH shows the numerical results in a table Note that some results and support of HSDPA and HSPA channels are available only with option R amp S FSH K44E For more information see the data sheet i Availability of measurement results Center 21672 GHz ei Ref Level 30 0 dBm Sweep Cont Chanael Ref Offset 00 dB Antenaa Div None Baad oo Att 6008 P CPICH Slot 8 Trame d Preamp Oa Ch Search On Ser Code Auto Global Results RF Channel Power 56 00 dBm Active Chaneels 9 Carrier Freq Error 242 2 Hz Ser Code Found 357 0 1 0 Offset 025 Peak C
48. Using the Rotary Knob Using the rotary knob you can do several things e The rotary knob works like a cursor key in dialog boxes or softkey submenus In that case you can navigate to one of the items with the rotary knob If the dialog box covers more than one screen page it also scrolls through the dialog box Turning it to the right corresponds to a downward movement Moving it to the left to an upward movement e The rotary knob increases or decreases any kind of numeric value if an input field is active Turning it to the right corresponds to an increase turning it to the left to a decrease of a numeric value In most cases the rotary knob changes numeric values with a fixed step size Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 12 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Means of Input e The rotary knob moves markers around Again the step size is fixed e Pressing the rotary knob has the same effect as pressing the ENTER key as it confirms an entry or selection 1 2 4 Using the Cursor Keys Using the cursor keys you can do several things The cursor keys navigate through dialog boxes or softkey submenus The up and down keys increase or decrease any kind of numeric value if an input field is active The cursor keys change numeric values with a fixed step size e The up and down keys move markers around The step size is fixed e The left and right keys move the cursor in an input field in the corresponding direction
49. a certain level Refer to the documentation of the power sensor for more information on the maximum input power If the R amp S FSH recognizes a power sensor it sets up a connection via the interface and after a few seconds shows the measured power It displays the type of the power sensor in the display header If no power sensor has been connected or it is not connected appropriately the R amp S FSH shows nothing If there are communication problems between the R amp S FSH and the power sensor the R amp S FSH displays one of the following error messages that indicate the possible cause Message Cause Remedy Error in zeroing signal at sensor A signal was present at the power sensor when zeroing was performed Unscrew the power sensor from the device under test and repeat zeroing Warning Input overloaded The power at the input of the power sensor exceeds the permitted power 23 dBm 200 mW Reduce the power at the sensor input Power sensor hardware error Communication error between the R amp S FSH and the power sensor Unscrew the sensor from the R amp S FSH and check the connectors If the problem persists contact a Rohde amp Schwarz service center Power sensor error The power sensor signals an error to the R amp S FSH Contact a Rohde amp Schwarz service center Unknown power sensor model connected TheR amp S FSH cannot identify the device connected to
50. all higher adjacent channels from that value If you change the spacing of one of the higher channels the R amp S FSH only updates the channel spacings above the one you have changed but not those below So for example if you set the first adjacent channel spacing ADJ to 20 kHz the following spacings are 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 100 kHz ALT4 120 kHz ALTS5 and so on If you then change the spacing of the third alternate channel ALT3 to 100 kHz the R amp S FSH adjusts the alternate channels above the third one accordingly 125 kHz ALT4 150 kHz ALTS5 and so on Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 56 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 5 3 Normalization of Measurement Results By default the power of the channels and adjacent channels is displayed in the unit dBm It is also possible to display the power density of the signal to for example measure the signal noise power density or obtain the signal to noise ratio gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the Channel Pwr Hz menu item The R amp S FSH activates normalization and switches the unit from dBm to dBm Hz The channel power density in dBm Hz corresponds to the power inside a bandwidth of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows channel power density channel power log10 channel bandwidth 3 1 5 4 Displaying Absolute and Relative Results You can set up the result
51. always remains in the linear range The R amp S FSH provides three attenuation modes e Auto Low Distortion If this mode is active the R amp S FSH sets the RF attenuation 10 dB higher according to the table below making the stress of the input mixer 10 dB less at the specified reference level If the spectrum is densely occupied with signals e g ina television cable network the input mixer reduces the R amp S FSH inherent spurious products However the inherent noise display of the R amp S FSH increases due to the increased attenuation in front of the input mixer e Auto Low Noise If this mode is active the R amp S FSH sets the RF attenuation 10 dB lower This increases the sensitivity of the R amp S FSH which means that the inherent noise display decreases due to the lower attenuation in front of the input mixer e Manual Manual selection of the attenuation You can check the status of the RF attenuation and the preamplifier in the measurement setup dialog and the hardware settings area of the display Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON Reference Level RF Attenuation RF Attenuation Low Noise Low Distortion Low Noise Low Distortion lt 30 dBm 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 29 to 25 dBm 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 5 dB 24 to 20 dBm 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 10 dB 19 to 15 dBm 0 dB 5 dB 5 dB 15 dB 14 to 10 dBm 0 dB 10 dB 10 dB 20 dB 9 to 5 dBm 5 dB 15 dB 15 dB 25 dB 4 to 0 dBm 10 dB 20 dB 20 dB 30 dB 1 to
52. basic information about the geotag Number number of the location as displayed on the map Include checkbox to include the geotag on the map display Latitude longitude and azimuth GPS information of the location Name name of the location However a geotag consists of more information than the information displayed in the list gt Select one of the geotags available in the list gt Press the View softkey The R amp S FSH displays the complete information of the geotag In addition to the geographic information the details of the geotag also contain information about the measurement This information includes for example the frequency measured level or measurement bandwidth The R amp S FSH allows you to change the name and description anytime you want All other geotag information is unchangeable after it has been saved gt In the geotag information overview press the Edit softkey The R amp S FSH opens input fields to change the name and description of the location Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 145 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Working with Maps Displaying geotags A geotag is represented by a dot and a number on the map The R amp S FSH K15 also displays an azimuth line The azimuth is the deviation from the direction you are facing and the north It is a number in degrees For example if you are looking east the azimuth would be 90 The application shows
53. by the R amp S FSH K48 Thus the software does not display results for this time slot Power Shows the absolute power level of each time slot CH Shows the carrier to interference ratio The C I is the usable signal power in relation to the error power difference between the measured signal and the reference signal Composite EVM Shows the composite EVM of each time slot in Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 265 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer EH Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 6 Configuring the Measurement Some of the results depend on the measurement configuration 9 7 6 1 Using the Channel Search The R amp S FSH K48E supports the analysis of the code domain power of all channels Thus it needs to detect active and inactive channels in the code domain automatically For a quick and basic analysis of the signal you can turn off the channel search The R amp S FSH in that case evaluates several basic parameters in the Result Summary If you turn the channel search on the UO data is also analyzed in the code domain Thus the measurement consumes slightly more time but yields more results gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Channel Search On Normal menu item The R amp S FSH turns the channel search on Note that the R amp S FSH automatically turns on the channel search when you are using the Code Domain Power result display or the Code Domain
54. can vary If you are using an external storage device the number of datasets you can save is limited only by the size of the storage device The R amp S FSH shows the remaining memory on the storage device in the dialog box gt Select the storage device you want to save the data to gt Select the folder you want to save the data to gt Enter a file name in the corresponding input field The default file name for datasets is Dataset set with a new number in ascending order for each new dataset The file extension for datasets is set If you enter another name the R amp S FSH uses that name and assigns a new number to the file name if you save the data set the next time This function allows you to assign consecutive dataset file names without entering a new name every time you want to save a dataset You can enter the file name with the alphanumeric keypad Each key covers more than one character To get the character you want press the key in question the appropiate number of times Instead of entering a file name character by character you can also put a name together using the quick naming feature For more information see Quick Naming of Datasets on page 24 gt Press the Save softkey The R amp S FSH saves the dataset 1 8 1 1 Alternative Ways to Save Datasets The R amp S FSH provides alternative and more comfortable ways to save datasets Using the gy key You can configure the gy key to take a screensho
55. center frequency but need the limit line to remain the same Absolute limit lines have the file extension abslim while relative limit lines have the file extension rellim Values that define the vertical characteristsics are always level values in dB If the scaling of the vertical axis is currently a linear one units V or W the R amp S FSH automatically switches to a logarithmic scaling after you turn on the limit line After turning on a limit line the R amp S FSH checks if the signal violates the shape of the limit line If one or more signal levels exceed the limit value the R amp S FSH features several indicators that the limit check has failed e Ageneral message in the diagram header that indicates if the signal violates the limit line including the trace that violates the limit e An audio signal that sounds every time a limit is violated e The trace color turns red in areas of the spectrum that violate a limit You can create and edit limit lines with the R amp S FSH4View software package and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S FSH The number of limit lines you can store in the memory depends on other datasets available on the R amp S FSH or if you are using an external storage device e g memory stick the size of it For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 3 2 8 1 Selecting a Limit Line Before selecting a limit line you need to decide if you want to use it as an upper or low
56. change the OEM Master PIN OEM Master PIN Make sure not to lose the OEM Master PIN that is delivered with the R amp S FSH and keep it in a safe place away from the instrument itself If you use PIN protection and forget the User PINs the OEM Master PIN is the only way you can unlock and use the R amp S FSH If you unlock the R amp S FSH with the OEM Master PIN the PIN and if defined the User Master PIN are automatically reset to their default values 0000 PIN and 0000000000 User Master PIN If you fail to unlock the R amp S FSH with the OEM Master PIN the R amp S FSH will force a reboot of the software until you enter the correct OEM Master PIN Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 15 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH EH Configuring the Instrument Firmware update If the R amp S FSH is protected with a PIN a firmware update is only possible after you have entered the correct PIN In the initial state after delivery PIN protection is turned off So if you want to protect the R amp S FSH you have to turn it on manually gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the Instrument Settings softkey The R amp S FSH shows the Instrument Settings dialog box PIN Code Protection Off Master PIN Code OEM Master New User Master PIN Code gt Select the PIN Code Protection menu item gt Press ENTER The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define a new PIN PIN Code Protection New PIN GE gt Enter
57. channels gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the Adj Channels menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the number of adjacent channels gt Enter the number of adjacent alternate channels you need for the measurement The borders of Tx channels are displayed red in the trace diagram the borders of adjacent and alternate channels are displayed green C UUU ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 54 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode EE Performing Spectrum Measurements Setting the channel bandwidth The channel bandwidth specifies the frequency range around the center frequency over which the R amp S FSH performs the power measurement TX Ly gt Press the Channel BW softkey aa SE It z The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box fis ae to specify the channel bandwidth Hi for all channels An 14kHz Alt7 14kHz gt Select the channel you want to mae ee change the bandwidth for aL Be gt Activate the input by pressing the ENTER key gt Enter the channel bandwidth you need The R amp S FSH sets the appropriate span for the channel bandwidth that you have entered according to the criteria desribed above This ensures that no incorrect channel power measurements are made The minimum channel bandwidth that you can set is 833 Hz at a span of 1 kHz Setting the channel spacing In case of the R amp S FSH the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center frequenc
58. check has passed The results are highlighted green If the results violate one of the limits amp Center 2 1672 GHz Ref Level 30 0 dBm Sein Coat the limit check has failed The results et et ae Amenta Pir Mone are highlighted red Transd Preamp A Ch Search On A complete limit check usually consists merama SYNC NOT FOUND of the limit definition of several results LIMITS FAILED The complete limit check only passes MEMECCT if every individual limit check also Carter freq Error GL aoe Segel passed In that case the R amp S FSH Sun ect shows LIMITS PASSED in the result ee aae display If even one limit has failed the P CCPCH Symbol EVM 10 00 P SCH Power Abs 20 00 dBm R amp S FSH shows LIMITS FAILED Settings Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 215 General Result Displays of the Digital Modulation Analyzer By default the R amp S FSH tests against default limits These limits have been defined according to the standard gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Limits menu item You can create and edit digital modulation limits with the R amp S FSH4View software package and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on GSM Signals 9 3 Measurements on GSM Signals Equipped with the software application R amp S FSH K10 you can perform measureme
59. code domain analysis becomes available to visualize the results in a diagram gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Code Domain Power menu item The R amp S FSH starts the code domain analyzer Screen layout of the code domain power result display cb Ref 30 0 dBm sAtt 5 dB Sweep Cont Aa Ref Off 0 0 dB Preamp On SerCode 0 Trace Clear Write 3 Phases Fixed Code Pwr Abs Switch Point 3 Max Users 16 Center Frequency 1 GHz Code SF 6 16 ModType Unknown Slot 4 Symbol EVM 999 RF Channel Power 30 8 dBm Composite E 0 67 9 Code Power dBm Q 40 0 EH 690 70 0 E KH 100 0 110 0 120 0 Stop Code 16 1 Po REU 6 Display Current type of result display Currently selected standard Header table Diagram header Diagram area TD SCDMA softkey menu Settings Settings OO Om P Go h Spreading factor 0 Note that the Code Domain Analyzer result display does not display the code domain power for code channels with a spreading factor of 0 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 259 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 2 1 Header Table and Diagram Header The header table and the diagram header contain an assortment of settings already discussed in the section about the result summary For more information see The Result Summary on page 255 In addition they contain the following information Code SF Shows the currently se
60. depends on the span With the rotary knob the smallest possible step is a pixel As the trace consists of 631 pixels each step is equal to 1 630 of the span With the cursor keys the step is 10 of the span or one division of the grid You can set another step size gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the CF Step Size softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu that contains possible step sizes O a UUU es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 81 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 0 1 x Span The step size equals 10 of the span or 1 division of the horizontal axis Center The step size equals the center frequency This step size is ideal for measurements on harmonics When you increase or decrease the center frequency the center frequency automatically moves to the next harmonic Manual Define any step size you want This step size makes it easy to investigate a spectrum with frequencies at constant intervals gt Select the step size you need from the menu The R amp S FSH adjusts the step size accordingly If you set the step size to 10 of the span or to the center frequency the R amp S FSH sets the step size internally Manually defining the step size opens an input field to define the step size 3 2 1 3 Setting a Frequency Offset For measurements on frequency converters such as satellite downconverters it is often convenient to reference the results to the frequen
61. display to either show the absolute power of the adjacent channels or the power relative to one of the transmission channels gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Power Display softkey gt Select either the Absolute menu item to display the absolute results or the Relative menu item to display the power relative to one of the transmission channels 3 1 5 5 Selecting the Reference Channel When determining relative power values for the adjacent channels you can set a specific transmission channel as the reference channel gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the ACLR Ref Setting menu item The R amp S FSH opens a another submenu to select the reference channel gt Select the method of determining the reference channel The following methods are available Tx Channel Select a specific transmission channel by entering its number as the reference Min Power Tx Channel The channel with the lowest power level is the reference channel Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 57 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements Max Power Tx Channel The channel with the highest power level is the reference channel Lowest Highest Channel The outer left hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower adjacent channels The outer right hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the upper adjacent channels 3 1 5 6 Setting and Check
62. ei Lei Delete Selected Delete All Delta Delete All Softkeys in the Marker To Menu Search Range Off Search Range 1 Search Range 2 Search Range Off Search Range 1 Search Range 2 Lower Limit Upper Limit Lower Limit Upper Limit Functions of the Receiver Mode 10 6 Functions of the Receiver Mode This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in receiver mode Receiver functionality is available with option R amp S FSH K43 10 6 1 Measurement Configuration The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and configure the measurement Single frequency measurements eee Fi kd ke kel ke Wei Isotropic Antenna Iso Direction Channel scans 10 6 2 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the horizontal axis of the measurement diagram O rae kel rd rib meer 10 6 3 Span Selection The SPAN key opens the span menu that contains functionality to set the span CC r te el ken bel n 10 6 4 10 6 5 10 6 6 10 6 7 Functions of the Receiver Mode Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the vertical axis of the measurement diagram Primary Transducer Secondary Transducer Manual 0 dB Auto Low Distortion Auto Low Noise 1 dB 0 1 dB Div Linear 0
63. error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSH and that of the device under test If the frequency error is more than 1 kHz the R amp S FSH is not able to synchronize with the signal If possible you should synchronize the receiver and the transmitter The carrier frequency error can have the unit Hz or ppm gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Hz or ppm menu item The R amp S FSH shows the carrier frequency error in the unit you have selected 9 6 4 2 Changing the PN Offset The standard uses the PN Offset to distinguish between base stations The PN offset determines the offset in the circulating PN sequence in multiples of 64 chips with reference to the event second clock trigger Each signal is spread with a Walsh code of a length of 64 or 128 and a pseudo random noise code PN code of a length of 215 Each BTS sector in the network is assigned a PN offset in steps of 64 chips If you use an external or GPS sync trigger you have to adjust the PN Offset according to the base station sector you are measuring gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the PN OFFSET menu gt Enter the PN Offset you need between 0 and 511 9 6 4 3 Synchronizing to a Base Station Using a GPS Receiver If you use a GPS receiver while performing measurements on a base station you can synchronize the sweep via the GPS receiver gt Press the
64. factor of 64 results in a display of 64 codes on the x axis 0 to 63 a base spreading factor of 128 in a display of 128 codes on the x axis 0 to 127 In the code domain analyzer result display the number of displayed codes changes accordingly Ret 0 0 d m Hadamard Am 2048 Preamp Off vers 1G Ret 0 0 d n Madamard Ast 20 op Preamp Off Center Frequency 1 Giz Channel Number Channel Band nee 124 HI 50 wo GI 50 Ha Da me zo CT GE ad mo so CT GE Take care of setting the base spreading factor of the code domain to either 64 or 128 If you set the base spreading factor to 64 for channels with a base spreading factor of 128 code class 7 an alias power may be displayed in the Code Domain Power result display because of the ambiguity of the Hadamard Matrix An alias power is a displayed code power where no power would be if the spreading factor was correct 9 5 5 2 Changing the Code Order The code order defines the order the codes are displayed Hadamard order means that there s no distinction between channels The R amp S FSH shows codes in ascending order regardless of the channel that it belongs to BitReverse order means that the R amp S FSH combines codes of a channel if a channel consists of more than one code When using BitReverse order the codes of a channel are next to one another In this way you can see the total power of a concentrated channel Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 246
65. graphically each yellow bar represents an active and detected base station and numerically in a table above the diagram Note that a GPS trigger is necessary to detect the PN offset of the base stations you are scanning GPS trigger is available with the R amp S FSH GPS receiver for example Trace modes Note that the PN Scanner supports several trace modes If you are using a trace mode other than Clear Write the bars depicting the PN offset may turn grey A grey bar is shown in case of base stations that have been detected in the past but are not currently detected For more information on the trace modes see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 97 9 6 3 The Burst Power Result Display If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K47E the Burst Power result display becomes available The Burst Power result display shows the power of the signal over a single 1xEV DO frame 26 66 ms This measurement is necessary to check if the power and timing of the bursted signals meets the requirements of the standard In order to capture a complete frame you can apply a trigger from a GPS device or another external trigger EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 252 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer EH Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals 9 6 4 Configuring the Measurement Some of the results depend on the measurement configuration 9 6 4 1 Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error The absolute frequency
66. gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Reference Signal menu item The R amp S FSH synchronizes itself with the reference signal 9 8 2 The Result Summary for Carrier Aggregation The R amp S FSH supports measurements on LTE signals with carrier aggregation In that case you can define and analyze the characteristics of up to three component carriers The results are displayed in a separate result summary for carrier aggregation gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Carrier Aggregation menu item The R amp S FSH starts the result summary When you start the measurement the R amp S FSH performs a measurement on each carrier and displays the results For each component carrier the R amp S FSH displays several results that are similar to those displayed in the regular result summary The size of the table depends on the number of selected carriers For more information about the results see The Result Summary on page 271 For more information about configuring component carriers see Configuring Component Carriers on page 283 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 275 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 3 The Constellation Diagram If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K50E or K51E the constellation diagram becomes available to visualize the results in a diagram gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Constellation Diagra
67. identity Setting the cell group and the cell ID gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt First select the Group menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select a cell group gt Enter a number between 0 and 167 to select a cell identity group gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the ID menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select an ID gt Enter a number between 0 and 2 to select an ID The R amp S FSH now shows the results to that cell identity gt You can always return to automatic detection by selecting the Auto menu item 9 8 6 4 Selecting the Subframe Configuration for TDD Signals According to the standard the R amp S FSH provides 7 configurations that each covers a complete LTE frame and consists of 10 subframes gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the UL DL Configuration menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu that contains the configurations gt Select the TDD configuration you need Each configuration is made up out of 10 of the following abbreviations e D stands for a downlink subframe e U stands for a uplink subframe e S stands for a special subframe A configuration for a frame therefore would be e g DSUUU DSUUU Note that this is available with option R amp S FSH K51 TDD measurements only EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 281 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyz
68. individual measurements you can perform with the wizard refer to the corresponding chapters Spectrum Analyzer Mode on page 39 Power Meter on page 119 Network Analyzer Mode on page 131 Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 on page 180 Receiver Mode on page 197 Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 on page 131 Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 208 You can use the wizard for measurements in all operating modes Note that it is necessary to install and use the R amp S FSH4View software package to use the full functionality of the measurement wizard 2 1 1 Preparing the Measurement Before you can use the measurement wizard you have to define a measurement set with the R amp S FSH4View software package and transfer it to the R amp S FSH The R amp S FSH4View software package is delivered with the R amp S FSH The latest version is also available for download on the R amp S FSH website at http www2 rohde schwarz com product fsh html 2 1 1 1 Creating a Measurement Set A measurement set consists of several datasets A dataset is a file that contains the settings of a specific R amp S FSH configuration for example frequency scaling etc To get hold of a dataset set up the R amp S FSH as you need and save the configuration or use one of the predefined datasets For more information on datasets see Saving Datasets on page 22 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 30 Installing Firmware Options gt Start the R amp
69. is small enough The frequency difference between two sinusoidal carriers can not be less than the selected resolution bandwidth if the carriers are to be resolved for example e The bandwidth of the resolution filter also affects the noise that is displayed by the R amp S FSH The smaller the bandwidth the less noisy the results are The rule is that if you increase or decrease the bandwidth by a factor of 3 the noise goes down or up by 5 GB If you change the bandwidth by a factor of 10 the displayed noise changes by 10 dB e The resolution bandwidth affects the speed of the measurement If you want to display the true spectrum the resolution filters have to settle at all frequencies that are of interest Narrow bandfilters have a longer settling time compared to wide ones Therefore the sweep time increases the smaller the resolution bandwidth gets The rule is that if you reduce the bandwidth by a factor of 3 the sweep time goes up by a factor of 9 If you reduce the bandwidth by a factor of 10 the sweep time goes up by a factor of 100 The R amp S FSH has resolution bandwidths from 1 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1 3 10 sequence Additionally the R amp S FSH provides a 200 kHz resolution bandwidth that you have to select and enter manually i Setting the 200 kHz resolution bandwidth The 200 kHz bandwidth is not coupled to the span so it will not be selected if automatic selection of the RBW is on In fact you have to enter the 200 kHz re
70. it has been calibrated In that case you should repeat calibration e interp network analysis only The R amp S FSH interpolates the correction data between the reference points of the calibration Interpolation is used when you change one of the frequency parameters start stop or center frequency In that case the distribution of the measurement points is different to the distribution during calibration This could result in an increasing measurement uncertainty When calibration has become invalid for any reason or the calibration data has changed you can restore the most recent calibration that was valid gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the Restore Calibration Settings menu item The R amp S FSH restores the calibration data and the frequency settings that were active 6 1 1 2 Calibration Methods The available calibration methods depend on whether you perform scalar or vector measurements In addition calibration for reflection measurements is available only for models with an VSWR bridge Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 151 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Calibrating Measurements Scalar measurements Scalar measurements provide normalization of transmission and reflection only Normalization is a simple but effective way to calibrate the measurement using one calibration standard only The correction data is deducted from this measurement As only one calibration standard is used the accurac
71. key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the span gt Enter a span of 50 MHz to get a high resolution of the results Calibrate the measurement for scalar transmission measurements Scalar measurements provide normalization only Normalization is not as accurate as a full calibration but yields pretty accurate results In addition normalization needs one calibration standard only and therefore is faster than a full calibration gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the appropriate menu item Ref 0 0 dB S RBW TMHz SWT 100 ms Trace Clear Vrite normalization on one or two eAtt 0 dB Trig Free Run Detect Sample ports gt Perform normalization For more information see Performing Calibration gt Reconnect the DUT The R amp S FSH shows the results of the scalar reflection measurement d C 2 06 GH on the filter ee Z Calibrate Format Trace Mode Display You can change the measurement configuration e g select another sweep time or detector without affecting the accuracy of the measurement except the frequency parameters and attenuation EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 159 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 6 3 Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K42 vector measurements become available The R amp S FSH also m
72. kit is selected for this calibration kit FSH Z28 Press Continue to start the calibration If you are using another calibration kit cancel the process and select the right one For more information see Selecting a calibration kit on page 154 Else press the Continue softkey The R amp S FSH asks you to connect an O pen first to port 1 then to For calibration please connect an OPEN to Port 1 port 2 Press Continue to start the calibration Firmly connect the Open of the calibration standard to the ports You can abort the calibration any time by pressing the Cancel softkey Press the Continue softkey to start calibration Calibrating OPEN The R amp S FSH calibrates the open Please wait Disconnect the Open Next the R amp S FSH asks you to connect a Short first to port 1 j For calibration please connect a SHORT to Port 1 then to port 2 Press Continue to start the calibration Firmly connect the Short of the calibration standard to the ports Press the Continue softkey to start calibration The R amp S FSH calibrates the Short Disconnect the Short connect a Load 50 Q termination For calibration please connect a LOAD to Port 1 first to port 1 then to port 2 gt gt Press Continue to start the calibration Firmly connect the Load of the calibration standard to port 1 Press the Continue softkey to start calibration Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24
73. measurement menu that contains functionality to select and configure the measurement VSWR Select Cable Model Deselect Cable Model Define User Model User Model 10 5 2 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the horizontal axis of the measurement diagram Conse p L ftir pvr fmm 10 5 3 Span Selection The SPAN key opens the span menu that contains functionality to set the span DTF measurements O A be en be en Functions of the Distance to Fault Mode Reflection and spectrum measurements GE Ms n be en be en 10 5 4 Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the vertical axis of the measurement diagram 1 dB 0 1 dBi Linear 0 100 only available for spectrum measurements 10 5 5 Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep Gs et kel t a kel eg 10 5 6 Bandwidth Selection The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths ED k kel ee kel ke Functions of the Distance to Fault Mode 10 5 7 Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces 10 5 8 Markers The MARKER and MKR keys open a menus to control markers and use marker functions Softkey in the Marker Menu sz Je eter
74. receiver and option R amp S FSH K16 is required for this gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Capture Screen Capture Dataset or Capture GPX menu item and turn it on or off If on the corresponding information is included in the saved data Timing of the data capture Note that the R amp S FSH evaluates the measured data after a sweep is done and thus detects and saves an event only after a sweep has been completed Event types To use the Save on Event functionality you have to select an event type that triggers the capture of the selected data The R amp S FSH supports several event types gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Event Source menu item and select an event type from the dropdown menu Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 19 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Saving Events e Time interval Saves measurement data every lt x gt seconds You can define the duration of the time interval via the Time Interval menu item Single sweeps and sweep time Note that it is not possible to save measurement data every lt x gt seconds in single sweep mode because the R amp S FSH only performs one sweep and then stops Note also that the time interval must be longer than the sweep time If the time interval would be shorter the R amp S FSH would not be able to save data because a sweep has to be comple
75. results Calibrate the measurement for vector transmission measurements Vector measurements provide the full range of calibration methods for more accurate results Most full calibration methods require more than one calibration standard gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the appropriate menu item calibration on two ports gt Perform calibration For more information see Performing Calibration gt Reconnect the DUT The R amp S FSH shows the results of Ref 0 0 dB RBW 10kHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Write the vector transmission ai EE measurement on the filter The R amp S FSH shows the results of the vector transmission measurement and therefore the filter characteristics Center 1 95 GHz Format Mode Calibration Display Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 161 Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 You can change the measurement configuration e g the sweep time or detector or format e g view phase characteristics without affecting the accuracy of the measurement For more information see Selecting the Measurement Format on page 165 Note that for calibration to remain valid frequency parameters bandwidth and attenuation have to remain the same Depending on the calibration method you can also select other result displays e g reflection measurements without having to recalibrate the R amp S FSH R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Vector Measur
76. sequence for the three markers 3 1 8 3 Activating the Marker List To see the exact frequency of the carrier and its sidebands you can activate the marker list that shows the value for each marker gt Press the MKR key gt Press the View List softkey The R amp S FSH displays the marker list that contains the values for carrier and sideband Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 66 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 9 Measuring Spurious Emissions The Spurious Emission measurement is a tool to monitor unwanted emissions in the frequency spectrum outside of an assigned channel carrier When performing a Spurious Emission measurement the R amp S FSH checks the spectrum that you have defined against a limit line to see whether the signal complies with a specific standard or not Spurious Emission measurements are usually performed over a wide frequency spectrum To avoid long measurement times the spectrum is split into several smaller ranges Each of those ranges has a different configuration for example a different RBW The Spurious Emission measurement available on the R amp S FSH is designed for measurements on category A 3GPP base stations with the appropriate configuration in each measurement range gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the 3GPP BTS Spurious Emission menu item gt Press the Start
77. settings display 04 01 11 14 13 lt B Ref 0 0 dB RBW 10 kHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Write Trig Free Run Detect Sample 04 01 11 15 31 lt B Ref 20 0 dB RBW 10 kHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Write s Att 0dB Trig Free Run Detect Sample Center 1 95 GHz Span 130 MHz Ref Pos G Outpu Mode libration Amp Imp Attenuation Display Changing the reference position Changing the reference position moves the position of the reference value up or down The reference position also moves the trace up or down The levels and the reference value however remain the same The default reference position is the grid line at the top of the diagram The reference position is indicated by a triangle at the vertical axis ZED Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 172 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results The reference position is a number between 0 and 10 with 0 being the grid line at the bottom and 10 being the grid line at the top of the diagram gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref Pos softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field gt Enter the new position of the reference value The R amp S FSH moves the trace accordingly and moves the triangle to the new position 04 01 11 14 13 E Ref 0 0 dB RBW 10 kHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Write Trig Free Run Detect Sample 04 01 11 15 35 Ka Ref 0 0 dB RBW 10kHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Write s Att 0 dB Trig Free Run Detect Sam
78. spectrogram you can replay it any time you want The number of spectrograms that you can store on the R amp S FSH internal memory depends on the other datasets that are currently on the R amp S FSH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 15 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 10 5 Playback of a Spectrogram If you have recorded a spectrogram and have saved it in internal memory a memory stick or the SD card you can view the results of that measurement at a later time gt Press the Playback softkey or gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Spectrogram Playback menu item Recalling a previously stored spectrogram gt Press the Recall Spectrogram softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select a file that contains the spectrogram data The file extension for spectrogram data is spm gt Select the file you need gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH loads the spectrogram and shows the data in the display In general you can do the same things on a recalled spectrogram as in the spectrogram recording mode e g customize the display to your needs In addition to that functionality it is possible to view not only the spectrum that belongs to the currently selected spectrogram frame but also the spectrums of all frames that are in the memory of the R amp S FSH Working with time lines in playback mode To find a particular point in
79. the Off menu item to add no separator the _ menu item to add an underscore or the Space menu item to add a blank space Designing a quick naming table The firmware of the R amp S FSH already has some basic mobile communication terms in the table However you can add up to 120 terms to the table gt Press the SAVE RECALL key gt Press the Save softkey gt Press the Quick Naming softkey gt Select one of the table cells with the cursor keys gt Press the Change Table Item softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define a term for the cell gt Define a term with the number keys and confirm the term with ENTER The R amp S FSH adds the term to the table You can create and edit quick naming tables with the R amp S FSH4View software package and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S FSH gt Inthe Quick Naming softkey menu press the Import softkey gt Select the Import Quick Naming Table menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select a file to import Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 25 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets The same way you can also export a quick naming table gt Inthe Quick Naming softkey menu press the Export softkey gt Select the Export Quick Naming Table menu item 1 8 1 4 Converting Dataset File Types The functionality of the R amp S FSH4View software allows you to convert a dataset of the file t
80. the R amp S FSH During a preset the R amp S FSH resets all settings to their default state Restoring the default configuration has the advantage that old settings do not affect measurements The default setup is specific to the operating mode gt Press the PRESET key The R amp S FSH restores its default setup You can also define your own default settings via a dataset These are then loaded after pressing the PRESET key instead of the factory default gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preferences softkey gt Select the Preset Dataset menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the dataset that contains the settings you would like to have as the preset settings gt Select the dataset with the settings you want gt Select the Preset Mode menu item in the User Preferences dialog box gt Select the User Defined item from the dropdown menu The R amp S FSH now loads the settings of the dataset after you press PRESET 1 4 Configuring Measurements The Measurement Setup dialog box provides an overview of the current configuration of the R amp S FSH In addition you can also change the configuration in this dialog box gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the Measurement Setup softkey gt Select one of the menu items and change the settings as you like Note that the contents of the Measurement Setup dialog box are customized for each operating mode of the R amp S FSH Therefore t
81. the azimuth as a straight black line beginning at your location and pointing in the direction you are facing The azimuth line is always displayed when you are using the functionality of the R amp S FSH K15 even if you are just walking around without saving any data The R amp S FSH K15 allows you display three geotags at the same time If you want to display a different geotag you first have to remove one of those that are currently displayed If you are using functionality of the R amp S FSH K16 you can display as many geotags as you want gt Press the GPS Position softkey gt Select the GPS Position List menu item gt Select the geotag you want to remove and press the Include softkey The R amp S FSH unchecks the checkbox in the Include column of the list gt Select the geotag you want to display instead and press the Include softkey The R amp S FSH adds the geotag to the map display 5 2 4 2 Triangulation R amp S FSH K15 With option R amp S FSH K15 the R amp S FSH is able to locate the source of interference using the triangulation method To perform triangulation you have to create two or three geotags with azimuth information After creating the geotags display them on the map Based on these geotags the R amp S FSH calculates the point at which the azimuth lines of the geotags intersect This intersection point represents the source of the interference gt Press the GPS Position softkey gt Sel
82. the bandwidth of a filter for example The temporary markers are represented as two vertical lines The distance to the reference marker is by default 3 dB below the reference marker You can also adjust this value manually Entering a positive value sets the temporary markers below the reference marker If it is for any reason not possible to calculate the frequency spacing dashes are displayed instead of a value Upon entering a negative value the function turns into a n dB up function You can use an dB up function for example for measurements on notch filters gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the Marker Function softkey gt Select the n dB Down menu item The R amp S FSH displays two temporary markers on the left and on the right of the reference marker M1 It also shows the bandwidth between the n dB down markers Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 108 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements You can then adjust the distance of the temporary markers gt Press the Marker Function Ref 20 0 dBm RBW 300kHz SWT 20ms Trace Clear Write Att DEZ VBW 3MHz Trig Free Run Detect RMS softkey gt Select the n dB Down menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field gt Enter a different distance in this case 6 dB The R amp S FSH again shows the temporary markers this time with a broader bandwidth Demodulating Signals The R amp S FSH features an AM and FM demod
83. the corresponding code channel Power Abs olute dBm Absolute power of the corresponding code channel in dBm Power Rel ative to RF Channel Power dB Relative power of the corresponding code channel in dB The power value is relative to the RF channel power Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 262 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 4 The Sync ID Result Display If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K48E the Sync ID result display becomes available If you are measuring over the air OTA signals you can use the Sync ID result display to identify base stations in the area Every base station is identified by its synchronization ID The Sync ID result display shows the ID for every base station it has detected For every base station it shows its power graphically each yellow bar represents an active and detected base station and numerically in a table above the diagram In addition the R amp S FSH evaluates the delay of the synchronization IDs relative to the first one Trace modes Note that the Sync ID result display supports several trace modes If you are using a trace mode other than Clear Write the bars showing the ID may turn grey A grey bar is shown in case of base stations that have been detected in the past but are not currently detected For more information on the trace modes see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 97 Operating Manual 1173 62
84. the power sensor interface EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 121 R amp S FSH Power Meter Ell Using a Power Sensor 4 1 2 Performing and Configuring Measurements After you have connected a power sensor the R amp S FSH immediately starts to measure the signal power Defining the center frequency Power sensors have a memory containing correction values that are dependent on the frequency Hence measurement results are the most accurate for signals whose frequency you know Note that the R amp S FSH maintains the center frequency that you have set in another operating mode In that case it uses that frequency as the power sensor frequency If you want to perform measurements on another known signal you can change the power sensor frequency manually gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Freq softkey An input field to define the frequency opens gt Enter the frequency of the signal The R amp S FSH transfers the new frequency to the power sensor which then corrects the measured power readings Zeroing the power sensor Offset voltages and currents have most effect on the power readout when measuring low powers You can compensate for these offsets by zeroing the power sensor Do not apply power during the zeroing process as the power sensor cannot distinguish between external powers and internal offsets gt Press the Zero softkey The R amp S FSH asks you not to apply any signals to the power sen
85. therefore depends only on the accuracy of the internal reference frequency TCXO The frequency counter has a resolution of 0 1 Hz and therefore provides far more accurate results Despite the accuracy the measurement is still fast because of a special algorithm for the UO baseband signal The frequency counter only gives completely accurate readings for sine signals that are at least 20 dB above the noise floor If the S N ratio is less noise affects the results gt Press the MARKER key Ref 20 0 dBm RBW 300kHz SWT 20ms Trace Clear Write Hz Trig Free Run Detect RMS 999 9999739 MHz gt Press the Marker Function softkey Tuon gt Select the Frequency Count menu item The R amp S FSH displays the counted marker frequency with a resolution of 1 Hz If the frequency counter is on the marker symbol changes from M1 to C ALOE Center 1 GHz Marker Precision Frequency Reference For even more precise measurements with the frequency counter you can use the R amp S FSH Z114 Precision Frequency Reference order no 1304 5935 02 For more information refer to the documentation available for the R amp S FSH 2114 Measuring the Signal Bandwidth The n dB Down marker function places two temporary markers to the left and to the right of the reference marker and measures the bandwidth between the two temporary markers The function therefore is a good way to measure the bandwidth of a signal or
86. time and display the corresponding spectrum you can use two time lines When entering the playback mode the R amp S FSH displays two time lines in the spectrogram The first time line T1 corresponds to an absolute time value the second T2 is a time relative to the first time line Both time lines are positioned on the most recent spectrogram line at Center 952 MHz Span 3 84 MHz Meas Spectrogram tive Save Recall gg the top of the result display Mode Settings Update Spectrogram Spectrogram Time Line You can now select a specific spectrogram frame that is in the memory of the R amp S FSH gt Press the Select Time Line softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the position of the first time line T1 gt Position the time line by entering a number or moving it with the rotary knob Entering 0 sets the time line marker on the most recent frame The maximum value that you can enter is 1024 the maximum number of frames the R amp S FSH can store in its memory Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 76 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements Note that not all frames are visible on the screen If a frame is part of the history outside the visible area the time line is also not visible and you have to scroll through the spectrogram to be able to see it again The upper window will display the spectrum of the frame at the time line position By moving the time line you can thus
87. triangulation results The R amp S FSH displays triangulation results as circle with a dot in the middle By default the circles and dot are blue You can change the color of those as follows gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Triangulation Color menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the color gt Select one of the colors available in the submenu The R amp S FSH applies the color as selected Color of previous positions R amp S FSH K16 In Geotagging mode R amp S FSH K15 you can distinguish between your current position and positions that you have visited or saved earlier The color a geotag gets in this mode depends on the signal strength that has been measured at the corresponding geotag In addition to the color itself you can also define the signal levels associated with a particular color a separate color for good coverage one for average coverage and one for bad coverage gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Good Coverage Color Average Coverage Color or Bad Coverage Color menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the color gt Select one of the colors available in the submenu The R amp S FSH applies the color as selected The R amp S FSH has default values that characterize good average and bad coverage If required you can change the signal levels associated with these terms gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the
88. vicinity of the marker has a flat frequency response When measuring the noise power density on discrete signals results are not valid gt Press the MARKER key Ref 20 0 dBm RBW 300kH2 SWT 20ms Trace Clear Write Att 0dB VBW 3MHz_ Trig Free Run Detect RMS gt Press the Marker Function AE eg softkey gt Select the Noise menu item The R amp S FSH shows the level at the marker frequency in dBm Hz If you are using a delta marker for the measurement the results have the unit dBc Hz with marker 1 being the reference SLOE Center 1 GHz Marker Measuring the Frequency The R amp S FSH provides a frequency counter The frequency counter accurately measures the frequency at the marker position When calculating the horizontal position of the marker the R amp S FSH includes the current span center frequency and the frequency of the pixel the marker is on As the trace only has 631 pixels the marker position is just an approximation especially if the span is very wide With the frequency counter however you can get a more accurate result of the horizontal marker position If the frequency counter is active the R amp S FSH stops the measurement at the marker position for a short time and measures the frequency using the internal reference frequency O LIUU ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 107 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements The accuracy of the results
89. when you change a parameter or select a different cable or DUT Calibration also remains valid after turning off the R amp S FSH or changing into another operating mode as calibration data is saved in the internal memory of the R amp S FSH If you save the measurement in a dataset calibration data is part of that dataset When you restore the dataset and perform the same measurement again you do not have to recalibrate the R amp S FSH 7 1 5 1 Calibration States The calibration states are the same as for the network analyzer For more information see Calibration States on page 150 7 1 5 2 Calibration Methods In distance to fault mode the calibration method is a full 1 port calibration For more information see Calibration Methods on page 151 7 1 5 3 Performing a Full 2 Port Calibration For a description of a complete calibration procedure see Performing Calibration on page 153 O a UUU ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 185 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 El Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests 7 2 Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests For valid measurement results you need to specify the characteristics of the cable under test like model or frequency range 7 2 1 Selecting the Cable Model To determine the speed of propagation and therefore the precise distance to any faults you have to specify the cable model that you want to test The R amp S FSH already comes with an assortment of
90. with the base unit the application also feature a GPS Sync trigger It triggers measurements on synchronization with the base station Base SF Shows the current Base Spreading factor Base SF For more information see Setting the Base Spreading Factor on page 246 9 5 1 2 Global Results Global results contain various measurement results of the composite signal These results evaluate the total signal over the period of one Power Control Group PCG Channel Power Total power of the signal in dBm in the 1 23 MHz bandwidth around the center frequency Rho According to the CDMA2000 standard Rho is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideally generated reference signal When you measure Rho the CDMA2000 standard requires that only the pilot channel be supplied Composite EVM Shows the composite Error Vector Magnitude EVM in The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power root mean square to the power of an ideally generated reference signal An EVM of 0 means a perfect signal Carrier Frequency Error Shows the frequency error in relation to the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH For more information see Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error on page 247 Concerning uncertainty of the reference frequency of the GPS receiver refer to the data sheet Peak to Average Shows the difference between the peak power and the average power of the signal crest factor
91. wizard the R amp S FSH skips the calibration and directly starts the measurement e Measurements List of all individual measurements datasets that need to be performed for successful completion of the measurement task The list also shows the measurements that still need to be performed Some parameters of the measurement setup you can still change directly on the R amp S FSH These are mainly parameters whose details may not be available when you define the measurement set or whose details may differ depending on the measurement site e g the cable length or the cable model if it is different to the one defined previously gt To change a parameter select it with the cursor keys and activate the corresponding input field with the ENTER key gt Update all parameters that are not correct for the current measurement C LUU ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 34 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard EH Installing Firmware Options 2 1 2 2 Performing a Sequence of Measurements Now that you have updated all parameters concerning the measurement task you can start the measurement procedure gt Press the Start Meas Set softkey If calibration of the R amp S FSH is necessary for the measurement task it asks you to perform the calibration routine The stages of the calibration depend on the defined calibration routine For more information see Calibrating Measurements on page 150 Calibration pool The
92. 0 1 2 File Management 286 10 1 3 Operating Mode Selection eccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseneaeeeseeeaeeeseeaeesenaaees 286 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 5 R amp S FSH Table of Contents 10 2 Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer cccccccceeeenneeeeeeneeeseeneeeeseeeeenseceeensennenenees 287 10 2 1 Measurement Selection encrenca AEEA 287 102 2 Frequency Parameters vecscevesiactvviessecyeaiecced vacaceevegiacsevvadacedvbauaceebvalaceenedlactiveidaaeiys 289 10 2 3 Span Seletti vices sects echoes deene de 289 10 2 4 Amplitude Parameters osni ce lecevecuesen ace a i aa E RRA 290 10 25 Sweep CONTIQUIATION EE 290 10 26 Bandwidth Selection sue AA 290 10 27 Trace Functional esses E A E egdERAe ei 291 10 28 Display and Limit LINGS senecncccnsancaninnn ARA 291 10 29 M rkerg eessen EA EA 291 10 3 Functions of the Network AnalyZer ssssussssnunsunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 293 10 3 1 Measurement Configuration aeseeessseeeesseeesrneseernnsssnunstinnaetinnastinnaatannnatannaanannaaaanaaana 293 10 3 2 Frequency Parameters nernecnccrnrciiediiiiai n 293 10 3 38 Span Selections iiic i aana a a ade AE 294 10 3 4 Amplitude Parameters sicicscscccssdiaceevenacacrsaeuctebantacaassabucteveade aa aa ia addaa aa aa 294 IHN Sweep Comiguraton eege eege aE NE E T 294 10 36 Bandwidth Selection cc ccccdilecieilesnesldieeiidiavedeeesaddnedlaienesaanenesiedneeaiaeeeee 294 10 3 7 Trace Eupen ee A
93. 1 Measurement Configuration ccc cece ee eeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenteeenenaes 301 10 6 2 Frequency Parameters c ccceccccccsscceeeeseeeteceseneeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeedeneeesedeneeenedeneeenseneees 301 10 6 3 Span Selectman iiai ai EE NEEEE EENS dE ES aaa 301 10 6 4 Amplitude TE EC 302 10 6 5 Sweep Configuration c2cccccectesdeeneeiane ceeeaateeteacaeeeedanecesaguenteeaabeceeaneceeaaneecees 302 10 6 6 Bandwidth Selecto s cs civeiececvsdiesdivvadccgavvaacsed vaccecvediaadiyeadacqavvaaacsebvekadoavenecuevediaccenys 302 10 6 7 Trace Functionality scciissscceseeectiatseetendieetiecianeectaatiaviaageeeedinenidiantaciaaneaed een eaaeenees 302 10 6 8 Mark6rS s2 c csssreisiseteviacetetaanddidaneentencie ete laatetesaandniaaggeeteadinet enlaces last adeaaneteaaciantens 303 10 7 Functions of the Interference Analyzer Map Mode c cccssseeesseteenseeneeenees 304 10 7 1 Measurement Configuration neeesser einna 304 10 7 2 Frequency Parameters 22 ccccccecccccsecceeeceeneeeeeeeneeenegeeeeesesaneeseeceneeeeedeneeenedeeeeeeeeeeees 304 10 7 3 Amplitude Parameters icictssiccrsdescteseecaccerbaeastetennesuesvdadaten sade aa aa ai dA aAA N A a 305 10 7 4 Sweep CONMQUIAtION ET 305 10 75 Bandwidth Selecionada a E EE a 305 10 76 Trace Functionality c sees RA 305 10 8 Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer ssssssssssnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 306 10 8 1 Measurement Configuration ss
94. 100 Ref Position 10 75 Q FSH Z38 Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep ec ei kl frets r kl base Bandwidth Selection The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths ED ke rel ke ete fei Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces Polygon Oof Functions of the Receiver Mode 10 6 8 Markers The MARKER and MKR keys open a menus to control markers and use marker functions Softkeys in the Marker Menu Delete Selected Delete All Delta Delete All Softkeys in the Marker To Menu Selected Markers All Markers Search Limits On Off Center Level Marker Center Marker Freq Level Marker Level Functions of the Interference Analyzer Map Mode 10 7 Functions of the Interference Analyzer Map Mode 10 7 1 10 7 2 This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in the Maps mode of the interference analyzer Map mode functionality is available only with options R amp S FSH K15 and or K16 Measurement Configuration The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and Ce EE the measurement paee ron Lesen ww Bes Ean Go To Current Position Show GPS Information Trace Current Position Show Compass Inf
95. 1173 6275 12 24 212 General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Trace Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the trace mode gt Select the trace mode you want to work with If you have selected the average trace mode Average 10 menu item the R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the number of sweeps the R amp S FSH includes in the averaging gt Enter the number of sweeps to include in the averaging In continuous sweep mode the R amp S FSH now calculates the moving average over the number of sweeps you have specified In single sweep mode it stops the measurement after finishing the sweeps and averages the traces R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Result Displays of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 9 2 General Result Displays of the Digital Modulation Analyzer The R amp S FSH provides several result displays that are available for all digital modulation options There are two methods to view and analyze the spectrum of the signal you are currently measuring the spectrum overview and the isotropic antenna result displays Both result displays are integrated into the digital modulation options so you do not have to switch modes if you want to have a quick glance at the spectrum Fora detailed analysis of the signal however you should still use the spectrum analyzer operating mode The screen layout and contents of the spectrum re
96. 128 occupied bandwidth c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45 DOwer SenSor ssssssissssessrsrrreserrtntrteerrrrnsnrseererenarseenne 128 spectrum emission maek 61 TDMA POW EE 49 Start stop Treguency 83 189 SIEP S ZE ebeeeeeegigedee a a aa aeaa 81 Subframe Copfiouration 281 OWE OD ee e EEN 92 98 Sweep mode 92 193 211 Sweep number 93 97 193 SWCD me se Anan keene as 92 GH e 240 Sync ID TO SCDMA EE 263 Svpnchrontzatton 21 211 239 248 253 275 Synchronization Signal cccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeee 273 Tau IXEV DO WEE 251 CIMA AE 240 TDMA power 48 adjust level 23 Zegeie deed deg hasene niaan eegeeg ech A 49 ellene Le EE 49 reference level dead raian onnaa niaaa 49 standard EE TD SCDMA carrier frequency error 269 code domain errot Sep 2 257 Gain imbalance si 2 257 UO offset 257 BEE 256 result SUMIMALY 0000 eee ee eeeetee cece eeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeteeenaeeees 255 Scrambling COME iso sede venta dada ied 257 Scrambling Code Ass nsec naredna ed aie 266 TD SCDMA power 258 el WE 64 Threshold AM modulation det 66 Timedomai E 48 84 93 Time lN Enia aiaia 76 Total harmonic distortion ccccccceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 64 Total power 1XEV Re EE CDMA2000 peisina a a EE GoM eis aera wisn ote cyanide tiene TE AAEE E e Ange er cern crs tener AE TD SCDMA iiss toasts danse aiao dadadada W CDMA jacinta
97. 3 1 4 Power Measurements on TDMA Signals When TDMA time division multiple access methods are used e g for GSM several users share a channel Each user is assigned a period of time or timeslot With the TDMA power measurement you can determine the power over one of the timeslots The TDMA power measurement is a measurement in the time domain span 0 Hz You can start it on an external or video trigger and specify the power measurement time To prevent incorrect power measurements in the time domain make sure that the whole signal is within the selected resolution bandwidth If the resolution bandwidth is too small the displayed power will be lower than the actual power gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the TDMA Power menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the TDMA power Two vertical lines define the measurement range Screen layout for TDMA power measurements Ref 5 0 dBm RBW 300 kHz SWT 1 ms Trace Clear Write Att 25 dB VBW 1 MHz Trig Video Detect Sample Burst Length 75 0 55 0 l t Burst Length Q ETD Center 1 GHz Span Zero Span 7 Standard per Mode Adjust SWP Time Length Standard TDMA power Measurement limits Trigger delay Trigger level Measurement time TDMA power measurement softkey menu NOOR WD EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 48 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performi
98. 5 dBm 15 dB 25 dB 25 dB 35 dB 6 to 10 dBm 20 dB 30 dB 30 dB 40 dB 11 to 15 dBm 25 dB 35 dB 35 dB 40 dB 16 to 20 dBm 30 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 21 to 25 dBm 35 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 26 to 30 dBm 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB C a UUU es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 87 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the RF Att Amp Imp softkey gt Select either the Auto Low Distortion or the Auto Low Noise menu item The R amp S FSH sets the attenuation according to the table above gt Select the Manual 0 dB menu item for manual selection of the RF attenuation The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the RF attenuation You can set the attenuation from 0 dB to 40 dB in 5 dB steps To indicate a manual attenuation the R amp S FSH puts a red dot at the Att hardware setting Att 10 dB 3 2 2 6 Using the Preamplifier To increase the input sensitivity the R amp S FSH provides an integrated 20 dB preamplifier after the input mixer In the default state of the R amp S FSH the preamplifer is turned off If you want to measure signals with low powers you can turn it on gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the RF Att Amp Imp softkey gt Select either the Preamp On or Preamp Off menu item The R amp S FSH turns the preamplifier on and off 3 2 2 7 Setting the Input Impedance In the default state the input impedance is 50 Q The
99. 55 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals Switching Point Shows the switching point in a subframe that separates uplink and downlink For more information see Defining the Switching Point on page 267 Slot Number Shows the time slot 0 to 6 of the TD SCDMA subframe that is currently analyzed For more information see Selecting a Time Slot on page 268 Max Users Shows the maximum number of midamble shifts in a cell Because each midamble is user specific the midamble shifts also define the number of users that can be served in one cell Channel Phases Shows the phase characteristics of the code channels For more information see Selecting the Phase Characteristics of the Code Channels on page 269 9 7 1 2 Global Results Global results contain various measurement results of the composite signal These results evaluate the total signal over the period of one slot The global results also contain information about the quality of the measured signal Note that some results are only evaluated if the channel search has been turned on For more information see Using the Channel Search on page 266 RF Channel Power Shows the total power of the currently measured TD SCDMA signal Note that the RF Channel Power shown in the Result Summary is measured over one time slot The RF Channel Power shown in the Spectrum Overview is measured over one complete subframe In case of over the air m
100. 75 12 24 263 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 5 The Time Domain Power Result Display If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K48E the Time Domain Power result display becomes available The Time Domain Power result display shows the power of the signal over one TD SCDMA subframe 5 42 ms or 7 time slots including the pilot time slots This measurement is useful to determine which time slots contain power Screen layout of the time domain power result display US 3 Ref 25 0 dBm Ate 5 dB RBW 30 kHz Sweep Cont Ref Off 0 0 dB Preamp On Trace Clear Write Slot Power C I Comp EVM Slot Power C I Comp EVM dBm dB dBm dB 33 72 42 89 2 4 98 95 38 80 11 98 2 30 75 43 07 98 74 N A Y 30 74 KEN 98 95 30 74 44 15 98 95 1 Current type of result display 2 Currently selected standard 3 Header table 4 Result table 5 Diagram 6 TD SCDMA softkey menu The result display consists of a result table in the upper part of the display and a diagram in the lower half of the display The diagram contains a trace that shows the power of the signal over one TD SCDMA subframe The time slots in the frame are represented by blue vertical lines Each time slot is also labeled with a number A subframe consists of 7 normal time slots therefore the range of numbers is 0 through 6 The trace always begins with time slot 0 Note that the diagram also shows three
101. 9 Pausing measurements sseeeesseeeeeeeseerreneseserrrrrrseene 194 PBC EE 274 Seel al A EE 228 PGFUG EE 274 PIGH EE 240 251 Playback sie arenae aeriana a Aa E Sa KUE ENIGT 76 PN offset AXEV DO E 253 CDMA2000 dd snd ceed ces ruaan aasman a inaa an 248 PN scanner IXEV DO indsin paini eae eg r e elea ee aa na re 252 CDMA2000 eisirean a a ea Power meter Power percentage Power sensor attenuation averaging time Se SEN H drechonal e EE FETEreNnCE level serait eedeggehet e denen d ees 123 Standard WEE 128 DE teg dees geedeiendeeee een d sde acct 123 128 weighting mode E 128 ZOTOMNG HE 122 Preamplifier cif scescstsscse evens iaaea aidataan Ades 88 211 PROS ege eege eege 14 Preview datas EE 27 Primary Transcducer 116 ST EE 228 P SYNC nnnsnsosnnnnnnsssnenirnnsnsinrnrnsnsrnrnrnessserrnrnnsrsrirnnnnesenn 274 QUASI DOAK tisina aiaa 203 R amp S FSH4View ACIR eanan EE ERNA 52 calibration EE 154 creating Standarde 41 45 49 54 61 isotropic antenna EE Receiver aes S Record Spectrogram ccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 75 Reference channel iessu rnrn anae 57 Reference Treguency 108 Reference impedance sseseeersiserrreerirrerrireerrrsernerrens 170 Reference leese eege Ee 85 Channel power 41 digital MOGUIAtION 0 0 0 2 eee eect e eee eeeeeteeeeeeeteeetteeeeeeeeees 210 directional power SENSOF eee eee eee eeeneeeeeaes 128 occupied bandwidth
102. AM modulated signals and calculates the modulation depth of the signal using the measurement results Note that the measurement works properly only if you apply an AM modulated signal gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the AM Modulation Depth menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the AM modulation depth After you have started the measurement the R amp S FSH places three markers on the trace The first marker is placed on the peak power level The R amp S FSH assumes that position as the level of the carrier The second and third markers are delta markers These are placed symmetrically on the adjacent peak values to the left and right of the carrier Screen layout for the AM modulation depth measurement 14 01 10 15 27 Bet 20 0 dBm RBW 100Hz SWT 25s Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB VBW 100Hz Trig Free Run Detect Auto Peak MI 100 0001 MHz 27 2 dBm 1 kHz 12 1 dB 1 kHz 12 0 dB 03 Viod Depth aa Hi Threshold 80 0 dBm m0 O 32 0 t t t t t un ED BO e 8 9 f t 2 0 SITT DU A gesi Center 1D0 MHz Gs Marker list Modulation depth Trace Threshold line Markers blue lines AM modulation depth softkey menu OO Om E Go By default delta marker 2 is active for editing If you move the delta marker to another position the other delta marker will be moved by the same distance relative to the normal m
103. BW 300 kHz Trig Free Run Detect Max Peak in the trace memory with the Select Trace softkey gt Press the Trace Memory softkey The R amp S FSH saves the active trace gt Press the Show softkey gt Select the Memory lt x gt menu Center 1 GHz Span 20 MHz item r Mode Detector Memory Show The R amp S FSH shows the corresponding memory trace If active it labels the Memory lt x gt menu item with an X 3 2 5 5 Using Trace Mathematics Trace mathematics substract the memory trace from the live trace and vice versa and then display the results gt Press the TRACE key Ref 10 0 dBm RBW 300kHz SWT 20ms Trace Clear Write Att 30 dB gt Press the Trace Memory il softkey gt Press the Show softkey gt Press the Trace Math softkey gt Select the Trace Memory or Memory Trace menu item The R amp S FSH calculates and D 71 GH shows the resulting trace Manuel cont es SWP Time aia gt To turn off trace mathematics select the Off menu item Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 101 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 6 Using Markers The spectrum analyzer mode provides marker and deltamarker functionality In addition you can use several marker functions 3 2 6 1 Using Markers and Deltamarkers The R amp S FSH has six markers five of which can be used as either markers or delta markers The markers cann
104. Channel Table A Measurements without channel search Measurements without channel search are only possible for result displays that do not analyze the code domain In the Result Summary only results that do not require analysis in the code domain are displayed 9 7 6 2 Specifying the Scrambling Code To demodulate a 3GPP signal you have to know the scrambling code of the base station you are testing You can enter the scrambling code manually or let the R amp S FSH automatically find the right scrambling code s Defining the scrambling code manually gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Set Code Manually menu item gt Enter the scrambling code of the base station you are testing Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 266 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals Performing a search for the scrambling code If you don t know the scrambling code the R amp S FSH is able to determine the scrambling code of one or more 3GPP base stations by itself gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Auto menu item in the Scrambling Code category With each sweep the R amp S FSH starts a search for the scrambling code If it finds the code the synchronization will be successful If not the synchronization fails 9 7 6 3 Selecting the Maximum Number of Users The TD SCDMA standard allows the ass
105. DE 15 ksps 2278 dB Gain Imbalasce 078 Avg RCDE 64 QAM dB Composite EVM 31 79 P CPICH 15 ksps P CCPCH 15 ksps Code 1 Power 60 46 dBm Power Abs 6539 dBm Eclo 4 46 dB Ec le 9 39 dB Symbol EVM rms EEN Symbol EVM rms 200 P SCH Power Abs 63 38 dBm SCH Power Abs 63 70 dBm 7 Result Display Display Setting Current type of result display Currently selected standard General settings Global results Channel results Synchronization state green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed 7 3GPP WCDMA softkey menu OO Om E Go bh A Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 225 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 1 1 General Settings For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 209 In addition the application features some settings specific to the 3GPP standard For more information on each type of parameter see Configuring the Measurement on page 233 Scrambling Code Shows the way you have selected to determine the scrambling code In case of manual selection the field shows the actual number of the scrambling code In case of automatic selection the field shows an Auto label Antenna Div ersity Shows the currently selected antenna diversity P CPICH Slot Shows the slot number the results are displayed for Ch annel Search Shows the status of the channel search 9 4 1 2
106. Directional Power Sensor R amp S FSH Z14 or Z244 Source Load Power sensor jack SS GO EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 126 R amp S FSH Power Meter SS SS ee eee Using a Directional Power Sensor 4 2 2 Performing and Configuring Measurements After you have connected a power sensor the R amp S FSH immediately starts to measure the signal power When measuring high powers pay strict attention to the following instructions to avoid personal injury and to prevent the power sensor from being destroyed Risk of skin burns and or damage to the R amp S FSH Measuring high powers may lead to skin burns and or damage to the R amp S FSH You can avoid it by e Never exceeding the permissible continuous power The permissible continuous power is indicated on a diagram on the back of the power sensor e Turning off the the RF power when connecting the power sensor e Connecting the RF connectors tightly Defining the center frequency To get the most accurate results you should synchronize the frequency to that of the signal Note that the R amp S FSH maintains the center frequency that you have set in another operating mode In that case it uses that frequency as the power sensor frequency If you want to perform measurements on another known signal you can change the power sensor frequency manually gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Freq softkey An input field to define the frequency opens gt
107. Enter the frequency of the signal The R amp S FSH transfers the new frequency to the power sensor which then corrects the measured power readings Zeroing the power sensor For more information see Zeroing the power sensor Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 127 R amp S FSH Power Meter SS SSS ee eee Using a Directional Power Sensor Setting the power measurement weighting mode For forward power display the R amp S FSH provides both average power and peak envelope power gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Fwrd Pwr Display softkey gt Select the weighting mode you require The R amp S FSH indicates the weighting mode at the Forward Power heading Forward power AVG average power Forward power PEP peak envelope power Selecting the unit for the power readout When using a directional power sensor the R amp S FSH displays the forward power as a logarithmic level value in dBm relative value or as a linear value in W or mW absolute value In addition you can define a reference level relative to which the R amp S FSH indicates the level difference in dB Load matching is indicated as return loss in dB or as voltage standing wave ratio VSWR In addition the absolutely reflected power can be displayed in W or the reflected level in dBm For more information see Selecting the unit for the power readout Setting the reference level If you have selected the unit dB Rel for the forward power the R amp
108. For more information see Selecting the Slot and Code Channel on page 235 Symbol rate Shows the symbol rate of the currently selected code channel Channel power Shows the power of the complete signal Power Shows the power of the currently selected code channel The result is either in absolute values or relative to the P CPICH channel If more than one code belongs to a channel the R amp S FSH shows the power of the complete channel For more information see Changing the Code Power on page 236 Composite EVM Shows the EVM of the complete signal 9 4 2 3 Diagram Area The Code Domain Power result display contains the measurement results in graphic form It shows the power of all codes in the signal In the graph each bar represents one code channel A complete channel may consist of more than one code The displayed codes have different colors The color of the code depends on the state of the channel it belongs to e Yellow active code channels e Turquoise inactive code channels e Red currently selected code channel The power of the codes is a relative value The reference power is the power of the pilot channel You can also display the absolute powers of the code channels For more information see Changing the Code Power on page 236 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 230 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer EH Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 3 The Code Domain Channel Table If you eq
109. Frequency a 9 SAL SC A aa Frequency domain Time domain Time Figure 11 1 Visualization of time domain and frequency domain Applying the Fourier transform to the periodic square wave transforms it into the frequency domain The spectrum analyzer would show the fundamental or frequency of the square wave and its harmonics The spectrum analyzer uses a narrow bandpass filter for measurements in the frequency domain Only at frequencies containing a signal there is a reading that gives the amplitude of the frequency component Figure 11 2 shows the basic principle of how a spectrum analyzer works Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 311 R amp S FSH How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer Input attenuator x deflection generator for sweep Figure 11 2 Block diagram showing the basic functionality of a spectrum analyzer The precision attenuator at the R amp S FSH input attenuates the signal to a level that the mixer can handle without overdriving the mixer The attenuator is directly coupled to the reference level You can attenuate the signal in the range from 0 dB to 40 dB in steps of 5 dB The mixer converts the RF signal to a fixed intermediate frequency IF This process usually involves several stages It lasts until you get an IF for which good narrowband filters are available The R amp S FSH needs three mixing stages to get an IF that the filter can hand
110. GPS receiver Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 248 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals 9 6 Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals Equipped with the software application R amp S FSH K47 you can perform measurements on downlink 1xEV DO signals in accordance to the 3GPP2 standard with your R amp S FSH gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Dig Mod Analyzer softkey gt Select the 1xEVDO BTS menu item The R amp S FSH starts the signal analysis After you have started the measurement the R amp S FSH first records a section of the signal that lasts approximately 27 ms or about 1 Sync Frame Period If the instrument is in a triggered mode external or GPS trigger it then searches for the start of the PN code in the vicinity of the PN offset you have entered If you are using the automatic PN Offset the R amp S FSH performs a full search for the PN offset and reports the PN found For a free run situation the R amp S FSH searches for the start of the PN sequence over the entire signal length The R amp S FSH performs various general measurements over one slot as well as measurements on specific channels It then shows the results in tabular form in the Result Summary display To get highest measurement accuracy it is necessary to synchronize the reference frequency of the R amp S FSH with the base station via the EXT REF IN input or with an optional GPS receiver eS SSeS See Operating
111. Global Results Global results contain various measurement results of the composite signal These results evaluate the total signal over the period of one slot Channel Power Shows the power of the complete signal in dBm Carrier Frequency Error Shows the frequency error in relation to the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSH and that of the device under test If the frequency error is more than 1 kHz the R amp S FSH is not able to synchronize with the signal If possible you should synchronize the receiver and the transmitter UO Offset Shows the DC offset of the signal in This value is valid only when the R amp S FSH is in channel search mode EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 226 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals UO Imbalance Shows the UO Imbalance of the signal in This value is valid only when the R amp S FSH is in channel search mode Composite EVM Shows the Error Vector Magnitude in The EVM is defined as the ratio of the mean error power of the signal to the power of an ideal reference signal To calculate the mean error power the root mean square average of the real and imaginary parts of the signal is used This value is valid only when the R amp S FSH is in channel search mode Active Channels Shows the number of active channels in the signal Scr Code Found Sho
112. Good Coverage Level Average Coverage Level or Bad Coverage Level menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the signal level associated with the coverage conditions EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 139 Working with Maps Superimposed geotags If one or more geotags superimpose each other you can define rules which geotag or its color is actually displayed gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Default Indicator menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the geotag that shall be displayed e Best the geotag with the best signal level is displayed e Average the geotag with the average level is displayed e Worst the geotag with the lowest signal level is displayed R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Working with Maps 5 2 3 Measuring Interference Interference measurements usually require an antenna to localize the source of those interferers The R amp S FSH supports several antenna models e R amp S HL300 Connected to the R amp S FSH at the AUX port and the RF input e R amp S HE300 Connected to the R amp S FSH at the power sensor jack and the RF input You can control the antenna functionality in several ways in the general setup of the R amp S FSH For more information see the Quick Start Guide of the R amp S FSH 5 2 3 1 Selecting an Antenna Model For easy access the R amp S FSH allows you to select the antenna model directly in the in
113. H can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the Select Calkit menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the calibration kit The list of supported calibration kits covers those supported by the R amp S FSH and those that you have customized gt Select the calibration kit you are using The R amp S FSH uses the characteristics specified for the calibration kit It also shows the calibration kit currently in use next to the Select Calkit menu item You can also use calibration kits other than the R amp S FSH Z28 or Z29 in combination with their characteristics However make sure that the electrical length of the calibration kit in use is similar to that of the R amp S FSH Z28 or Z29 The electrical length of the Open and Short of the R amp S FSH calibration kits is 5 27 mm If the electrical length is different it may cause additional phase error EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 154 Calibrating Measurements Some measurement setups may include additional cables or adapters that may have an additional electrical length To correct their phase error you can include the electrical length of additional test equipment The R amp S FSH distinguishes if the equipment is connected to port 1 or port 2 gt Press the MEAS
114. ID the current results correspond to For more information see Selecting the Cell Identity on page 280 Cyclic Prefix Shows the cyclic prefix the current results correspond to For more information see Selecting the Cyclic Prefix on page 280 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 273 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals Traffic Activity Percentage of traffic slots with data SINR Shows the Signal to Interference and Noise ratio The SINR is the ratio of the signal power and the sum of interference and noise power RSSI 3GPP TS 36 214 Shows the Received Signal Strength Indicator RSSI The RSSI is the complete signal power of the channel that has been measured regardless of the origin of the signal RSRQ 3GPP TS 36 214 Shows the Reference Signal Received Quality RSRQ The RSRQ is the ratio of the RSRP and the RSSI UO Offset Shows the power at spectral line 0 normalized to the total transmitted power The UO offset may be an indicator for a baseband DC offset or for carrier leakage 9 8 1 3 Allocation Summary The allocation summary becomes active when you have set the MIMO settings to a specific antenna connected by cable The allocation summary contains the results for specific aspects of the signal like channels and modulation For each value the R amp S FSH shows the power in dBm and the average error vector magnitude EVM For more information see Configuring EVM Res
115. K Synchronization burst 9 3 3 Configuring the Measurement 9 3 3 1 Selecting the Training Sequence The training sequence or midamble is a known bit sequence required to synchronize the user equipment and the base station The number of bits that carry the training sequence depend on the modulation They are transmitted in the center of the GSM burst The standard defines eight training sequences numbered 0 to 7 The R amp S FSH is able to determine the training sequence in a burst automatically Alternatively you can select the training sequence manually Manual selection of the training sequence may become necessary if two base stations operate on the same frequency for example In that case you can select to measure one base station rather than the other gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select either the TSC Manual or TSC Auto menu item In case you have selected the Manual menu item the R amp S FSH opens an input field to select a particular training sequence 9 3 3 2 Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error If possible you should synchronize the receiver and the transmitter The carrier frequency error can have the unit Hz or ppm gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Hz or ppm menu item The R amp S FSH shows the carrier frequency error in the unit you have selected Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 223 R amp S FSH Digital Mod
116. LTE FDD BTS TDLTEBTS Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer 10 2 Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in spectrum analyzer mode 10 2 1 Measurement Selection The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and configure the measurement The spectrogram is available only if you have installed option R amp S ZVH K14 Wm Wm ee ee Wm Spectrum Emission Mask 3GPP BTS Spurious Emission Harmonic Distortion AM Modulation Depth Isotropic Antenna Channel Power Sete cl ote E om bearnan egene zeen Clear Write Max Hold Channel Pwr Hz Sort on Date Time Sorton Size Show all Files Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer Occupied Bandwith TDMA Power Sorton Size Show Combatible Show all Files Spectrum Emission Mask pee p a ten p mn keng Spurious Emission Harmonic Distortion AM Modulation Depth 10 2 2 10 2 3 Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer Spectrogram SCEE eid me Spectrogram Reference Level Spectrogram Level Range Spectrogram Auto Range Spectrogram Color Table Il Spectrogram Full Screen Spectrogram Playback Pesaro e eran taa t Default Black White Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set
117. Manual 1173 6275 12 24 249 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals 9 6 1 The Result Summary The result summary shows various measurement results and hardware settings in numerical form gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Result Summary menu item The R amp S FSH shows the numerical results in a table Als center 211 GHz RefLevek 20 0 8m Sweep Cent VI Chaenek 1 Ref Offset 0 068 Trigger Free Run Band cdmazk AWs Att 00 dB Preamp on PN Offset Auto 4 GPs Lat 48 7 3RSISN Long 11 36 43 296 E AN 584 8 m Global Results Total Power 35 00 dBm Peak to Average 1236 dB Carrier Freq Error 1 4365 kHz PN Found 2 Tow 15 23 ps Traffic Activity sox hannel Results Pwr Absolute Pwr Bei te Totat Pwr Rel to Pilot EVM Rho Pilot 31 05 dBm 6 57 dB 0 00 dB 15 1 000 MAC 30 65 dBm 4 94 dB 1 63 dB Data 31 04 dBm 3 38 6B 3 20 48 Current type of result display Currently selected standard General settings Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed Global results Channel results 7 CDMA2000 softkey menu PUN aon 9 6 1 1 General Settings For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 209 In addition the application features some settings specific to the 3GPP standard PN Offset Shows the current Pseudo Noise PN Offset of the
118. N in the input field that opens New User Master PIN Code Tice fg Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 17 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Taking Screenshots 1 6 Taking Screenshots You can take and store a screenshot of the current screen anytime with the gy key gt Press the gy key The R amp S FSH takes a screenshot If available the R amp S FSH stores the screenshot on an external storage device USB memory stick or SD card If both are connected the R amp S FSH uses the SD card If no external device is available the R amp S FSH stores the screenshot in its internal memory if there is enough left In that case you can transfer the pictures with the R amp S FSH4View software to your computer Saving screenshot and dataset at the same time Depending on the Capture settings available in the User Preference menu using the gy key also saves a dataset in addition to the screenshot For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 Screenshot file name All screenshots get a default file name Screenshot The files also get numbers HHHH in ascending order beginning with 0000 You can select a default file name and start number in the User Preference menu gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Default Filename and File Name Counter Starts At items and assign a file name and number as you wish Screenshot file format The file format
119. Off 9 4 4 4 Selecting the Slot and Code Channel The code domain power and code domain channel table result displays show the power of each code channel contained in one slot By default the R amp S FSH shows the results for slot 0 gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Slot Number menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select the slot gt Enter the number of the slot you want to analyze In the code domain power result display the numerical results that the R amp S FSH displays belong to one code channel only By default the R amp S FSH shows the results for the first code channel which is always the pilot channel gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Code Channel menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select the code channel gt Enter a number between 0 and 511 to select a particular code channel If you select a code that is part of a channel made up of more than one code results correspond to the channel not the one code Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 235 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 4 5 Changing the Code Power By default the application displays the absolute power of all code channels Alternatively you can display the power relative to the P CPICH gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Power Settings softkey gt Select the Rela
120. Port 12 and Transmission Rev Port 2 gt 1 Test port 1 or 2 is calibrated for transmission measurements S12 or S21 For measurements in forward direction this method calibrates port 1 in case of measurements in the reverse direction it calibrates port 2 The calibration requires a through connection and the calibration standards open and short e Normalize Normalization is a simple way to calibrate the measurement using one calibration standard only The correction data is deducted from this measurement As only one calibration standard is used the isolation between the test ports is ignored A possible cross talk between the test ports is therefore not eliminated and the accuracy is lower than that of a full calibration EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 152 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Calibrating Measurements 6 1 1 3 Performing Calibration The procedure below shows a full 2 port calibration routine All other calibration methods basically work the same way except for the type and number of calibration standards you are going to need gt Disconnect the DUT from the RF cable After disconnecting the DUT the R amp S FSH is ready for calibration gt gt gt gt Next the R amp S FSH asks you to Press the MEAS key Press the Calibration softkey Select the Full 2 Port menu item The R amp S FSH asks you to confirm the currently selected calibration The following calibration
121. R amp S FSH4 8 13 20 spectrum Analyzer Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement Operating Manual The Operating Manual describes the following R amp S FSH models R amp S FSH4 1309 6000 04 R amp S FSH4 1309 6000 14 R amp S FSH4 1309 6000 24 R amp S FSH8 1309 6000 08 R amp S FSH8 1309 6000 18 R amp S FSH8 1309 6000 28 R amp S FSH13 1314 2000 13 R amp S FSH20 1314 2000 20 R amp S FSH4 1309 6000 54 equivalent to 1309 6000 04 R amp S FSH4 1309 6000 64 equivalent to 1309 6000 14 R amp S FSH4 1309 6000 74 equivalent to 1309 6000 24 R amp S FSH8 1309 6000 58 equivalent to 1309 6000 08 R amp S FSH8 1309 6000 68 equivalent to 1309 6000 18 R amp S FSH8 1309 6000 78 equivalent to 1309 6000 28 R amp S FSH13 1314 2000 63 equivalent to 1314 2000 13 R amp S FSH20 1314 2000 70 equivalent to 1314 2000 20 YS we wow Ss aS The manual also covers the following options R amp S FSH K10 1304 5864 02 R amp S FSH K14 1304 5770 02 R amp S FSH K15 1309 7488 02 R amp S FSH K16 1309 7494 02 R amp S FSH K41 1304 5612 02 R amp S FSH K42 1309 5629 02 R amp S FSH K43 1304 5635 02 R amp S FSH K44 1309 5658 02 R amp S FSH K44E 1304 5758 02 R amp S FSH K45 1309 5641 02 R amp S FSH K46 1304 5729 02 R amp S FSH K46E 1304 5764 02 R amp S FSH K47 1304 5787 02 R amp S FSH K47E 1304 5806 02 R amp S FSH K48 1304 5887 02 R amp S FSH K48E 1304 5858 02
122. R amp S FSH adds the calibration data of each calibration you perform to a calibration pool available on its internal memory Each dataset in the calibration pool is unique for a particular calibration method and a particular measurement configuration Note that the calibration is only valid for the instrument it has been performed on Before you start a measurement sequence with the measurement wizard the R amp S FSH compares the contents of the calibration pool to the measurement configurations and required calibration methods in the measurement sequence e If the R amp S FSH has already been calibrated for a particular configuration it restores that data Another calibration is not necessary e If the R amp S FSH has not been calibrated for a particular configuration yet calibration becomes necessary The new calibration data is added to the pool Therefore calibration is necessary only for calibration methods that have not been used for a particular measurement configuration before However it is recommended to perform calibration on a regular basis to keep measurements as accurate as possible You can delete obsolete calibration data from the folder Public CalibrationPool Measurement sequence After having successfully calibrated the R amp S FSH it starts to go through the measurements that are part of the measurement set The sequence of measurements is as defined with R amp S FSH4View R amp S FSH shows a message box
123. R amp S FSH resumes scrolling through the spectrogram history The symbols on the right side of the spectrogram indicate the position of the spectrogram part currently displayed on the screen e A single down arrow in the right lower corner of the spectrogram indicates that the uppermost frame still represents the most recently recorded trace e Two arrows one up one down indicate that the spectrogram area displayed is somewhere in the middle of the available history e A single up arrow in the upper right corner of the spectrogram indicates that the lowest line of the spectrogram represents the end of the history buffer Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 72 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 10 3 Configuring the Display As colors are an important part of the spectrogram the R amp S FSH offers various ways to customize the display for best viewing results The first and most obvious way to configure the display is to select a different color scheme gt Press the Spectrogram Settings softkey gt Select the Spectrogram Color Table menu The R amp S FSH opens a submenu that contains several color schemes Default Green Yellow Green Blue Black White Red Purple Blue Black The following examples are based on the green yellow color scheme gt Select the color scheme you are most comfortable with The R amp S FSH adjusts the screen colors according to your selection It is poss
124. RKER key gt Press the Delete Marker softkey gt Select the Delete All Delta menu item gt Confirm the selection with the ENTER key The R amp S FSH deletes all delta markers Removing all markers at the same time gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the Delete Marker softkey gt Select the Delete All menu item gt Confirm the selection with the ENTER key The R amp S FSH deletes all markers and delta markers Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 105 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 6 7 Using Marker Search Limits The R amp S FSH allows you to use only a limited section of the trace for the Set to Peak Set to Next Peak and Minimum functions gt Press the MKR gt key gt Press the Search Limits softkey gt Select the Search Limits On Off menu item gt Confirm the selection with the ENTER key The R amp S FSH activates the marker search limits An X indicates an active search limit Two vertical red lines show the lower and upper limits in the diagram By default the search limit range is over the whole span gt Press the Search Limits softkey gt Select the Lower Limit menu item gt Confirm the selection with the ENTER key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the lower limit of the search range gt Enter the lower limit gt Confirm the entry with one of the unit keys If the span is wide enough the R amp S FSH displays
125. Shows the magnitude error of the analyzed time slot in The R amp S FSH calculates the magnitude error over the useful part of the burst The useful part of a burst is defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 220 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on GSM Signals Slot EVM 8PSK modulated slots only Shows the Error Vector Magnitude EVM of the analyzed slot in The EVM is defined as the ratio of the mean error power of the signal to the power of an ideal reference signal Peak EVM 8PSK modulated slots only The Peak EVM is the peak value of the EVM of all symbols in the useful part excluding tail symbols of the analyzed slot The RMS EVM is the root mean square value of the EVM of all symbols in the useful part excluding tail symbols of the analyzed slot UO Offset BPSK modulated slots only Shows the DC offset of the analyzed time slot in Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 221 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on GSM Signals 9 3 2 The Burst Power Result Display If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K10E the Burst Power result display becomes available The Burst Power result display shows the power of the signal over time You can choose to display the power over a single and complete GSM frame 4 615 ms or over a single timeslot about 567 us This result display is designed to check if the power and timing of the bursted signa
126. T key gt Press the Level Adjust softkey The R amp S FSH performs a measurement to determine the ideal reference level It uses a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz a video bandwidth of 1 MHz and the peak detector After finishing the automatic measurement the R amp S FSH sets the ideal reference level 3 1 3 3 Setting the Channel Bandwidth The channel bandwidth specifies the frequency range around the center frequency over which the R amp S FSH performs the power measurement gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Chan BW softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to specify the channel bandwidth gt Enter the channel bandwidth you need The R amp S FSH sets the appropriate span for the channel bandwidth that you have entered span 5 x channel bandwidth This ensures that no incorrect channel power measurements are made The minimum channel bandwidth that you can set is 2 kHz at a span of 1 kHz 3 1 3 4 Defining the Percentage of Occupied Bandwidth By default the power percentage inside the occupied bandwidth is 99 a number most standards require If you measure standards that specify another power percentage you can change that value gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Power BW softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the power percentage gt Enter the power percentage you need The value you enter here is the power percentage that has to be inside the channel bandwidth relative to the po
127. TF measurement shows you the exact distance to the fault in meter or feet regardless by what the fault is caused In addition the measurement shows the degree of the fault in dB From this information you can determine the component that has the fault and its seriousness In order to determine the distance to a cable fault the R amp S FSH measures the reflections of the cable under test in the frequency domain The R amp S FSH first determines the magnitude of the reflections for a particular frequency by comparing the phase of the reflected signal and a reference signal created by the tracking generator It then performs inverse fast fourier transformation IFFT on the signal that has been received In combination with the characteristics of the cable model the R amp S FSH is able to determine the distance the reflections have been travelling Because of its sensitivity by first measuring in the frequency domain and subsequent IFFT the measurement is able to locate faults in a cable accurately To keep this accuracy the R amp S FSH also accounts for any attenuation that occurs over distance in a cable If you are measuring the cable only make sure to terminate the other end into a load gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the DTF menu item The R amp S FSH calculates the distance to cable faults The figure shows the results of a DTF measurement The peaks that the trace shows at the marker positions are possible faul
128. The data base is the video voltage of the analyzer The R amp S FSH provides several types of detectors e Auto Peak If the auto peak detector is active the R amp S FSH displays both the maximum and the minimum power levels that were measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel Therefore the auto peak detector loses no information If a signal power level fluctuates e g noise the width of the trace depends on the magnitude of the signal fluctuation The auto peak detector is the default detector e Max Peak If the max peak detector is active the R amp S FSH displays only the maximum power levels that were measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel The max peak detector is useful for measurements on pulse or FM signals for example e Min Peak If the max peak detector is active the R amp S FSH displays only the minimum power level that were measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel The min peak detector displays sine signals with the correct level and suppresses noise Therefore it is useful to find sine signals in the vicinity of noise Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 98 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements e Sample If the sample detector is active the R amp S FSH shows one random power level that was measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel The sample detector is useful for measurements in the time domain span 0 Hz as it provides the o
129. Type Type of channel indicates an inactive channel The following channels can be detected Channel Type Channel F PICH Pilot channel displayed as PICH F SYNC Synchronization channel displayed as SYNC All other channel types are not automatically differentiated and named as CHAN Walsh Ch SF Channel number including the spreading factor in the form lt Channel gt lt SF gt Symb Rate ksps Symbol rate that the channel is transmitted with 9 6 ksps to 307 2 ksps RC Radio configuration The RC is a predefined physical layer configuration for the transmit signal It defines the physical channel configuration based upon a specific channel data rate In the current CDMA2000 Standard nine RCs are defined in the forward link Status Status display Unassigned codes are identified as inactive channels Power Abs dBm Absolute power of the channel in dBm Power Rel to PICH Total dB Relative power of the channel in dB The reference channel is the PICH or the total signal depending on the reference power you have selected Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 244 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 4 The PN Scanner If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K46E the PN scanner becomes available If you are measuring over the air OTA signals you can use the PN scanner to identify base stations in the area Every
130. USER key gt Press one of the softkeys F1 to F6 in the menu Note that the label of the softkeys depends on the settings made in the User Preference Setup menu The R amp S FSH immediately activates the dataset assigned to that softkey Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 28 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Updating the Firmware 1 8 3 Deleting Datasets If you have to delete a dataset you can do so with the file manager gt Press the SAVE RECALL key gt Press the File Manager softkey The R amp S FSH opens the file manager gt In order to delete a single dataset press the Select Action softkey Select Delete and the dataset currently selected is deleted after your confirmation In order to delete multiple data sets the respective datasets have to be marked first gt Press the Mark softkey to mark files for deletion gt Select the dataset you d like to delete gt Mark the data sets with the ENTER key The selected data sets should be checked in the Status column Repeat the selection by moving the cursor with the rotary knob or the cursor key and marking more data sets with the ENTER key gt Press the Select Action softkey gt Select the Delete menu item and confirm with the ENTER key or the Select Action softkey Before deleting the data set the R amp S FSH shows a warning message that you need to confirm After confirming the deletion process the R amp S FSH deletes the selected dat
131. a 2X 4x and amp RBW 10kHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Write 8x zoom eAtt 0dB Trig Free Run Detect Sample gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Zoom softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to control the zoom function It also draws a rectangle on the display that corresponds to the parts of the display about to be di Center 1 95 GHz Se Span 130 MHz wn mmm KAN zoomed In Move X Move Y Factor Active The size of the rectangle depends on the zoom factor gt Press the Zoom Factor softkey RBW 10kHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Write Trig Free Run Detect Sample gt Select the menu item with the zoom factor you want The R amp S FSH adjusts the size of the rectangle By default the position of the rectangle is the area in the center of the display You can also change the position of the rectangle Center 1 95 GHz Span 130 MHz Se EE zom Move X Move Y Factor Active The magnitude of the shift is a percentage and ranges from 50 to 50 for both vertical and horizontal directions The zero point 0 in vertical and horizontal direction is the center of the Smith diagram gt Press the Move X softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field gt Enter a value between 50 and 50 to shift the window horizontally Entering negative values moves the rectangle to the left positive values move it to the right gt Press the Move Y softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field gt Ent
132. a 4 digit PIN The R amp S FSH opens an input field to confirm the PIN PIN Code Protection ULN gt Enter the 4 digit PIN again If the PIN confirmation was successful the R amp S FSH shows a corresponding message and activates PIN protection In that case you have to enter the PIN every time the R amp S FSH boots If the PIN confirmation was not successful the R amp S FSH shows a corresponding message and does not activate PIN protection In that case repeat the last steps You can change the PIN any time you want gt Select the New PIN Code menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define a new PIN New PIN Code Mi gt Enter the new PIN gt Confirm the new PIN The R amp S FSH changes the PIN accordingly ee eres Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 16 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Configuring the Instrument You can define a User Master PIN the same way By default the User Master PIN is the OEM Master PIN as shown in the Instrument Settings dialog box gt Select the Master PIN Code menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define a User Master PIN Master PIN Code User Master gt Enter a 10 digit number for the User Master PIN The R amp S FSH opens an input field to confirm the User Master PIN gt Confirm the PIN The R amp S FSH shows a message if the change was successful or not gt Alternatively select the User Master PIN Code menu item and enter a 10 digit PI
133. a red vertical line to indicate the lower limit gt Define the upper search limit the same way Deactivating marker search limits gt Press the Search Limits softkey gt Select the Search Limits On Off menu item gt Confirm the selection The Search Limits softkey turns grey again and in the Search Limits menu the X is no longer displayed Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 106 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 6 8 Using Marker Functions In addition to the frequency and level readout the R amp S FSH provides several more complex marker functions in spectrum analyzer mode Deactivating marker functions Selecting a marker function again while it is still active turns that marker function off Measuring the Noise Power Density The marker noise function calculates the noise power density at the marker position in dBm Hz The R amp S FSH includes several variables in the calculation of the noise power density including the trace pixel values the resolution bandwidth the detector and the level display mode absolute or relative To stabilize the noise power display the R amp S FSH uses the pixel the marker is on and four pixels to the right and four pixels to the left of the marker pixel Noise power density can provide useful information when you are measuring noise or digitally modulated signals However you will get valid results only if the spectrum in the
134. a sets from its memory 1 9 Updating the Firmware You can download new firmware versions from the R amp S FSH website http www rohde schwarz com product fsh htm The website also provides release notes for each new firmware version The release notes include instructions on how to perform a firmware update 1 10 Installing Firmware Options You can equip the R amp S FSH with several firmware options to enable additional operating modes or special measurements For more information see the Quick Start Guide O a UUU es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 29 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard EH Installing Firmware Options 2 Working with the Measurement Wizard When testing antennas and cables it is often necessary to perform a sequence of standardized and recurring measurements often in an environment that is not easily accessible To make sure that measurements are performed as required and to avoid a constant adjustment of parameters the R amp S FSH features a measurement wizard The measurement wizard combines several measurement configurations to a sequence of measurements or measurement set Because all relevant parameters have been set prior to the actual measurement and cannot be changed once the measurement procedure has begun the wizard is a good way to avoid mistakes and save time when setting up measurements This chapter describes the functionality of the measurement wizard For details on the
135. again You can also clear the spectrogram manually gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Clear softkey Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 71 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 10 2 Browsing Through the Signal History There are two ways to view parts of the measurement result history that have moved outside the visible area of the spectrogram gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Spectrogram Settings softkey gt Select the Spectrogram Full Screen menu item The R amp S FSH now uses the full diagram area of the screen for the spectrogram The number of lines in the spectrogram and therefore the displayed time period more than doubles gt The Spectrogram Full Screen menu item is marked by an X It may however be necessary that the spectrum result display is still visible to evaluate measurement results For this purpose the spectrogram has an invisible scrollbar that you can use to scroll up and down the spectrogram to the frame that you d like to see Scrolling through the spectrogram Turn the rotary knob or use the UP and DOWN cursor keys whenever you are viewing the spectrogram The R amp S FSH scrolls through the spectrogram history Note that this is only possible as long as no input field or menu is active To resume the spectrogram scroll function in this case gt Press the CANCEL key gt Use the rotary knob or the UP and DOWN cursor keys again The
136. al Axis Some results may not fit in the diagram area as it is configured in the default state of the R amp S FSH for example measurements on amplifiers If you are performing measurements on an amplifier you most likely have to change the scaling of the vertical axis in order to see the complete transmission function The R amp S FSH provides several ways to adjust the scaling of the vertical axis Changing the reference value Changing the reference value works like an attenuation or gain in that it moves the trace to another level The R amp S FSH adjusts the scale of the vertical axis accordingly The R amp S FSH indicates the value and position of the current reference value with a triangle at the vertical axis ED In the default state it is 0 dB and its position is the grid line at the top of the diagram The reference value only changes the 0 dB reference without actually attenuating or amplifying the signal level When changing the reference value make sure that you do not overload the R amp S FSH As long as the trace is completely within the diagram area and the reference position at the top of the diagram the risk of an overload is eliminated gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field gt Enter the reference value you need to see the trace completely The R amp S FSH moves the trace accordingly relabels the vertical axis and shows the new 0 GB reference in the hardware
137. an Fixed measurement mode is designed for measurements on single frequencies Scan measurement mode performs scans on a defined set of frequencies 8 1 1 Performing Single Frequency Measurements The R amp S FSH shows the result of the single frequency measurement in a result display that contains three main elements e Measurement or receive frequency e Power level measured at the receive frequency e Horizontal bargraph that graphically represents the currently measured power level In the default state the R amp S FSH performs the measurement on a single receive frequency If it instead shows the result display for a frequency scan you can access the single frequency result display manually gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Fixed Freq softkey The R amp S FSH shows the result display for single frequency measurements C LUU es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 197 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Selecting the Measurement Mode Screen layout of the bargraph result display amp Bet 47 0 dBuV RBW 1MHz MT 100ms Trace Clear Write Att 0 d8 Trig Free Run Detect Max Peak Freq 105 610 MHz O Level 200 dBuV e U H U U LU U I E U 7 0 20 HO Ne BO Po WO 40 40 60 Measurement mode Operating mode Header table Receive frequency and corresponding power level numerical Bargraph Receiver softkey menu OO Om P Gab 8 1 1 1 Defining the Receive Frequency In single frequency meas
138. an have the unit Hz or ppm gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Hz or ppm menu item The R amp S FSH shows the carrier frequency error in the unit you have selected eee EEE eres Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 247 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 5 5 Changing the PN Offset The standard uses the PN Offset to distinguish between base stations The PN offset determines the offset in the circulating PN sequence in multiples of 64 chips with reference to the event second clock trigger Each signal is spread with a Walsh code of a length of 64 or 128 and a pseudo random noise code PN code of a length of 215 Each BTS sector in the network is assigned a PN offset in steps of 64 chips If you use an external or GPS sync trigger you have to adjust the PN Offset according to the base station sector you are measuring gt gt gt gt Press the MEAS key Press the Signal Settings softkey Select the PN OFFSET menu Enter the PN Offset you need between 0 and 511 9 5 5 6 Synchronizing to a Base Station Using a GPS Receiver If you use a GPS receiver while performing measurements on a base station you can synchronize the sweep via the GPS receiver gt gt gt Press the SWEEP key Press the Trigger softkey Select GPS Sync menu item The R amp S FSH now synchronizes the sweep to the signal using the
139. and stop frequency you have set on the R amp S FSH Correct measurement results are therefore only possible if the frequency ranges of the SEM are inside the current span of the R amp S FSH Screen Layout for the SEM measurement Ref 31 9 d m SWT 142ms Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB g Free Run Detect RMS 2 1 000607143 GHz Tx Power 30 6 dBm Range Hz RBW Hz Peak Freq Hz Power Abs Power Rel 12750 M 8 500 M 1M 1 389 500000 M 90 31 d m 59 67 d6 8 500 M 7 500 M 1M 2 992390476 M 90 00 dBm 59 35 dB 7 500 M 3 5600 M 1M 3 995750000 M 90 02 dBm 59 39 4B 3 500 M 2500 M wk 4 997 450000 M 10386d68m 73 22 68 Center 1 GHz Span 25 5 MHz TT Sy mg Sg Gg Mode Standard Settings Standard Marker information SEM list Limit check result Spectrum emission mask red line Trace yellow line Peak P lt x gt and normal markers M lt x gt and D lt x gt blue line SEM softkey menu OANOaABRWNDN A Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 60 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements Markers in the SEM measurement In addition to the normal marker functionality of the R amp S FSH the SEM measurement provides special markers labeled P1 to Px The R amp S FSH activates and positions these special markers automatically after displaying the trace Each of these markers marks the peak level in each SEM subrange Thus the number of markers depends on the number of subranges defined for t
140. ange the display range you can increase or decrease the amplitude the R amp S FSH displays and e g include signal parts that are outside the displayed screen area The position of the reference value and the trace do not change gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range softkey gt Select one of the menu items to select the display range you want Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 191 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 El Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests Adjusting the vertical axis automatically The R amp S FSH provides an automatic scaling routine that scales the vertical axis in a way that the results fit ideally on the display The R amp S FSH does this by determining the minimum and maximum trace values and scaling the vertical axis according to these values gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range softkey gt Select the Auto Scale menu item The R amp S FSH performs automatic adjustment of the vertical axis Setting the reference position The reference position defines the position of the reference line in the diagram The reference position is a linear value between 0 and 10 Each value represents one horizontal grid line of the diagram 0 corresponds to the top grid line and 10 corresponds to the bottom grid line When you change the reference position the R amp S FSH also shifts the position of the trace by the magnitude of the reference position change It has no effect on
141. ann ee eee 57 reference channel 57 relative results 2 eecccceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 57 Standard WEE 54 transmission channel 54 Adjacent channel 54 Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio ACLR 51 Adjust level Channel power 41 occupied bandwidth eee ee ceeeteseeeeeneeeeeenees 45 BREUER 49 Adjust settings AM modulation det 66 Carrier to interference cccccceeceecteeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 133 carrier to noise E harmonic distortion AM demodulator AM modulation depth adjust settings threshold Amplitude we Antenna diversity Attenuatiom sonnie inne Audio demodulation M E 110 ie Eiserne iaa i Ea a i EEES E 110 Audio demodulator scicca 109 Auto low noise distortion ccccccccccccessseeceeeesssteeeeeeeeens 87 Autoipe ak EE 98 Auto span 189 Automatic scCalinmg 192 Average detector cccccccccceceseeceeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeseaeeeees 203 AVOETAQE ur 97 AVETAQING Wu 123 Bad e E 209 Bandwidth EE 89 193 FESOMUMOM E 89 VideO EEN 90 Base station test 217 224 237 249 254 270 Soe E TEET TT 113 Ewe EE 246 BEE eege 220 BTS SANNET os e Seck odiana eaa E eana 277 Burst length A 49 Burst DW adesioni aiana SAAR dE Edge gees 222 Cable engt oeukededegee oe aai Eege ENEE 190 Cable measurement MEST SQUUP DEE needs ses Cable model Cable tests Calibration Calibration kit Calibration method 151 Calibrati
142. ansforms gpx files into kmz files required by Google Earth It also contains a plug in that illustrates the signal levels measured at the GPS coordinates that you have added to the gpx file gt Start the R amp S FSH4View software gt Select Tools Geotag Mapping The software opens a dialog box to select a gpx file gt Select or remove one or more gpx files with the Add or Remove button In the pane on the right the software shows a list of individual GPS coordinates You can include or exclude individual locations by adding or removing the checkmark in the Enabled column gt Press the Save as KMZ button gt Define a name and location where you want to save the file to When you press Save the R amp S FSH4View saves the file and at the same time opens Google Earth to show the data Each GPS coordinate is represented by a colored dot The color of the dot represents the signal level that has been measured at the corresponding coordinate The color map is displayed in the Google Earth window You can change the color map in R amp S FSH4View gt Select Tools Geotag Mapping gt Press the Settings button gt Inthe Color Settings pane select a color and assign a signal level to the color Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 147 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Working with Maps 6 Network Analyzer Mode The network analyzer mode provides the functionality to characterize network
143. antenna status 14 Active menu item 3 Date and time 15 Unavailable menu item 4 Battery status 16 Currently selected menu item 5 Hardware settings 17 Selectable menu item 6 GPS information 18 Input field 7 Marker information 19 Vertical axis labeling 8 Reference position 20 Currently selected softkey 9 Invalid trace indicator and 21 Selectable softkey overload information 10 Diagram 22 Active softkey function 11 Marker 23 Unavailable softkey 12 Trace Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 10 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Means of Input 1 2 Means of Input The user interface of the R amp S FSH provides several elements for you to input data Alphanumeric keys Unit keys Rotary knob Cursor keys Enter key Cancel key Back key NOOR WD 1 2 1 Using the Alphanumeric Keys Using the alphanumeric keys you can enter numeric values or characters The alphanumeric keys include the numbers from 0 to 9 the alphabet a minus sign and dot If you have to enter a numeric value press the corresponding key In case of numeric values each key covers just the number that s printed on it You can enter negative values with the minus sign key and enter values that contain decimal places with the dot key If the R amp S FSH asks you to enter a character or you need to enter a character e g file names the key assignment changes Each key covers one number and more than one character with the first choice bein
144. anual VBW softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the video bandwidth gt Enter the video bandwidth you need The R amp S FSH uses the video bandwidth you have entered for the measurement If the video bandwidth is no longer coupled to the resolution bandwidth the R amp S FSH puts a red dot at the VBW hardware setting e VBW 300 kHz gt Press the Auto VBW softkey to again couple the video bandwidth to the RBW Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 91 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 4 Configuring and Triggering the Sweep You can find all necessary settings to configure the sweep itself in the sweep menu To access it press the SWEEP key 3 2 4 1 Setting the Sweep Time The sweep time is the time it takes the R amp S FSH to get the results that are contained in one trace In the frequency domain span gt 0 the sweep time is the time it takes the R amp S FSH to measure the spectrum in the specified span To avoid the display of spurs in the spectrum the sweep time has to meet some conditions e The sweep time depends on the resolution bandwidth If the sweep time is too short the resolution filter has no time to settle In that case the displayed levels will be too low For more information see Setting the Resolution Bandwidth e The sweep depends on the span If you increase the span you also have to increase the sweep time In its default state the R am
145. apter shows an overview of all instrument functions in the form of softkey and menu overviews 10 1 General Functions General functions are those that are available for all operating modes 10 1 1 General R amp S FSH Setup The SETUP key opens the setup menu that contains functionality to set up the R amp S FSH in general and functionality to set up the measurement Auto Accessory Detection Detected Accessory F1 User Key Dataset F2 User Key Label F2 User Key Dataset F3 User Key Label F3 User Key Dataset F4 User Key Label F4 User Key Dataset F5 User Key Label F5 User Key Dataset F6 User Key Label F6 User Key Dataset GPS Receiver Connected Position Fix of Tracked Satellites Signal Quali Time Interval Distance Interval Limits Save Mode Recording Storage Capture Screen Capture Dataset Capture GPX Default Filename Filename Counter Starts At Capture Screen Format Default Dataset Name Key Click Volume System Bee per Volume Beep on Power Overload New User Master PIN _ Reset to Factory Settings General Functions 10 1 2 File Management The SAVE RECALL key opens the file manager that contains functionality to manage datasets and other files 10 1 3 Operating Mode Selection The MODE key opens the mode menu that contains functionality to select the operating mode of the R amp S FSH 3GPP WCDMA BTS CDMA2000 BTS 1xEV DO BTS TD SCDMA BTS GEM IS
146. arker Note that this happens only if you move delta marker 2 D2 When moving delta marker 3 D3 only this marker is repositioned eee Es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 65 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements From the values of the markers the R amp S FSH then calculates the AM modulation depth The AM modulation depth is the ratio between the power values at the reference marker and at the delta markers When the powers of the two AM side bands are not the same the R amp S FSH uses the mean value of the two sideband values If the R amp S FSH is unable to find any AM modulated a carriers it shows the message No AM modulated carrier found 3 1 8 1 Setting a Threshold You can set a threshold that defines the minimum power level the signal must have If the power of the signal is below the threshold the R amp S FSH will not set the markers and therefore will not calculate the modulation depth gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Threshold softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the threshold gt Enter the threshold value you need The threshold is represented as a horizontal blue line in the diagram area 3 1 8 2 Optimizing the Settings In order to get the best results you can use the automatic adjustment routine that the R amp S FSH offers gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Adjust Settings softkey The R amp S FSH performs a sweep and repeats the peak search
147. arker and positions it on the next maximum level that has been measured In addition the delta marker input field opens The R amp S FSH adds the delta marker to the marker list and shows the marker position relative to the normal marker M1 You can perform the following actions e Enter a delta marker position with the number keys and confirm the entry with one of the unit keys e Change the delta marker position with the rotary knob or the cursor keys EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 103 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements gt Confirm the delta marker position with the ENTER key The delta marker input field closes gt To add more markers press the New Marker softkey several times until you have the number of markers you want in the display 3 2 6 4 Selecting the Marker Type When you add new markers they will be delta markers by default Their coordinates are relative to the first marker M1 You can turn delta markers into normal markers if you need absolute information about the marker position gt Press the MARKER key gt Select the delta marker you want to convert with the Select Marker softkey The corresponding marker symbol turns red and the marker input field opens gt Press the Marker Type softkey The delta marker turns into a normal marker Its label changes accordingly e g D2 to M2 and its coordinates are now absolute values 3 2 6 5 Automatic Pos
148. arly useful when sine signals are to be measured in the vicinity of the spectrum analyzer s intrinsic noise The sine signal produces a video signal that is a DC voltage At the IF however the noise is distributed over the whole bandwidth or in the case of the video signal over half the bandwidth of the resolution filter By selecting a narrow video bandwidth relative to the resolution bandwidth the noise can be suppressed while the sine signal to be measured DC is not affected The figures below show a weak sine signal In the first picture it is measured with a large video bandwidth and in the second with a narrow video bandwidth Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 313 R amp S FSH How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer Spectrum 28 05 08 07 38 8 Spectrum 28 05 08 07 39 8 Ref 60 0 dBm RBW 100 kHz SWT 200ms Trace Clear Write Ref 60 0 dBm RBW 100 kHz SWT 200ms Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB VBW 100 kHz Trig Free Run Detect Auto Peak Att 0 dB VBW 300Hz Trig Free Run Detect Auto Peak 90 80 70 60 50 50 40 30 20 WITT dr dy f i m 10 ae Peterman S P 100 kHz ene ieee eee eel VBW Cent 97 3 MHz Span 800 kHz Center 97 3 MHz Span 800 kHz RBW VBW VBW RBW VBW VBW Limiting the video bandwidth smoothes the trace considerably This makes it much easier to determi
149. ating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 33 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard Installing Firmware Options e Site Name Location of the measurement This field is available on the R amp S FSH only e Comments Comments about the measurement e g the external conditions during the measurement e GPS Position Shows the GPS position if you have connected a GPS receiver Pressing the ENTER key on this field results in an update of the GPS coordinates e Use Wizard Cable Settings Determines if you want to use the cable characteristics as defined in the measurement set or if you want to be able change cable characteristics on site Select Yes to use the predefined cable characteristics In That case the parameters below will be locked e Cable Model Cable model that you perform the measurement on You can define a cable model with the R amp S FSH4View software but can also change the cable model on short notice if necessary e Clear Cable Model Deactivates the currently active cable model e Cable Length Length of the cable that you perform the measurement on e Calibration Calibration method to use before the measurement starts This is a read only field the calibration method has to be defined with R amp S FSH4View You have to calibrate the R amp S FSH before you can begin with the measurement sequence defined in the wizard If the R amp S FSH has already been calibrated with the defined routine prior to starting the
150. ating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 43 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 3 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth The proper operation of a transmission network requires that all transmitters adhere to the bandwidths assigned to them The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth that contains a specified percentage of the entire power of the transmitter Numerous standards require a occupied bandwidth of 99 Therefore this is the default setting If you need another percentage for the occupied bandwidth you can set values from 10 to 99 9 After entering the channel bandwidth the R amp S FSH automatically selects the measurement parameters so that you can attain the best result gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the Occupied BW menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the occupied bandwidth Two vertical lines show the occupied bandwidth Screen layout for the occupied bandwidth Ref 2 2 dBm RBW 30kHz SWT 2s Trace Clear Write Att 20 dB VBW 300 kHz Trig Free Run e Detect RMS PT 4 100067 LU L ow Span 25 MHz mee Power Standard BW 1 Standard 2 Occupied bandwidth numerical 3 Channel bandwidth 4 Power percentage 5 Occupied bandwidth graphical blue lines 5 Occupied bandwidth measurement softkey menu Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 44 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mod
151. ault Mode R amp S FSH K41 El Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests 7 2 2 Configuring the Horizontal Axis The FREQ key contains all necessary functions to define frequency and distance parameters when performing cable measurements The contents of the menu depend on the currently selected measurement 7 2 2 1 Setting the Frequency Range for DTF Measurements In the default setting the R amp S FSH automatically selects a center frequency of 1 8 GHz R amp S FSH4 or A GHz R amp S FSH8 and a distance of 20 m The R amp S FSH optimizes the settings for the best resolution if you change the cable length If you have to keep the current frequency settings it is best to define a manual span Setting the frequency span When setting the frequency range it is best to first set the span and then the center frequency gt Press the SPAN key gt Press the Manual Span softkey By default the R amp S FSH automatically calculates the best span Auto Span for the best length resolution If the required span is too large for the current center frequency the R amp S FSH sets the center frequency to the smallest possible frequency gt Enter the span you need manually The R amp S FSH sets the new span Note that the maximum span you can set depends on the maximum cable distance you have defined and is never greater than the span calculated by the Auto Span function The minimum span that you can set is 10 MHz Setting the dis
152. ay Center 1CHz Bei Level 30 0 dBm Sweep Cont GES Bei Offset 0048 Sw Pet 3 nd RE Att 6048 Slot Number 4 Transd Preamp On Max Users 16 Ser Code U Ch Phases Fixed Global Results RF Channel Power 30 76 dBm Active Channels 4 Com EVM Ser Code Found N A Coden SF Status Modulation Code Symbol Powerabs Power rel to RF o EVM 48m Chae dB Current type of result display Currently selected standard 1 2 3 Header table 4 Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed 5 Channel table 6 TD SCDMA softkey menu 9 7 3 1 Header Table The header table contains various settings already discussed in the sections above For more information see The Result Summary on page 255 9 7 3 2 Global Results The global results contain various settings already discussed in the sections above For more information see The Result Summary on page 255 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 261 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 3 3 The Code Domain Channel Table The channel table is made up out of seven columns and a number of rows that depend on the number of channels The columns show the following information Code SF Number of the code channel and its spreading factor Status Status of the code channel Modulation Type Modulation type of the code channel Code Symbol EVM EVM of
153. base station For more information see Changing the PN Offset on page 253 The PN Offset only takes effect in combination with an external or GPS trigger Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 250 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals 9 6 1 2 Global Results Global results contain various measurement results of the composite signal These results evaluate the total signal over the period of one frame Global results also contain information about the queliaty of the composite signal Channel Power Total power of the signal in dBm in the 1 23 MHz bandwidth around the center frequency Carrier Frequency Error Shows the frequency error in relation to the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH For more information see Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error on page 253 Concerning uncertainty of the reference frequency of the GPS receiver refer to the data sheet Peak to Average Shows the difference between the peak power and the average power of the signal crest factor PN Found The PN offset found during auto PN offset operation Tau Tau is specified in the CDMA2000 standard It shows the timing error of the signal The maximum offset is specified at 10 us Traffic Activity Percentage of traffic slots with data 9 6 1 3 Channel Results Channel results contain various results specific to one or more channels The table contains e the absolute channel power in
154. base station is identified by its PN offset The PN Scanner shows the PN offset for every base station it has detected For every base station it also shows the its power graphically each yellow bar represents an active and detected base station and numerically in a table above the diagram Note that a GPS trigger is necessary to detect the PN offset of the base stations you are scanning GPS trigger is available with the R amp S FSH GPS receiver for example Trace modes Note that the PN Scanner supports several trace modes If you are using a trace mode other than Clear Write the bars depicting the PN offset may turn grey A grey bar is shown in case of base stations that have been detected in the past but are not currently detected For more information on the trace modes see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 97 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 245 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 5 Configuring the Measurement Some of the results depend on the measurement configuration 9 5 5 1 Setting the Base Spreading Factor The number of codes the R amp S FSH displays in the diagram depends in addition to the signal constellation itself on the base spreading factor you have set gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select either the 64 or 128 menu item The R amp S FSH applies the corresponding spreading factor to the measurement A base spreading
155. ble attenuation The cable attenuation in turn is necessary for a correct calculation of the reflection magnitude at the cable fault The cable length also defines the scale of the horizontal axis In the default configuration the R amp S FSH shows the whole cable length If the cable length you have set is shorter than the actual cable length the R amp S FSH does not display the faults of the whole cable A reflection at the end of the cable will not be shown However deliberately entering a cable length that is too short is a good way to increase measurement accuracy for a fault that is near to the measurement plane If the entered cable length is greater than the actual length the results for lengths beyond the actual cable length are obsolete because they are caused by multiple reflections gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Cable Length softkey gt Enter the length of the cable The range is from 3 m to 1500 m about 10 ft to 5000 ft If you do not know the exact length of the cable define a length that is about 20 to 50 larger than the best estimate The maximum cable length that is suitable for measurements depends on the cable attenuation Since the test signal must be routed twice through the cable the signal reflected at the cable end arrives with twice the cable attenuation in attenuated form at the input of the power divider Dynamic range decreases with increasing cable length If the cable attenuation exceeds 10
156. bmenu to select the level range gt Select the level range you need Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 199 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Selecting the Measurement Mode 8 1 2 Performing Frequency Scans Compared to single frequency measurements frequency scans perform a measurement on a particular set of receive frequencies The scan measures only those frequencies that are defined in the frequency range The space between the receive frequencies is not considered in the measurement The R amp S FSH shows the results for a frequency scan in a graphical result display The horizontal axis in that display represents the frequency spectrum covered by the scan The vertical axis represents the power levels The power levels for each frequency contained in the scan are represented by a vertical line at the receive frequencies that have been measured This type of display emphasizes the fact that the scan measures single receive frequencies only and not the frequencies between those receive frequencies gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Freq Scan softkey The R amp S FSH shows the scan result display Screen layout of the scan result display 03 12 16 36 Ref 47 0 dBuV cRBW 120kHz MT 100ms Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB Trig Free Run Detect RMS 100 1 MHz 3 6 dByV TE 4 8 Step 10 MHz Stop 1 GHz ee bb 1 Measurement mode 2 Operating mode 3 Header table 4 Marker 5 Scan results 6 Recei
157. browse through the history of spectra stored in memory In the marker information field the R amp S FSH shows the time stamp of the time line The time stamp of the first time line T1 is always referred to the top most Citra See frame e g a time stamp of 00 00 50 000 means that the data was measured 50 seconds prior to the top most frame gt Press the Select Time Line softkey again The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the position of the Center 952 MHz Span 3 84 MHz second time line T2 Mode Settings Update Spectrogram Spectrogram Time Line gt Enter a number with the number keys the rotary knob or the cursor keys The R amp S FSH positions the second time line on the selected frame Again it shows the time stamp of the time line in the marker information field AT value For the second time line T2 the information is relative to the first one T1 This means that the time stamp of the second time line can be negative if you have set it ona frame above the first time line If you scroll the time line through the frames of the spectrogram with the rotary knob or the cursor keys the R amp S FSH will show the spectrum corresponding to the selected frame in the upper window of the display You can use the spectrogram playback for a detailed analysis of the signal levels over time and compare signal details in the spectrum result display e g with the help of markers In addition to the time line hor
158. ce gt Select the trigger source you need The R amp S FSH activates the trigger Including a Delay Time When you are using a video trigger in the time domain or an external trigger you can delay the start of the measurement with respect to the trigger event by entering a delay time In this way you can include time differences between the trigger event and the measurement The range of the trigger delay is from O us to 100 s The resolution depends on the subrange Trigger delay Resolution 0to1ms 10 us 1 ms to 10 ms 100 us 10 ms to 100 ms 1 ms 100 ms to 1s 10 ms 1sto10s 100 ms 10sto100s 1s gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select the Trigger Delay menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the trigger delay gt Enter the delay time you need Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 94 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements Defining the Trigger Level When you are using the video trigger you have to define a trigger level The trigger level is a percentage of the reference level A trigger level of 100 is the same as the reference level A trigger level of e g 50 corresponds to the middle of the vertical axis The R amp S FSH indicates the video trigger level with a triangle gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select the Trace Video menu item The R amp S FSH opens a
159. cedure preset the R amp S FSH to restore the default configuration and connect the filter between the measurement ports gt Press the PRESET key gt Connect the DUT Start scalar measurements gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Scalar menu item Select the type of reflection measurement gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Reflection Port 1 menu item for reflection measurements on port 1 or the Reflection Port 2 menu item for reflection measurements on port 2 gt Select the Reflection Port 1 and Port 2 menu item for a simultaneous display of both the reflection on port 1 and on port 2 In case of a simultaneous display the R amp S FSH shows two traces with a different color in the result display One for the measurement on port 1 and one for the measurement on port 2 A label in the result display shows the port a trace belongs to Note that the simultaneous display of both ports is only possible with a high accuracy calibration Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 158 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Scalar Measurements Define the frequency parameters Before calibrating the measurement you should define the frequency parameters to avoid inaccurate results because of invalid calibration gt Press the FREQ key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the center frequency gt Enter a frequency of 2060 MHz gt Press the SPAN
160. cy prior to conversion For this purpose the R amp S FSH offers a frequency offset that arithmetically shifts the center frequency to higher or lower frequencies Thus the R amp S FSH displays the input frequency of the DUT Positive frequency offset is possible in the range from 1 Hz to 100 GHz in steps of 1 Hz The maximum negative frequency offset depends on the start frequency you have set The start frequency taking into account the frequency offset is always 20 Hz gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Freq Offset softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the frequency offset gt Enter the frequency offset you need The R amp S FSH adds the frequency offset to the center frequency you have set A red dot at the center frequency display indicates that a frequency offset has been set Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 82 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 1 4 Defining a Start and Stop Frequency Defining a start an stop frequency is best suited for example for measurements on harmonics or signals whose exact frequency is unknown gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Start Freq softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the start frequency gt Enter the start frequency you need gt Seta stop frequency with the Stop Freq softkey The R amp S FSH adjusts the horizontal axis according to your input beginning with the start frequency and ending with
161. d Load From File Unselect Limit Audio Beep Markers The MARKER and MKR gt keys open a menus to control markers and use marker functions Softkey in the Marker Menu sr s ete Delete Selected Delete All Delta Delete All ES Frequency Count N dB 3 0 dB Channel Volume 30 Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer Softkeys in the Marker To Menu Selected Markers All Markers Search Limits On Off Upper Limit Center Level Marker Center Marker Freq Level Marker Level Functions of the Network Analyzer 10 3 Functions of the Network Analyzer This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in network analyzer mode Vector network analyzer functionality is available only with option R amp S FSH K42 10 3 1 Measurement Configuration The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and configure the measurement Depending on measurement mode Depending on measurement mode Normalize Full Two Port Magnitude Full Two Port High Accuracy Phase Reflection Port 1 Magnitude Phase Normalize Transmission Fwd Port 12 VSWR Normalize Transmission Rev Port 21 Reflection Coefficient Reflection Port 2 Short Smith Chart Normalize Reflection Port 1 Short Cable Loss Normalize Reflection Port 2 Short Group Delay Select Calkit Electrical Le
162. d Min Peak Based on the markers the R amp S FSH then calculates the difference between the two signal levels and returns the result as the Carrier to Noise ratio Optimizing the Settings In order to get the best results you can use the automatic adjustment routine that the R amp S FSH offers gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Adjust Settings softkey The R amp S FSH performs a sweep and repeats the peak search sequence for the two markers Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 132 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Measuring the Spectrum 5 1 2 Measuring the Carrier to Interference Ratio The Carrier to Interference C I measurement is a tool to determine if a signal is affected by interference from neighboring channels In case of the carrier to interference measurement the R amp S FSH determines the distance between the level of the carrier and the second strongest level gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the Carrier to Interference menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the carrier to noise ratio After you have started the measurement the R amp S FSH places two markers on the trace The first marker is placed on the peak power level The R amp S FSH assumes that position as the level of the carrier The second marker is positioned on the second strongest level that has been measured Next Pea
163. d by a marker that the R amp S FSH places on the harmonic here M1 and M2 Note that all of the markers that have been set are normal markers that show the absolute frequency of the harmonic At the same time the R amp S FSH also calculates the values for the total harmonic distortion THD and shows the results in a box above the trace diagram The values are output in as well as dB If you want to see more than one harmonic the R amp S FSH can show up to six harmonics gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Harmonics softkey gt Enter the number of harmonics you d like to see 3 1 7 2 Optimizing the Display of Harmonics The R amp S FSH places the markers on the other harmonics even if they are outside of the display range gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Adjust Settings softkey The R amp S FSH performs a measurement to determine the ideal reference level frequency and span in order to display all harmonics 3 1 7 3 Activating the Harmonics List To see the exact frequency of the harmonic you can activate the marker list that shows the value for each harmonic or marker gt Press the MKR key gt Press the View List softkey The R amp S FSH displays the marker list that contains the values for each harmonic Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 64 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 8 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth The AM Modulation Depth measurement analyzes
164. d in a table each cell of which contains one term The table consists of 120 cells You can define the contents of each cell freely gt Press the SAVE RECALL key gt Press the Save softkey gt Press the Quick Naming softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box that contains the terms gt Select the term you want to add with the cursor keys Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 24 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets gt Press ENTER to add the term to the file name Location Site d actor it os VSWR B 850 The current file name is displayed SCH S ees in the line above the table aE Sa i LTE TD SCDMA So if you perform for example an ACLR measurement of an uplink LTE signal at a certain location you might want that information in the file name Site_LTE_UL_ACLR Space OK Change Export Table Item Insert gt Press the OK softkey to exit the quick naming table After you have exited the table the file name appears in the Save as field in the Save Dataset dialog box If necessary you can then add additional characters Note that by default the R amp S FSH adds a term without separators between each term If you need a separator between the term you can add a blank space or an underscore gt After having added a term press the _ softkey or the Space softkey Or to add a separator automatically upon adding a term gt Press the Auto Insert softkey gt Select
165. dB the R amp S FSH displays a warning indicating that the cable attenuation is too high It also indicates the maximum recommended cable length to get accurate results Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 190 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 El Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests 7 2 3 Configuring the Vertical Axis The amplitude menu contains all settings related to the level display 7 2 3 1 Adjusting the Scale of the Diagram The R amp S FSH provides several options to improve the vertical scaling of the measurement diagram The unit of the level axis is dB Setting the reference value The reference value defines the amplitude of the reference line The unit of the reference is dB The R amp S FSH indicates the position of the reference value with a yellow triangle at the vertical axis th When you change the reference value the R amp S FSH adjusts the labels of the vertical axis Changing the reference value changes the vertical position of the trace It does not change the position of the reference line gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref softkey gt Enter the reference value you want or move the reference with the rotary knob The R amp S FSH sets up the display accordingly Defining the display range The display range defines the scale of the vertical axis and therefore the amplitude between two horizontal grid lines The unit depends on the measurement format When you ch
166. dBm e the channel power in relation to the total signal power in dB e the channel power in relation to the pilot channel in dB for the pilot channel PICH the MAC channel and the data channel The absolute and relative channel power is an average over the time the channel is active in the measured slot In addition to the powers of the channels the channel results also show quality parameters for the pilot channel PICH EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 251 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals EVM Error vector magnitude EVM of the pilot channel in The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power root mean square to the power of an ideal reference signal An EVM of 0 means a perfect signal Rho Quality parameter Rho of the pilot channel Rho is specified in the CDMA2000 standard It is the normalized correlated power between the measured signal and an ideal reference signal The standard requires that only the pilot channel is measured to get the results for Rho 9 6 2 The PN Scanner If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K47E the PN scanner becomes available If you are measuring over the air OTA signals you can use the PN scanner to identify base stations in the area Every base station is identified by its PN offset The PN Scanner shows the PN offset for every base station it has detected For every base station it also shows the its power
167. domain power CDMA2000 isi rrira faves tees EAR DNL EEEE 241 TD SCDMA ccscieccascessecadenestcnchaceiencpaceeeaeenasbentotentoneestetes 259 WODMA EEN 229 COG ORC Maen ies EE S 246 Color map Constellation diagram cccccccceceteeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 276 resource allocations c ccccccsceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeteeeneeees 279 Color schemes Constellation Diagram Continuous sweep wee a T CONVENON S ice eege ee Correction data EHS eren doa He Wl eee E east CYCLIC OT EE Data management ssessssieieesrrrtteerririnrstsrrrirnnnssrrrn nte Data E Delay ME ce Aine AamuiediacniiantAd E Deltamarker i ciiccccsecescccvestecesoscsacesscscssssncseesscnentescestaveaseas Detechor EE EET T Digital modulation cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeee EV DO e r an S TA NIE Ge EE Svpchronzation vsisi iesi eenander niaii TD SCDMA isisi caaea e ava ETE Directional power sensot Display configuration spectrogram Display elements Display line shes S Display mode Display range cccccecccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee SPOCHOQIANM sa iaszvecheasdt cae ven diaa ewshag peewthensdeachagadeedl ARSCH Distance poarameierg Distance to fault eee cece eeceeeeeseneeeeeseeeeseaeees Dual EE Error vector magnitude AXEV DO ege CERS SEENEN eeEEE 252 EVM ETE v rall EE 272 External tigget issuvechcsstsacsascewcaticutdusnectsvneneveceeast
168. ds to the lowest grid line 10 corresponds to highest grid line 3 2 2 2 Setting a Display Range The display range determines the scaling or resolution of the vertical axis In the default state the display range is a logarithmic scaling over a 100 dB This corresponds to 10 dB per grid division The R amp S FSH provides other display ranges that either increase or decrease the resolution of the vertical axis Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 85 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements However increasing resolution does not increase the accuracy of for example the marker level readout but only makes it easier to read values off the trace You can also select a linear scale for the vertical axis In that case the power levels are expressed as a percentage of the reference level Linear scaling is useful to display AM modulated carriers in the time domain for example gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range Ref Pos softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the display range gt Select the display range you need The R amp S FSH adjusts the vertical axis accordingly 3 2 2 3 Selecting the Display Unit By default the vertical axis and therefore the reference level is scaled in dBm However the units dBmV dBuV Watt and Volt are also available Selecting the right unit is relevant for the marker level display because the unit of the marker level is the same as that of th
169. dulate signals of several telecommunications technologies Thus it can provide results for modulation characteristics channel characteristics or information about the signal quality The digital modulation analyzer consists of several firmware options Each option covers a specific telecommunications standard with functionality especially designed for that technology Measurements on GSM Signals on page 217 Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals on page 224 Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals on page 237 Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals on page 249 Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals on page 254 Measurements on LTE Signals on page 270 Each option of the digital modulation analyzer comes with a result summary This result display summarizes the most relevant results that you will need for successful base station tests For some options there is also an extended version that features additional functionality like graphic results R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 9 1 General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer Several settings and numerical results are available for all mobile radio standards supported by the digital modulation analyzer e General Settings in the Result Summary on page 209 e Trace Mode Selection on page 212 9 1 1 General Settings in the Result Summary The result summary includes some basic settings of the analyzer The contents are similar to those
170. dulation time you need The range is from 100 ms to 500 s In time domain the R amp S FSH demodulates continuously i e the demodulation time is not relevant Controlling the volume gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the Marker Function softkey gt Select the Volume menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the demodulation volume gt Enter the volume you are comfortable with The demodulation volume is a percentage 0 to 100 with 100 being full volume For more information on general volume control see the Quick Start Guide EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 110 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 7 Using Display Lines Like markers display lines help you to determine the level of the signal A display line is a straight line that runs horizontally and corresponds to a certain level value You can move the display line to each pixel in the display This means that the accuracy and exact vertical position of the display line depends on the resolution of the vertical axis With a display range of 100 dB for example each pixel corresponds to 0 3 dB In that case the accuracy of the display line is 0 3 dB If you enter a value with a higher resolution the R amp S FSH rounds that value You can also move the display line with the rotary knob or the cursor keys The step size for movement with the rotary knob is one pixel The step size for the cursor keys
171. e The R amp S FSH switches back to performing live measurements er SS SSS ee Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 78 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 11 Using Isotropic Antennas The R amp S FSH supports measurements with an isotropic antenna You can use any isotropic antenna available with the R amp S TS EMF system order no 1158 9295 05 Each of those antennas supports a different frequency range between 9 kHz and 6 GHz Test setup The test setup consists of an R amp S FSH and one of the isotropic antennas The necessary cables are provided with the antennas gt Connect the RF cable with the N coaxial connector to the RF input port 1 gt Connect the control cable to the power sensor interface 9 pin D Sub connector with the adapter cable that comes with the antenna If necessary you can connect an additional extension cable R amp S TS EMFZ2 order no 1166 5708 02 Starting the measurement gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Isotropic Antenna menu item After you have turned the isotropic antenna on the R amp S FSH uses the isotropic antenna for all measurements Note that when you turn the isotropic antenna on without having selected a transducer factor first the R amp S FSH asks you to select a transducer factor Using transducer factors The isotropic antenna is in effect a transducer Because it has a characteristic
172. e Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 3 1 Selecting a Standard If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications standard you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in the R amp S FSH memory However you can create new configurations to perform measurements on other standards as well gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Standard softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the standard gt Select one of the available standards gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH loads the configuration of the selected standard It automatically sets the optimal span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth sweep time and detector for the standard You can create and edit standards with the R amp S FSH4View software and transfer them to the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of standards the R amp S FSH can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 If you make changes to the settings or create datasets note that e the span is always coupled to the channel bandwidth Changes to either of those automatically adjust the other 5 x channel bandwidth e the resolution bandwidth should be between 1 and 4 of the channel bandwidth This ensures that the occupied bandwidth is measured with high accuracy e the video ba
173. e amplitude for each frequency by mapping different colors to every power level The result is therefore a two dimensional diagram The color the R amp S FSH assigns to a power level that was measured depends on e the color table you have selected e the spectrogram reference level e the spectrogram level range The spectrogram consists of horizontal lines each one pixel high that are called frames In the default state a frame is added to the spectrogram after each sweep This means that the amount of data in a frame depends on the sweep time As the spectrogram in the R amp S FSH runs from top to bottom the outdated time line s move down one position so that the present frame is always on top of the diagram Therefore the sequence of frames is chronological gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Spectrogram menu item The R amp S FSH starts the spectrogram result display Screen layout for the spectrogram Ref 20 0 dBm REW 100kHz SWT 20ms Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB VBW 1 MHz Trig Free Run Detect RMS 947 944 MHz 70 1 dBm 02 1 275 MHz 15 7 dB D 0002 52 121 CG 00 00 25 775 40 0 DI TT 800 Center 848 MHz Spar3 64 MHz groen Playback Sp Mo Clear Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 70 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements Result display Marker and time line information Spectrum result display optional Marker delta marker vert
174. e 223 Slot Shows the way you have selected to determine the slot that is analyzed In case of manual selection the field shows the actual number of the selected slot In case of automatic selection the field shows an Auto label 9 3 1 2 Global Results Global results contain various measurement results of the composite signal These results evaluate the total signal over the period of one slot RF Channel Power Total power of the signal in dBm in the 200 kHz bandwidth around the center frequency Burst Power Shows the signal power in the first time slot or burst that has been found Carrier Frequency Error Shows the frequency error in relation to the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH For more information see Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error on page 223 Concerning uncertainty of the reference frequency of the GPS receiver refer to the data sheet C I 8PSK modulated slots only Shows the ratio of the desired carrier power to the undesired signal power interference in dB The C I is an estimate derived from the EVM value Burst Types Shows the modulation type for each slot in the analyzed frame Each of the eight slots in the GSM frame may have a different modulation Thus the result is made up out of eight characters e g F INININI Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 219 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on GSM Signals The characters have the follow
175. e analyzed time slot gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Code Channel menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select a code channel gt Enter the number of the code channel you want to analyze The R amp S FSH adjusts the results accordingly The bar of the currently selected code channel is highlighted in red Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 268 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 6 8 Selecting the Phase Characteristics of the Code Channels The phase of the code channels is either fixed or arbitrary gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Fixed or the Arbitrary menu item In Fixed mode the phase of all code channels has to be the same In Arbitrary mode the phase of the code channels is allowed to rotate 9 7 6 9 Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error If possible you should synchronize the receiver and the transmitter The carrier frequency error can have the unit Hz or ppm gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Hz or ppm menu item The R amp S FSH shows the carrier frequency error in the unit you have selected 9 7 6 10 Selecting the Unit for EVM Results EVM results are usually calculated either in or in dB gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select either
176. e figure below shows some typical defects in a transmission system including defects on the cable Ye Antenna Segments Corrosion Broken Amplifier Signal Flow gt K Broken K Partial K Loose K Cable Cable Reflections Connector The R amp S FSH provides the necessary functionality to test the system equipment for its characteristics and identify faults when it is being installed or maintained e Reflection Measurements on page 182 e Distance to Fault Measurements on page 183 e Spectrum Measurements on page 183 Test setup A typical test setup to test cables and antennas includes the R amp S FSH an RF cable e g R amp S FSH Z320 order no 1309 6600 00 a calibration standard R amp S FSH Z28 or R amp S FSH Z29 order no 1300 7804 03 and 1300 7504 03 and the cable under test Cable and antenna tests also require a tracking generator and VSWR bridge The tracking generator transmits a reference signal through the internal VSWR bridge to the test port gt Connect the RF cable to the RF input port 1 or 2 gt Connect the test cable to the RF cable eee Es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 180 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 EH Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 gt For measurement on DUTs that need an external voltage supply e g power amplifiers you can connect the supply voltage from a suitable AC power supply to the BIAS Port 1 or use the internal bias By defau
177. e group delay is replaced by the phase delay for two reasons e Anelectrical length needs to be specified only for non dispersive DUTs in which phase delay and group delay match e Due to the significantly wider aperture the measurement certainty is an order of magnitude higher in the phase delay measurement than in the group delay measurement The result for the electrical length is correct only if the phase difference between two adjacent test points does not exceed 180 Available for vector measurements Delay time Shows the delay time of a cable The delay time is a numerical result that is displayed in addition to another measurement format The delay time is the propagation time of the wave or the time it takes the wave to reach its destination Available for the vector phase measurements 6 4 1 1 Working with the Smith Chart If you are displaying measurement results in a Smith chart available for vector reflection measurements the R amp S FSH provides several special functionality gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Measurement Format softkey gt Select the Smith Chart menu item The R amp S FSH shows the reflection of the DUT in the Smith chart Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 167 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results Zooming the Smith chart To take a better look at the results you can zoom and enlarge a particular part of the Smitch chart A The R amp S FSH provides
178. e only possible with models that feature tracking generator and VSWR bridge In addition to be able to determine the magnitude and phase characteristics of a DUT the option also features additional calibration methods and measurement functionality and formats e g group delay or phase gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Network Analyzer softkey The R amp S FSH turns on the tracking generator Frequency and level settings are inherited from the previous operating mode Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 148 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Working with Maps Screen layout of the network analyzer 9 2 04 08 09 10 02 3 Ref 0 0 d8 RBW 10kHz SWT 63ms_ Trace Clear Write 7 Att 0dB Trig Free Run Detect Sample Center 3 5 GHz Span 500 MHz Mode Calibrate E Format Result display Measurement mode 0 dB reference Status line S matrix Calibration status Measurement format 5 Trace window 6 Network analyzer softkey menu SS GO Defining the output level of the tracking generator The tracking generator generates a signal at the current R amp S FSH frequency The nominal output level of the signal is adjustable from 0 dBm to 40 dBm in steps of 1 dB gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the TG Output Attenuation softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the output level The output level is an attenuation between 0 dB and 40 dB that corresponds to the output level If you e g
179. e reference level gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Unit softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the display unit gt Select one of the available units The R amp S FSH adjusts the labels of the vertical axis accordingly 3 2 2 4 Setting a Reference Offset You can define a reference offset for the reference level With a reference offset you can increase the reference level by a certain amount This is useful for example if an attenuator or amplifier has been inserted before the RF input The R amp S FSH automatically takes the loss or gain into account when the level is displayed and no manual calculations are necessary A loss introduced at the RF input must be entered as a positive number and a gain as a negative number gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref Offset softkey The R amp S FSH open an input field to gt Enter the offset you need The R amp S FSH includes the offset in the measurement To indicate an offset other than 0 the R amp S FSH puts a red dot at the Ref hardware setting Ref 20 0 dBm Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 86 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 2 5 Setting the RF Attenuation RF attenuation adjusts the input range inside the analyzer It is coupled directly to the reference level If you have set a high reference level RF attenuation is turned on in 10 dB steps according to the table below so that the input mixer
180. e trigger you need for your measurement The trigger readout Trig shows the current trigger setting When external trigger are selected you can delay the start of the measurement with respect to the trigger event by entering a delay time In this way time differences between the trigger event and the measurement can be allowed for gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select the Trigger Delay menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to specify the trigger delay gt Enter the trigger delay you require The range for the trigger delay is 0 us to 100 s The step size depends on the length of the delay time Trigger delay Step size Osto1ms 10 us 1 ms to 10 ms 100 us 10 ms to 100 ms 1 ms 100 ms to 1 s 10 ms 1sto10s 100 ms 10 s to 100 s 1s Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 195 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 El Analyzing Measurement Results 7 3 Analyzing Measurement Results 7 3 1 Working with Traces For more information see Working with Traces on page 97 7 3 2 Using Markers For more information see Using Markers on page 102 When measuring the distance to fault the horizontal unit is meter or feet For all other measurements the horizontal axis is the frequency axis The unit of the vertical axis is dB for distance to fault and cable loss measurements and dBm for all others 7 3 3 Using Display and Limit Lines The display and limit line funct
181. eEEN 253 9 7 Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals ccccccsccceseecceeesneeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeneeeeseaes 254 9 771 The Result Summary EE 255 9 7 2 The Code Domain AnallyZev c ccccccccccceceencceeeeeeeneeeneneeeesnseeeeeesneeeeeneneeeeeneneeeesanes 259 9 7 3 The Code Domain Channel Table 0 00 0 cccceeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeetnieeeeesieeeeeeaa 261 9 7 4 The sync ID Result Display sessirnir asitiani iaaa aii AS NR N 263 9 7 5 The Time Domain Power Result Display 264 9 7 6 Configuring the Measurement esseessseesrierernsseernenrinnnseenndatinnnadduunatannnnaannadaannnaaaaa 266 9 8 Measurements on LTE Sigtnals cccccccssseeceseeseeeesesneeeeseseeneeseseeeeeesnaeeeeeseanseeeeaes 270 98 1 The Result SUMMA ENEE EEESRdAEEEEEEEEE ENEE EELER 271 9 8 2 The Result Summary for Carrier Aggregation cc ececeeeeeteeeeeseteeeeeteieeeeetiieeeereas 275 98 3 The Constellation Diagramm 276 CR Se NEE Le TEE 277 9 8 5 The Resource Allocations Result Display 278 9 8 6 Configuring the Measurement ccccccceeeesecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeneeneneeeeenaneeeeeneneneeees 280 10 Menu and Softkey Overview ssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 285 10 1 General Functions wis icc ccicceestc cee cecciecesccttcenecceteeeecctcenencedeceaceddeeeeccedeeweecteeeeecdsdenened 285 10 1 1 General R amp S FSH Getup cc cececceccceceeeeeeecee cece cece seceaeaeeeeeeeeesecacaeeeeeeesetecniaeeeeees 285 1
182. easurements 10 8 2 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the horizontal axis of the measurement diagram Cae p frre pew foto 1 MHz WCDMA 1 25 MHz CDMA2000 1 25 MHz 1xEVDO 1 4 MHz to 20 MHz LTE 1 6 MHz TD SCDMA 200 kHz GSM EVM According to Standard Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 10 8 3 Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the vertical axis of the measurement diagram 3GPP WCDMA TD SCDMA and LTE FDD TDD Curr petits kl fre Auto Low Distortion Auto Low Noise RF a GSM CDMA2000 and 1xEV DO Comer bd Fei igi reir 10 8 4 Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep 3GPP WCDMA TD SCDMA and LTE FDD TDD Gs en bel r k kel eg GSM CDMA2000 and 1xEV DO Creer bei bei r i s Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 10 8 5 Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces 3GPP WCDMA and LTE Spectrum Overview and Isotropic Antenna only mer pea e pom GSM CDMA2000 and 1xEV DO Spectrum Overview only er mm Kellen Clear Write Average 10 Max Hold Memory TD SCDMA Spectrum Overview only eel ai Average 10 Max Hold Min Hold d r
183. easurements the total power includes all received signals in the channel bandwidth Carrier Freq Error Shows the frequency error in related to the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH For more information see Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error on page 269 Concerning uncertainty of the reference frequency of the GPS receiver refer to the data sheet Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 256 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals UO Offset Shows the DC offset of the signal in Displayed only if the channel search has been turned on Gain Imbalance Shows the gain Imbalance of the signal in Displayed only if the channel search has been turned on Composite EVM Shows the composite Error Vector Magnitude EVM in The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power root mean square to the power of an ideally generated reference signal An EVM of 0 means a perfect signal Displayed only if the channel search has been turned on Peak CDE Shows the Peak Code Domain Error of the signal in dB The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum code domain error power that was found in the measurement The code domain error is the difference in power of the test signal and an ideal reference signal Displayed only if the channel search has been turned on Avg RCDE Shows the Average Relative Code Domain Error of the signal Displayed only if the c
184. ect one of the available channel tables After activating the channel table the R amp S FSH is set up according to the information contained in the channel table Instead of a center frequency the R amp S FSH shows the currently active channel number including the name of the channel The center frequency of a channel is defined in the channel table and is the frequency corresponding to the selected channel Selecting a channel Entering a center start or stop frequency is not possible anymore Instead you select a channel The R amp S FSH then adjusts the center start and stop frequency according to the channel table gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Center Frequency softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select the channel gt Enter the channel you want to perform measurements on The R amp S FSH changes the channel according to the channel table Channel numbers are assigned to frequencies as follows The first channel is assigned a channel number and a frequency All subsequent channels have ascending numbers The frequency spacing between channels is fixed It can also be negative i e the center frequency of the R amp S FSH decreases with ascending channel number In transmission systems containing gaps in the frequency range as in the case of television for example a channel table can comprise multiple ranges Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 115 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Usin
185. ect the GPS Position List menu item gt Select two or three geotags and display them on the map gt Press thze GPS Position softkey gt Select the Triangulation menu item The R amp S FSH calculate the intersection point of the geotags you have selected The result is displayed on the map as a dot that is surrounded by a circle By default the dot and circle are blue However you can assign a different color to the triangulation results For more information see Selecting Colors for Geotags on page 138 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 146 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Working with Maps Adding the triangulation result to the GPS position list gt Press the GPS Position softkey gt Select the Save Triangulation menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to enter a name and description for the new geotag gt Enter a name and description After you have entered name and description the R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to define a name for the file that conatins the new GPS information Note that the R amp S FSH stores triangulation results in a gpx file The gpx file format is a common file format used to store GPS information gt Press the Save softkey to save the new gpx file 5 2 5 Analyzing Geographic Data The R amp S FSH4View software package provides an interface that allows you to export and review your recorded data with Google Earth This interface tr
186. ection contains all softkeys and menus that are available in digital modulation mode Digital modulation functionality is available only with one of the corresponding options Measurement Configuration The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and configure the measurement GSM Result Summary 3GPP WCDMA Spectrum Overview Isotropic Antenna Code Domain Power Analysis Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer CDMA2000 Code Power Relative to Pilot Code Power Relative to Total Code Domain Power Code Domain Channel Table 1xEV DO TD SCDMA nee Code Domain Analysis only Absolute Relative to RF Channel Power Spectrum Overview Time Domain Power SynclD o Code Domain Power Code Domain Channel Table Limits Result Summary Contents depend on result display Set Switch Point manually Set K manually Slot Number Code Channel Channel Search Off Fast Channel Search On Normal Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer LTE FDD and TDD Isotropic Antenna Limits Result Summary Subframes to Analyze Connected to Tx1 Over the Air Connected to Tx1 Connected to Tx2 Resource Allocations Cable Connected Minimum ULIDL Configuration PSYNC SSYNC Reference Signal Auto o Resource Allocations BTS Scanner only available for TDD m
187. eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 92 3 2 5 Working wih WRC 97 320 USING Makas essssinninssiss an a aN S 102 3AT Using lee 111 328 Using Limit LINCS 2 ee0e0edeggehg teecnidieenicieednidev RR 112 3 3 Working with Channel Tables cccccsseeseseseeeeeeesenseeeseeeseseeneeseseseeesesseeeeeesesanens 115 3 4 Using Transducer Factors i c lt ccciicccsseccecvescecesescceccersscteenesatesedveccecevesaeecveysieteerrsscetes 116 3 4 1 Unit for Measurements with Transducers cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteneeeeetieeeeetieeeereae 117 3 4 2 Setting the Reference Level c ccccccscceeceenecceeeeneneeeeeneneeseeneceeeeeneceeeeenaneeeeenenenedent 117 3 4 3 Frequency Range of Transducer settee ee eeeeeeeeenieeeeesiieeeeetineeeeesnieeeeneaa 118 3 4 4 Data Sets Containing Transducer Factors ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeieeeeetieeeeeeneeeeeees 118 a Power Met r eeneg 119 4 1 Using a Power SenSor cececcsesseceseseeeeeseeeeeseseeeeeseseeeeeeesesneeseseeneesesesneesueseeesnseeneees 119 4 1 1 Connecting a Power Sensor ssseseessesissesrrstttrssttrtstttntnsttntnnttntnstintnatnn nasten nanten nnt 121 4 1 2 Performing and Configuring Measurements 122 4 2 Using a Directional Power SenSor cccsssccecesseneeeesseeseseeeeneeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseenseeesaes 125 4 2 1 Connecting a Directional Power Gensor 126 4 2 2 Performing and Configuring Measurements 127 4 3 Using the Channel Power Meter cccsssscsesse
188. eeeeeseeeeeeeseeaeeeeeenaeees 12 123 Using the Rotary KnOD i iniccic cccctcssceececscencetscsenseecteccentaetetecssecencatsescneessteccctedeccezetesenes eae 12 12 4 Using the Cursor EE 13 1 25 Remote Operatorning nig a aa aaae icteneccaccasaacaitengecteeveacdsanhecateaazaae 13 1 3 Presetting the R amp S FSH vciccccecsccccecctieceesesdectenstcececescdeecenstdeceesscdeetenstaeeedescenetexaectensady 14 1 4 Configuring Measurements sssssssseunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nna 14 1 5 Configuring the Instrument sssssssseenensnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 15 L Taking Screenshots wiiccicsciiecccess teste assoni AN RaR ASNN ARNARS ASANA NSAN ARRARAS 18 147 Saving MN CEET 19 1 3 Managing Datasets TE 21 1 8 1 Saving He 22 18 2 Restoring DataSets aare EAE E ESEA EAE EE a EAER 27 LR Deleting Datasets cese enne a AAEE EEA 29 1 9 Updating the Firmware cccccccssseceeesseeeeeeeneeeeeesneeseeeseeeseeesaeseeeseaeseseseaeeeeeseeseeesees 29 1 10 Installing Firmware Options 00 ccccccesseseeceeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseanseeeeeanseeeneaes 29 2 Working with the Measurement Wizard neen 30 2 1 1 Preparing the Measurement cc ccccsccccecssacceessaaccecvsnseceevanaces aan NNa R dunn 30 2 1 2 Using the Measurement Wizard cccccccceceeeccceseenceeeeeeeceeeseeaaeceeseaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaaeeeteees 33 2 1 3 Evaluating RESUIS sosisini r 38 3 Spectrum A
189. eeeetaeeeeeseeeeesneeeereae 200 8 2 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode cccceseeceseseeeseseseeeseseeeeneeeeseenens 203 8 2 1 Selecting Detectors for EMI Measurements 203 8 2 2 Selecting the Measurement Bandwidths for EMI Measurements 0000 205 8 2 3 Defining the Measurement Time 206 8 2 4 Working with Traces 00 0 ceeececeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesnaeeeeeenaeeeeeaas 207 8 2 5 USING TrANSCUCETS eee eceeeeeeeenne eect enter ee eae ee ee eeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeesesaeeeesenaeeseenaeeeeeeaas 207 8 2 6 Using Limit Lines eee cee eee enee ee erent ee ee eae ee erent esse eaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeiaeeeeenaeeeeseaas 207 9 Digital Modulation Analvzer ek NEn 208 9 1 General Settings of the Digital Modulation AnalyZer ceccsssssseesseeeeenens 209 9 1 1 General Settings in the Result Summary 00 0 eect cette teeter eee e tees ee tteeeeetnaeeeeeeaa 209 9 1 2 Trace Mode Selection ccc ceccicceceseseecesenteescuccteneeuentqaedeuetecdecdhigaceedeneeseveuigeseetiqecdeuers 212 9 2 General Result Displays of the Digital Modulation Analyzer ccssseeeeeee 214 9 3 Measurements on GSM Signals cccccesseeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseaneeeeeees 217 9 321 The ReSult Summary sieren ien rinni eni eN EAEE EEEE 218 9 3 2 The Burst Power Result Display 222 9 3 3 Configuring the Measurement sssrssssisrresrrsdssnnnadennnantundnnennddianna dadaunan ad
190. ef softkey The R amp S FSH sets the current result as the reference level It then displays the measured level relative to the reference level in dB The unit is automatically set to dB Rel Setting the averaging time The averaging time determines the length of the measurement The longer the averaging time the more stable the display particularly if signals have low power or are noisy The averaging time is either Short Normal or Long e Ashort measurement time provides stable and accurate results for stationary sine signals with high levels gt 40 dBm It is also appropriate for measurements that require a high repition rate e Anormal measurement time increases the stability of results for signals with low levels or modulated signals e Along measurement time is appropriate for signals with very low power levels lt 50 dBm To eliminate noise and the effects of noise on the measurement effectively use the R amp S FSH Z1 power sensor gt Press the Meas Time softkey gt Select the measurement time most suitable for your test setup Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 123 R amp S FSH Power Meter EH Using a Power Sensor Taking additional loss or gain into account At high powers that cause the power sensor maximum input level to be exceeded or at very low levels that are below the R amp S FSH minimum sensitivity the R amp S FSH can take additional loss or gain between the DUT and the power sensor int
191. el bandwidth of 30 kHz a resolution bandwidth of 30 kHz is used SSS eee EEE ey Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 52 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements This yields correct results since the spectrum in the neighborhood of the adjacent channels normally has a constant level For standard NADC IS136 this would not be not possible for example since the spectrum of the transmit signal penetrates into the adjacent channels and a too large resolution bandwidth causes a too low selection of the channel filter The adjacent channel power would thus be measured too high If the RBW is automatically calculated by the R amp S FSH with the Auto RBW function the RBW is calculated as follows RBW lt 1 40 of channel bandwidth The R amp S FSH then selects the maximum possible resolution bandwidth resulting from the available RBW steps 1 3 e Setting the video bandwidth To obtain correct power measurements the video signal must not be limited in bandwidth A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal would cause signal averaging and thus result in a too low indication of the power 2 51 dB at very low video bandwidths Therefore the VBW should be at least three times the resolution bandwidth If the VBW is automatically calculated by the R amp S FSH with the Auto VBW function the VBW is calculated as follows VBW 2 3 x RBW The R amp S FSH then selects the smallest possible VBW with
192. ement takes longer but the EVM value incorporates more signal errors like inter symbol interference If the EVM is not measured with the EVM According to Standard option enabled optimum channel estimation and EVM calculation methods are used Especially for over the air measurements this setting is useful since influences of the air interface like inter symbol interference are compensated Additionally this mode is faster Selecting the unit of the EVM gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select either the or dB menu item The R amp S FSH shows the EVM in the unit you have selected Displaying the EVM according to standard gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Settings softkey gt Select the EVM According to Standard menu item If the R amp S FSH displays the EVM according to standard the menu item is marked by an X 9 8 6 9 Configuring Component Carriers When you are performing measurements on systems with carrier aggregation the R amp S FSH allows you to define several characteristics for each component carrier Selecting the number of component carriers The R amp S FSH supports measurements on two or three component carriers gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Settings softkey gt Select the Number of Carriers menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select the number of component carriers Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 283
193. ements R amp S FSH K42 6 3 2 Measuring the Reflection The example included here is based on a reflection measurement of the two port filter that was also used for the transmission measurement You can skip the preset vector measurement selection and frequency settings if you have already set up the R amp S FSH for the measurement You can also skip the calibration if you have performed the appropriate calibration already Preset the R amp S FSH Before starting the measurement procedure preset the R amp S FSH to restore the default configuration and connect the filter between the measurement ports gt Press the PRESET key gt Connect the DUT Start vector measurements gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Vector menu item Select the type of reflection measurement gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Reflection Port 1 menu item for reflection measurements on port 1 or the Reflection Port 2 menu item for reflection measurements on port 2 gt Select the Reflection on Port 1 and Port 2 menu item for simulatenous display of the reflection on both ports For more information see Performing Scalar Measurements on page 156 Define the frequency parameters Before calibrating the measurement you should define the frequency parameters to avoid interpolation of the results gt Press the FREQ key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the center
194. encies over the measurement time you have defined If you want to perform a single measurement or scan only select single scan mode gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Single Scan softkey to perform a single scan or measurement gt Press the Cont Scan softkey to perform a continuous scan or measurement When you select single scan mode the R amp S FSH performs the measurement once over the measurement time and then stops In case of frequency scans the R amp S FSH performs one measurement on each receive frequency in the scan range over the measurement time and stops when it has measured all frequencies that are part of the scan range Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 206 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode 8 2 4 Working with Traces In Receiver mode the R amp S FSH provides several ways to configure the trace display like the trace mode or trace mathematics For more information see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 97 Working with a Second Trace on page 100 Working with Memory Traces on page 101 Using Trace Mathematics on page 101 Performing Frequency Scans on page 200 8 2 5 Using Transducers For more information see Using Transducer Factors on page 116 8 2 6 Using Limit Lines For more information see Using Limit Lines on page 112 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode 9 Digital Modulation Analyzer In digital modulation analyzer operating mode the R amp S FSH is able to demo
195. equency domain the R amp S FSH would never start a measurement with the video trigger because there is no guarantee that there is a signal that generates video voltage present at the start frequency e External Trigger rising or falling slope A sweep starts on the rising edge RISE or on the falling edge FALL of an external trigger signal The external trigger signal is fed in via the BNC connector Ext Trigger The switching threshold is 1 4 V i e a TTL signal level e Gated Trigger When the gated trigger is active a gate signal that is applied to the R amp S FSH trigger input controls the sweep The R amp S FSH starts measuring when the applied gate signal becomes active and the set gate delay has expired and it interrupts the measurement as soon as the defined gate length is reached With the gate signal becoming active the next time the measurement is resumed etc Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 93 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements Pulsed signals can be measured by this method if the gate delay and gate length are selected in a way that the measurement is only performed while the pulse is active Gated measurements are possible in the frequency domain span gt 0 and the time domain span 0 but it is available only in combination with an external gate signal gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the trigger sour
196. er Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 142 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Working with Maps Defining the volume of the audio signal The R amp S FSH allows you to adjust the volume of the audio signal gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Tone Volume menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the volume gt Define a volume you are comfortable with The volume is a percentage from 0 to 100 with 100 being the loudest 5 2 3 3 Using Limits The R amp S FSH allows you to define limits within which the signal level must be in order to be recognized as a signal gt Press the LINES key gt Press the Upper Limit or Lower Limit softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the limits signals that are above the upper limit are ignored as well as signals that are below the lower limit Only the signal with these boundaries are actually considered in the analysis The limits you have defined are displayed in the power bar as red triangles Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 143 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Working with Maps 5 2 4 Gathering Geographic Data The main application of the Maps mode is to gather geographic data The R amp S FSH provides two main applications triangulation and geotagging 5 2 4 1 Geotags A geotag is a tag for a particular location that contains information about that location This informati
197. er EH Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 6 5 Selecting the Synchronization Signal The synchronization signal selects the way the R amp S FSH synchronizes to the LTE signal By default the R amp S FSH automatically determines the type of synchronization signal to use Alternatively you can select the synchroniztaion signal manually You can either synchronize to the PSYNC or SSYNC signals or synchronize to the reference signal gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the PSYNC SSYNC menu item The R amp S FSH synchronizes to the PSYNC or SSYNC gt Select the Reference Signal menu item The R amp S FSH synchronizes to the reference signal For more information see Reference Signal Overview on page 275 9 8 6 6 Selecting the MIMO Configuration You can perform measurements on equipment with 1 2 or 4 transmission antennas For measurements on base stations with one or two transmit antennas it is possible to perform detailed measurements on single antennas via cable connection Because the reference signals of the different antennas are orthogonal it is possible to determine and display their power and EVM during over the air measurements gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Antenna Settings softkey gt Select the menu item that corresponds to the setup of the equipment you are measuring If you want to measure a specific antenna select the antenna number Note that selecting a specific antenna in mult
198. er a value between 50 and 50 to shift the window vertically Entering negative values moves the rectangle up positive values move it down C LIUU es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 168 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results gt Press the Zoom Active softkey amp RBW 10kHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Write At 0 dB Trig Free Run Detect The R amp S FSH now zooms in on the area covered by the zoom window You can position the zoom window more accurately with the Move X and Move Y softkeys as described gt To deactivate the zoom functionality press the Zoom Se Active softkey again Conter 1 95 GHz Weve x Move Y Factor Using markers In addition to the standard marker functionality the Smith chart also features several marker output formats e dB Magnitude Phase Shows the magnitude in dB and the phase at the current marker position e Lin Magnitude Phase Rho Shows the converted magnitude in and the phase in rho at the current marker position e Real Imag Rho Shows the real and imaginary components at the current marker position e R jX Shows the real and imaginary components of the impedance at the marker position The imaginary component is converted to inductance or capacitance Marker frequency and sign are taken into account e G jB Shows the real and imaginary components of the admittance at the marker position The imaginary component is conve
199. er limit line In case of upper limit lines the R amp S FSH checks if the signal is above the limit line In case of lower limit lines the R amp S FSH checks if the signal is below the limit line You also have to make sure that the limit line is compatible to the scale of the horizontal axis gt Press the LINES key gt Depending on the application press the Upper Limit or Lower Limit softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the limit line gt Select the Load From File menu item gt Press the Sort Show softkey EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 112 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements gt Select the Show Compatible menu item The R amp S FSH shows all limit lines that are compatible to the current settings gt Select one of the available limit lines gt Press the Select softkey The R amp S FSH activates the limit line In the diagram the limit line is displayed as a red line If you have already selected a limit line you can turn the limit line on and off with the Limits On Off softkey Alternatively you can define a threshold that works like a limit line A threshold is a simple horizontal limit line gt Press the Upper Limit or Lower Limit softkey gt Select the Threshold menu item The R amp S FSH opens a input field to define the threshold gt Enter the threshold you need The R amp S FSH displays the line and performs a li
200. er of the display 5 2 2 3 Selecting Colors for Geotags For more information on geotags in general see Gathering Geographic Data on page 144 By default all geotags including all the labels associated with that geotag have the same color black Depending on the type of geotag you can assign different colors to the geotags Note that changing the color of a geotag in the interference analyzer R amp S FSH K15 also changes the color of the azimuth line Color of your current position To emphasize your current position you can define a different color to that geotag gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Current Position Color menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the color gt Select one of the colors available in the submenu The R amp S FSH applies the color as selected Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 138 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Working with Maps Color of previous positions R amp S FSH K15 In the Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 you can distinguish between your current position and positions that you have visited or saved earlier gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Saved Position Color menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the color gt Select one of the colors available in the submenu The R amp S FSH applies the color as selected In addition to the geotag you can also define a custom color for the
201. er than the one the R amp S FSH is calibrated for The calibration data for the factory calibration is already in the memory of the R amp S FSH when it is delivered The factory calibration is a full two port calibration EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 150 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Calibrating Measurements You can restore the factory calibration manually any time Press the Calibration softkey Select the User Calibration Off menu item e fcal The R amp S FSH uses factory calibration However the calibration is not accurate because the power of the tracking generator and the attenuation at the RF input are not in line with the default settings In that case you should repeat calibration e cal The R amp S FSH uses user calibration To get that state you have to perform either a full 1 port or a full 2 port calibration e cal The R amp S FSH uses user calibration However the calibration is not accurate because the TG power and receiver attenuation are not in line with the settings at the time it has been calibrated In that case you should repeat calibration e norm network analysis only The R amp S FSH uses normalization To get that state you have to normalize the transmission e norm network analysis only The R amp S FSH uses normalization However the normalization is not accurate because the TG power and receiver attenuation are not in line with the settings at the time
202. er the length of the burst you need The R amp S FSH performs the measurement over the time you have entered If the measurement time you have entered was greater than the sweep time the R amp S FSH sets a burst length equal to the sweep time To work with a greater burst length you have to increase the sweep time first The minimum burst length is the time corresponding to one trace pixel sweep time 631 3 1 4 3 Setting the Reference Level The reference level is the power level that the R amp S FSH expects at the RF input When selecting the reference level make sure that you do not overload the R amp S FSH by applying a signal whose power exeeds the maximum reference level Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 49 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements Because the resolution bandwidths of the R amp S FSH are implemented digitally after the A D converter the signal level at the A D converter can be higher than the level indicated by the trace depending on the selected resolution bandwidth To prevent the A D converter from being overloaded the signal must be measured at the widest resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth with the peak detector The trace maximum then determines the best reference level To simplify operation and to prevent incorrect measurements the R amp S FSH has an automatic routine for setting the reference level gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Level Adjust s
203. erforming Spectrum Measurements 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode The default operating mode of the R amp S FSH is the spectrum analyzer The spectrum analyzer provides the functionality to perform measurements in the frequency domain e g to identify the power of signals 3 1 Performing Spectrum Measurements In addition to basic spectrum measurements the R amp S FSH provides several specific measurements These measurements also in combination with one of the available accessories allow you to perform advanced and more complex measurement tasks 3 1 1 Measuring Basic Signal Characteristics Basic spectrum measurements determine the spectrum of a signal in the frequency domain or keep track of a signal in the time domain They provide a basic overview of the input signal characteristics Frequency domain In the frequency domain the R amp S FSH analyzes the input signal characteristics over a particular span You can use it for example to obtain basic measurement results like peak levels and the shape of the spectrum The horizontal axis shows the frequency the vertical axis shows the signal levels The measurement in the frequency domain is the default measurement mode Time domain In the time domain the R amp S FSH analyzes the characteristics of a signal at a particular frequency over time The span during time domain measurements is 0 zero span mode You can use time domain measurements for example to monitor the characterist
204. etineeeeetieeeeesneeeeeeaa 183 7 1 3 Spectrum Meaeurements nen ennnn nnee et 183 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 3 R amp S FSH Table of Contents 7 1 4 Selecting the Measurement Forimat ccceccccceceeeneceeeeeceeeeeenteceeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeesenseeeenees 184 7 1 5 Calibrating Measurement 2 eccceeeeeneeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeaas 185 7 2 Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests cceeccceseeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeseseeeeeseeeseeneeeeseenens 186 7 2 1 Selecting the Cable Modell cccccecccceeeecceeeeeeeneeesenceeeeneneeeeesneeeeeneneeeeeneneeeesanes 186 7 2 2 Configuring the Horizontal AXiS sessirnir i a 189 2 3 Configuring the Verical AXiS ET 191 7 2 4 Setting and Triggering the Sweep 0 eee eeceeeee cence ee eeneee ee eaeeeeetaeeeeetaeeeeetneeeeneae 193 7 3 Analyzing Measurement ReSUIts ccccsceccsseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseseeeeeseseseeeseseseenseeeseenens 196 T31 Working with NEE 196 Tas WSIMG MArKeOrs yecsiecchct ee aectestetdacnsdacccvenicteeseneces tedden daaienins LEE 196 78 8 Using Display and Limit Wes aicicctaviecvsntecucteteeds arn aa a 196 8 Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 0 eee 197 8 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode ccceceseseeeeeeesneeseeeeeeeseseeeeeseseseeeseseeeeuseeeseenens 197 8 1 1 Performing Single Frequency Measurements ssssseesseereeeserieserrsertrrsstirnssrennsseenn 197 8 1 2 Performing Frequency Scans ee eene ee ee eneee ee ee
205. ettings GPS information including compass information GPS connection quality and triangulation results Power results Map area including geotags Power bar including noise squelch level Geotagging softkey menu DD JO Om P GO Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 136 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Working with Maps Adding and removing elements The result display is made up out of several elements that you can add or remove as you like gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the element you want to add or remove GPS receiver and antenna support gt Turn on with Antenna Compass or GPS menu item Hardware settings gt Turn on with Show Hardware Settings menu item If on the display contains the hardware settings GPS and compass information gt Turn on with Show GPS Information or Show Compass Information menu item If on the display contains the GPS and compass information The compass information is available with the R amp S HL300 antenna Power results gt Turn on with Show Power Results menu item If on the display contains the power results Power bar gt Turn on with Show Power Bar menu item If on the display contains the power bar In addition to the currently measured signal level the power bar also shows the squelch level for noise signals vertical yellow line 5 2 2 1 Zooming in and out of the Map If you ha
206. f Level Shows the current reference level of the R amp S FSH The reference level is the power level the R amp S FSH expects at the RF input If Auto Low Noise or Auto Low Distortion is on the R amp S FSH uses it to determine the attenuation and preamplification internally For more information see Setting the RF Attenuation on page 87 Keep in mind that the power level at the RF input is the peak enevelope power in case of signals with a high crest factor like LTE To get the best dynamic range you have to set the reference level as low as possible At the same time make sure that the maximum signal level does not exceed the reference level If it does it will overload the A D converter regardless of the signal power Measurement results may deteriorate e g EVM This applies especially for measurements with more than one active channel near the one you are trying to measure 6 MHz Note that the signal level at the A D converter may be stronger than the level the R amp S FSH displays depending on the current resolution bandwidth This is because the resolution bandwidths are implemented digitally after the A D converter In case of an IF overload the R amp S FSH shows a corresponding warning in the diagram area EE If you are not sure about the signal strength you can avoid an IF overload and determine the maximum level manually or perform an automatic level adjustment gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Level Adjust
207. f a DUT Available for vector reflection measurements For more information see Working with the Smith Chart on page 167 Cable loss Shows the cable loss characteristics of a DUT The cable loss is a measure to determine the attenuation of a cable in a particular frequency range The diagram is a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic vertical axis that shows the cable attenuation The horizontal axis represents the measured frequency range Available for vector reflection measurements Group delay Shows the group delay characteristics of the DUT The group delay is a measure that describes the time period or delay of the signal as it goes through the DUT Available for vector measurements C a UUU es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 166 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results Electrical length Shows the electrical length of a DUT The electrical length is a numerical result that displayed in addition to another measurement format As long as it is active the electrical length is displayed regardless of the currently selected format The electrical length is calculated from the phase delay _ A 27Af To with A being the phase deviation over the entire frequency range The electrical length is then derived by ly ToCo with cy being the velocity of light By definition the electrical length is calculated from the vacuum velocity of light and the differential group delay 7 1 Here th
208. f the code domain power result display Ref a OS RBW 100 kHz Sweep Cont Trace Clear Write Att 0 d8 Preamp On Ref Offset 0 0 dB Center Frequency 2 1672 GHz Band WCOMA 2 1 81 Ch 10836 Code Channel 0 Slot 8 Symbol Rate 15 0 ksps Q RF Channel Power 52 6 dBm dBm Composite EVM 24 80 S Start Code 0 Stop Code 511 Settings Adjust Current type of result display Currently selected standard Header table Diagram header Diagram area WCDMA softkey menu OO Om E Go bh A 9 4 2 1 Header Table The header table contains an assortment of settings already discussed in the section about the result summary For more information see The Result Summary on page 225 In addition it contains the following information RBW Shows the currently selected resolution bandwidth For more information see Setting the Resolution Bandwidth on page 89 Trace mode Shows the currently selected trace mode Clear Write and Max Hold are available for 3GPP measurements For more information see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 97 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 229 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 2 2 Diagram Header The diagram header shows the results for individual code channels Code channel Shows the number of the code channel the results are displayed for For more information see Selecting the Slot and Code Channel on page 235 Slot Shows the slot number
209. f the first local oscillator and for a digital display The instantaneous sawtooth voltage therefore determines the input frequency of the spectrum analyzer The bandwidth of the IF filter at the IF determines the bandwidth that is used for measurements Pure sine signals are passed by the IF filter characteristics This means that signals closer together than the bandwidth of the IF filter cannot be resolved This is why the bandwidth of the IF filter in a spectrum analyzer is referred to as the resolution bandwidth The R amp S FSH has resolution bandwidths from 1 Hz to 3 MHz The bandlimited IF is passed to the envelope detector The envelope detector removes the IF from the signal and outputs its envelope The output signal from the envelope detector is referred to as the video signal As it has been demodulated it only contains amplitude information The phase information is lost With RF sine signals the video signal is a DC voltage With AM signals the video signal contains a DC component whose amplitude corresponds to the carrier power and an AC component whose frequency is equal to the modulation frequency provided the modulation frequency is inside the resolution bandwidth Amplitude Amplitude hl hl AVA Time IF signal AM gt Envelope signal The video filter comes after the envelope detector The filter is a lowpass with an adjustable cutoff frequency which limits the bandwidth of the video signal It is particul
210. factor of the R amp S HL223 antenna that is defined between 200 MHz and 1300 MHz The R amp S FSH therefore displays the noise in this frequency range as a function of frequency incremented by the transducer factor Outside the transducer range the R amp S FSH sets the transducer factor at zero i e measurements in this range do not yield conclusive results You can select a second transducer factor with the Select Secondary Transducer menu item The secondary transducer factor in that case is added to the first The unit of the second transducer factor must always be the relative unit dB as otherwise an addition would not be useful When you select a secondary transducer factor the dialog box shows only those transducer factors that have dB as their unit 3 4 1 Unit for Measurements with Transducers If the unit of the transducer is dB the units dBm dBmV or dByuV remain unchanged The linear units Volt and Watt are not permissible They are deactivated in the units menu If the unit of the transducer is dBuV m or dBuA m this unit is also used for the R amp S FSH level display This means that both the level axis of the diagram and the level at the marker position are assigned the unit of the transducer If dBuV m is selected as the transducer unit a switch to absolute level indication in V m is possible gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Unit softkey gt Select the V olt menu item If you are using a transducer with the un
211. ference impedance gt Enter the reference impedance you need The value range is from 1 mQ to 10 KQ 6 4 1 2 Working with the Dual Trace Mode When performing vector measurements it is possible to perform and display two measurements simultaneously After activating this function the R amp S FSH shows the two traces on two separate screens This allows you to view any combination of two vector measurement formats on the display Note that the Magnitude Phase measurement format is an exception to this rule This format counts as one trace To display the magnitude and phase as two separate traces assign the Phase format to trace 1 and the Magnitude format to trace 2 gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Show Trace 2 menu item The R amp S FSH splits the screen The upper screen shows trace 1 the bottom screen shows trace 2 You can configure both screens as you like An X in front of the Show Trace 2 menu item indicates that the dual trace mode is active In addition the menu of the Result Display softkey expands It now shows the available measurement formats that can be applied to trace 2 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 170 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results Screen layout in dual trace mode RBW 10kHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Write Trig Free Run Detect Sample Gi 2098 Center 1 95 GHz Trace H K Span 130 MHz Detere
212. frequency gt Enter a frequency of 1950 MHz gt Press the SPAN key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the span gt Enter a span of 130 MHz to get a high resolution of the results Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 163 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 Calibrate the measurement for vector reflection measurements Vector measurements provide the full range of calibration methods for more accurate results Most full calibration methods require more than one calibration standard gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the appropriate menu item calibration on one or two ports gt Perform calibration For more information see Performing Calibration gt Reconnect the DUT The R amp S FSH shows the results of Ref 0 0 dB RBW 10kKHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Write the vector reflection measurement BEH EE on the filter You can change the measurement configuration e g the sweep time or detector or format e g view phase characteristics without affecting the accuracy of the measurement For more information see Selecting the Measurement Format on page 165 Center 1 95 GHz Span 130 MHz Mode Calibration Display Format Trace Depending on the calibration method you can also select another result display Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 164 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results 6 4 Evalua
213. g Transducer Factors 3 4 Using Transducer Factors The frequency dependent transducer factor of transducers and antennas can be directly considered in the measurement result A transducer factor consists of a numeric value and a unit The R amp S FSH corrects the level values of the trace by the values of the transducer At the same time the unit of the transducer is assigned to the level axis When field strength measurements are performed with the aid of antennas for instance the electrical field strength is directly indicated in dBuV m on the R amp S FSH A transducer factor can also be used to correct a frequency dependent attenuation e g of a cable between DUT and RF input of the R amp S FSH You can create and edit transducer factor with the R amp S FSH4View software package and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S FSH Each transducer factor may consist of up to 1000 reference values For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 Interpolation between the values is performed with the aid of a modified spline algorithm Even if only relatively few values such as maxima minima and turning points are available this algorithm can easily simulate the correction factors of common transducers Two transducers can be switched on at a time The second transducer must be assigned the unit dB The R amp S FSH adds the two transducers to a total transducer Units supported for transducer factors dB dBuV m
214. g a character If you need to enter a character press the key several times until the character you require is selected The following table shows an overview of character assignment You can correct entries with the BACK key The BACK key moves the cursor one position backwards and deletes the character that was in that place Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 11 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Means of Input Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 2 a b c 2 A B Cc 3 d e f 3 D E F 4 g h i 4 G H l 5 j k 5 J K L 6 m n o 6 M N O 7 p q r s 7 P Q R S 8 t u v 8 T U V 9 w x y Z 9 Ww x Y Z 0 0 blank _ 1 2 2 Confirming and Cancelling Entries Depending on the input you have made there are several ways to confirm entries e Values without unit or values that have a fixed unit that you enter in an input field can be confirmed with the ENTER key or by pressing the center of the rotary knob Alternatively you can confirm such an entry by pressing the softkey that has opened the input field in question e Values that have flexible units like frequency or time can be confirmed with one of the unit keys If you confirm a such a value with the ENTER key the R amp S FSH always uses the smallest possible unit e g Hz e lf you have opened a submenu or input field by accident you can close it without making any changes with the CANCEL key 1 2 3
215. h a password from unauthorized access If you protect a measurement set you are able to edit the contents of the measurement set only after you have entered the correct password In addition you can control who is using the measurement sets by limiting its access to a particular set of R amp S FSH serial numbers only All other devices will not be able to process these wizard files 2 1 1 2 Uploading Measurement Sets In order to perform the actual measurements you have to upload the wizard definition file that contains the set of measurements to the R amp S FSH gt Select the Wizard Set Control function with the DI button The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the measurement set s to upload Select the measurement set you want to upload gt Copy the files with the Ke button Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 32 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard Installing Firmware Options 2 1 2 Using the Measurement Wizard Now that the measurement set is available on the R amp S FSH you can start performing measurements 2 1 2 1 gt Starting the Measurement Wizard Press the USER key Press the Wizard softkey The R amp S FSH opens the wizard dialog box The dialog box contains information that you may later use for documentation purposes Press the Load Meas Set softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the wizard defintion file Select the file tha
216. hannel search has been turned on PCCPCH Symbol EVM Shows the EVM of the PCCPCH in rms for the time slot 0 Note that the R amp S FSH only calculates the EVM if the PCCPCH is actually transmitted PCCPCH Ec lo Shows the ratio of the power of the pilot channel to the total power of the signal Therefore this value shows the usable part of the signal Scrambling Code Found Shows the number of the scrambling code if one has been found Active Channels Shows the number of active channels currently received Displayed only if the channel search has been turned on C a UUU ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 257 Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 1 3 Power Results Power results contain various results specific to one timeslot The timeslot consist of two data fields a midamble and a guard period The table contains e the absolute channel power in dBm e the channel power in relation to the total signal power in dB of the data parts and midamble parts of a timeslot Data Power Power of the data parts in the timeslot you have selected The R amp S FSH shows the power of both data parts together and the power of each individual data part Data 1 Power and Data 2 Power Midamble Power Power of the midamble part in the timeslot you have selected R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer SS Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 2 The Code Domain Analyzer If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K48E
217. have already been set up to yield the best results However the R amp S FSH provides functionality to create new configurations to perform measurements on other test setups as well gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Standard softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the standard gt Select one of the available standards gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH loads the configuration of the selected standard It automatically sets the optimal span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth sweep time and detector for the standard You can create and edit standards with the R amp S FSH4View software and transfer them to the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of standards the R amp S FSH can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 3 1 5 2 Configuring the Measurement In addition to creating and editing standards with the R amp S FSH4View software the R amp S FSH also provides functionality to set up a measurement configuration Setting the number of transmission channels gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the Tx Channels menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the number of transmission channels gt Enter the number of transmission channels you need for the measurement Setting the number of adjacent
218. he Spectrum Emission Mask and in turn depends on the standard you are measuring against The numerical marker information frequency and level for these markers is part of the SEM list Markers P1 to Px are fix and always remain on the peak level of the corresponding subrange If you d like to analyze other locations on the trace use normal marker and deltamarker functionality For more information see Using Markers and Deltamarkers on page 102 3 1 6 1 Selecting a Standard If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications standard you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in the R amp S FSH memory However you can create new configurations to perform measurements on other standards as well gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Standard softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the standard gt Select one of the available standards gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH loads the configuration of the selected standard It automatically sets the optimal span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth sweep time and detector for the standard You can create and edit standards with the R amp S FSH4View software and transfer them to the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of standards the R amp S FSH can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on the R amp S FSH For more informat
219. he current sweep mode You can select from e Single data is captured and results are displayed one at a time e Continuous data is captured and results are displayed continuously For more information see Selecting the Sweep Mode on page 92 Sync Not Found Sync OK Indicates whether synchronization was successful or not To successfully synchronize the R amp S FSH to the signal you have to enter the correct values for center frequency reference level or in case of for example a WCDMA signal the correct scrambling code To indicate successful synchronization the R amp S FSH shows the sywe ox label If the synchronization was not successful the R amp S FSH shows the SYNC NOT FOUND label Position Shows the current GPS coordinates if you have connected a GPS receiver and have activated the GPS receiver If not this field stays empty For more information see the Quick Start Guide Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 211 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 9 1 2 Trace Mode Selection The digital modulation analyzer supports trace modes for various result displays available for those applications numerical and graphical e Clear Write In its default state the R amp S FSH overwrites the results after each sweep e Average The results are based on the moving average over several sweeps The R amp S FSH calculates the moving average of the power levels ove
220. he order and number of displayed settings is different in each mode Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 14 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Configuring the Instrument 1 5 Configuring the Instrument The Instrument Setup dialog box contains functionality that is independent of the operating mode For more information see the Quick Start Guide Protecting the R amp S FSH with a PIN The R amp S FSH features a PIN protection system that protects the R amp S FSH from unauthorized access If PIN protection is on you have to enter the PIN whenever you turn the R amp S FSH on The protection system provides three levels of security PIN made up of four digits Master PIN made up out of 10 digits When you enter the wrong PIN three times in a row you have to enter the Master PIN to unlock the R amp S FSH By default the Master PIN is the same as the OEM Master PIN but you can define a User Master PIN If you unlock the R amp S FSH with the User Master PIN the PIN is automatically reset to its default value 0000 e OEM Master PIN code made up out of 10 digits If you have defined a User Master PIN and enter the wrong User Master PIN five times in a row or have not defined a User Master PIN and enter the wrong PIN three times in a row the only remaining way to unlock the R amp S FSH is with the OEM Master PIN The OEM Master PIN is a fix PIN that you receive upon delivery of your R amp S FSH You cannot
221. heck gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the Check Channel Limits menu item Power 1 r 91 6 dBm The R amp S FSH automatically Adj Chn Lower Upper Adj Chn Lower e ei Adj 0 7 dB Alt performs limit checks The results of the limit check are displayed in the table above the trace If a result fails the limit check it turns red and has a star in front of its power level R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 6 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurement is a method to detect spurious emissions or intermodulation products of a signal When performing a SEM measurement the R amp S FSH checks the signal against a spectral mask to see whether the signal complies with a specific standard or not Therefore the R amp S FSH provides predefined spectrum emission masks for various telecomunications standards However you can define your own spectral masks with the R amp S FSH4View software to perform measurements in frequency ranges other than the predefined ones To learn how to define Spectrum Emission Masks refer to the R amp S FSH4View manual gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the Spectrum Emission Mask menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the spectrum emission mask Note that the frequency range of the actual measurement depends on the start
222. i ke 3GPP WCDMA BTS Scanner only e kel een ken be TD SCDMA Sync ID only e bel en een en en R amp S FSH How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 11 How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Basically it is possible to measure and analyze RF signals either in the time domain or the frequency domain Measurements in the time domain show signal variations over time You can perform these with an oscilloscope for example Measurements in the frequency domain show the frequency components of a signal To perform measurements in the frequency domain you can use a spectrum analyzer Both modes are essentially equivalent because applying the Fourier transform to any signal converts it into its spectral components Depending on the signal characteristic to be measured one method is usually more appropriate than the other With an oscilloscope it is possible to tell whether a signal is a sine wave a square wave with a certain on off ratio or a sawtooth wave However detecting superimposed low level signals or monitoring the harmonic content of the signal is easier with a spectrum or signal analyzer Figure 11 1 shows the theoretical basis of the two measurement methods In the time domain an oscilloscope would for example show a section of the signal that is a square wave The same signal when viewed with a spectrum analyzer would show a line spectrum the fundamental and its harmonics
223. ible that the color distribution is not ideal in the current configuration You have two ways to set things straight By cutting the reference level you can eliminate amplitudes from the color map that are not part of the signal Example By default the spectrogram reference level is 30 dBm That means that signal parts with Bet 20 0 dBm RBW 100kHz SWT 500ms Trace Clear Write s Att 0dB VBW 1 MHz Trig Free Run e Detect RMS an amplitude of 30 dBm would be yellow in the spectrogram and signal parts with a very small amplitude would be dark green Everything in between is a shade of the colors between As the colors are distributed over a very large range about a 150 dBm or more it is likely that you can not distinguish details in the signal you EEN Span 3 84 MHz ETS SPCC a g Fe have measured Mode Settings Playback Spectrogram Clear Therefore you should adjust the color map to the overall shape of the signal you are measuring Let s say for example that the signal has an amplitude range of about 30 dB with the maximum amplitude at about 60 dBm and the minimum amplitude at about 100 dBm and the Green Yellow color scheme With the default settings the spectrogram is made up exclusively of green colors and it s not easy to distinguish amplitude levels That s because the yellow color shades are completely out of range To get a better result change the spectrogram reference level to a level near the maximum po
224. ical lines Spectrogram Time lines T1 and T2 horizontal lines Scroll direction Spectrogram softkey menu OD JO Oo PS Gab By default the spectrogram result display consists of two windows The upper window shows the measured spectrum as a trace line The lower window shows the measurement results in a spectrogram The chronological information in the spectrogram is restricted by the internal memory of the R amp S FSH The R amp S FSH stores 1024 frames or spectrums that have been measured in its memory As the height of the display is smaller some of the data becomes invisible after a time 3 1 10 1 Controlling the Spectrogram Update The spectrogram starts running as soon as you enter the spectrogram mode if you are in continuous sweep mode If you are in single sweep mode the R amp S FSH does not add a line to the spectrogram until you initiate the next single sweep You can stop the update of the spectrogram in continuous sweep mode gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Hold softkey Note that in continuous sweep mode the measurement in the spectrum result display does not stop The trace in the upper window still updates continuously Only the spectrogram view stops gt Press the Hold softkey again The R amp S FSH resumes updating the spectrogram The spectrogram result display is filled with results until you change a measurement setting As soon as a setting is changed the spectrogram clears and starts to fill
225. ics of a signal The horizontal axis shows the time the vertical axis shows the signal levels To perform a time domain measurement you have to set the span to zero manually SS Se EEE easy Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 39 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 2 Measuring the Channel Power of Continuously Modulated Signals The channel power measurement selectively measures the power of modulated signals Unlike a power meter that performs measurements over its entire frequency range the channel power measurement measures the power of a specific transmission channel Other signals in the frequency spectrum don t show in the results When measuring the spectrum within a channel the R amp S FSH uses a resolution bandwidth that is small compared to the channel bandwidth It then determines the total power of the channel by integrating the results on the trace The R amp S FSH takes the following parameters into account e display mode absolute or relative e detector e resolution bandwidth That means that you can compare the result to the result that would have been obtained from a thermal power meter The small resolution bandwidth acts like a narrow channel filter and so prevents out of channel emissions from affecting the result gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Channel Power menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the channel power B
226. iene Trace Trace second Trace average 5 Trace mathematics Trace memory n s Trace mode s Trace selection Tracking generator Tracking generator Dower 192 Traffic Activity ainne anini 220 251 274 Training seouence 219 Trangd EEN 88 116 UUM esrez ches cte cece sides aietepevave Heedezpedasavanes EE EES dee 117 Transmission channel 54 Trigger ceeeceseceseseeeseeeeneeceeeteaeeteaeeseereaeens 93 194 248 253 Trigger dean 94 re 95 UM den a ee avec athe ged aaa cl hdd dees gees dee 86 enee 43 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 321 directional power Sensor cee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 128 POWEN SES lt atccicsiccscnieemensasesteapans eaen aaa 123 transducer 00 ccc eeceecene eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeenneeees 117 User interface cccccccccececeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeseeeseeteeeeens 10 User NUMBDGM erte d e Nair dette Baie 267 KEE 90 Vector measurement eee ee etc eee eeteeeeeneeeeeeeeeee 148 Vertical AXIS ca 2i gngdeeugedeere aaa a i 85 172 Video bandwidths eean 90 Vid o Are WEE ER KA 97 Vill EE 110 UE e RTE 224 Antenna divers 235 Carrier frequency CLOF eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeteeeeeeteeeeeee 226 en Eil EE code domain error VQUimbalanee EE 227 VQ OFFSOt eee eee eee ceeeteeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeceaeeeeeeeteesseeeeseaeees 226 POW T EE 226 FESUIE SUMMANY E 225 scrambling COJE sriain risiini eiii a 227 SCraMblinG COde asuntu nitdeeede lar
227. ignment of resources to a variable number of users 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 or 16 The maximum number of users is determined by the number of midamble shifts K in a particular time slot You can enter the number of midamble shifts manually or let the R amp S FSH automatically determine the number of midamble shifts Defining the number of users manually gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Set K Manually menu item gt Enter the maximum number of allowed users Performing a search for the current number of users If you don t know the number of users currently served the R amp S FSH is able to determine the supported number of users by itself gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Auto menu item in the Maximum Users K category With each sweep the R amp S FSH starts a search for the supported maximum number of users 9 7 6 4 Defining the Switching Point A TD SCDMA subframe contains two switching points where the signal switches from downlink to uplink or vice versa The first switching point is fix after the guard period of the special time slot the second switching point is arbitrary and is between one of the last six time slots The switch point is thus a number between 0 and 6 gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 267 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation
228. ill provide a high contrast Bet 20 0 dBm RBW 100kHz SWT 500ms Trace Clear Write e Att 0 dB VBW 1 MHz Trig Free Run e Detect RMS between signal parts that are above the noise floor and the noise floor which is drawn in black To show details of the noise floor and exclude the peak levels you have to lower the spectrogram reference level until it is just Center 952 MHz E Span 3 84 MHz above the noise floor Mode Settings Playback Spectrogram The R amp S FSH will then display the signal parts that are above the reference level in only one color which is the color at the upper border of the color map 3 1 10 4 Recording a Spectrogram You can save the data of the spectrogram for documentation or for further analysis of the recorded data gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Save Spectrogram softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box Save Spectrogram 26 04 10 14 30 to save the current spectrogram km A HERET gt Enter the name of the spectrogram pamens 0 5 D Limit Lii with the alphanumeric keys Screen Shots D Standards D Transducers By default the R amp S FSH saves reba SC 10 03 2010 16 04 Spectrogram003 spm 948 kB 10 03 2010 16 12 the spectrogram as Spectrogram004 spm 948kB 10 03 2010 16 32 Spectrogram t with ascending ot eee reget ane ae head numbers gt Press the Save softkey to store SET Dee 9 ME the spectrogram leg REET Show SD Card Now that you have saved the
229. ing a measurement the R amp S FSH first records a section of the signal that lasts approximately 27 ms or about 1 Sync Frame Period If the instrument is in a triggered mode external or GPS trigger it searches for the start of the PN code in the vicinity of the PN offset you have entered If you are using the automatic PN Offset the R amp S FSH performs a full search for the PN offset and reports the PN found In a free run situation the R amp S FSH searches for the start of the PN sequence over the entire signal length The R amp S FSH performs various general measurements over one PCG power control group as well as measurements on specific channels It then shows the results in one of three formats e tabular form in the Result Summary display e scrollable table form in the Code Domain Channel Table or e graphical form in the Code Domain Power result display To get highest measurement accuracy it is necessary to synchronize the reference frequency of the R amp S FSH with the base station via the EXT REF IN input or with an optional GPS receiver aS SSS SSS Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 237 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 1 The Result Summary The default result display is the result summary The result summary shows various measurement results and hardware settings in numerical form gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Result Summary menu
230. ing meanings D Dummy burst E Normal burst with 8PSK modulation EDGE F Frequency correction burst I Idle burst N Normal burst with GMSK modulation S Synchronization burst BSIC Found Shows the Base Station Identity Code The BSIC is a code that uniquely identifies a base station It is made up out of two separate numbers e The first number is the network color code NCC e The second number is the base station color code BCC This number is the same as the training sequence TSC Traffic Activity Percentage of traffic slots with data 9 3 1 3 Modulation Accuracy Modulation accuracy results contain various results that are specific to a modulation type GMSK and 8PSk Slot Analyzed Shows the currently analyzed GMSK or 8PSK time slot The currently analyzed time slot is always the first time slot the R amp S FSH could find for the corresponding modulation type If the frame contains no slots with a GMSK or 8PSK modulation the R amp S FSH shows no results for that modulation type Phase Error GMSK modulated slots only Shows the phase error of the analyzed time slot in degree The R amp S FSH calculates the phase error over the useful part of the burst The useful part of a burst is defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 A possible residual frequency error resulting from a mismatch between the reference frequency of the R amp S FSH and the base station is compensated Mag nitude Error GMSK modulated slots only
231. ing the Limits Limit checks in ACLR measurement mode are independent of limit line handling You can define a limit for each of the adjacent channels Limits for adjacent channels can be set either in absolute or relative terms Defining relative limits gt Press the Channel Settings AL IO softkey o Alt4 0 0 dB gt Select the Channel Limit Relative Eag H menu item AIT 0 048 o Alt8 0 0dB The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box E to define the relative limits for each za 0 0dB adjacent channel gt Select the channel you want to define a limit for Select Ext gt Activate the input by pressing the Select softkey The channel turns green and the check box in the first column is marked gt Enter the limit value you need The R amp S FSH automatically activates the check flag so that the limit is included in future limit checks gt To deactivate the limit check for a specific channel move the cursor to the channel in question with the rotary knob or the cursor keys and deselect it with the Select softkey Defining absolute limits gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the Channel Limit Absolute menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to define the absolute limits for each adjacent channel gt The procedure of defining absolute limits is analogous to that of defining relative limits Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 58 Performing Spectrum Measurements Performing a limit c
232. interface that supports the use of memory sticks is available for models with serial numbers 105000 and higher Datasets Basically the R amp S FSH supports various types of datasets The instructions below primarily describe managing datasets that you create on the R amp S FSH during measurements for example measurement results and configurations Note that these datasets have the file extension set Datasets with the file extension set are an image of measurement results and configurations Thus you can subsequently reproduce the context of the measurement You can use datasets for documentation for example or use them for a more detailed analysis later on for example with the R amp S FSH4View software Note that datasets also contain calibration data if calibration has been performed Templates The R amp S FSH also supports various other types of datasets or templates Such templates mainly contain additional requirements for a particular measurement like limit lines or channel tables Creating and editing these templates is only possible with the functionality provided by the R amp S FSH4View software package Note that the file extension depends on the application of the template For example a template containing a channel table has the extension chntab For more information on working with templates refer to the documentation of the R amp S FSH4View software package Data synchronization The R amp S FSH4View feat
233. io signal starts to play The squelch level is variable gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Squelch Level menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the squelch level gt Enter a squelch level in dBm as required The R amp S FSH displays the squelch level graphically in the power bar element of the user interface Defining the threshold of the audio signal The audio signal has a specific frequency that is coupled to a specific signal level the threshold As the signal you are receiving during a measurement becomes stronger or weaker the audio signal changes its frequency e When the signal becomes stronger the frequency of the audio signal gets higher e When the signal becomes weaker the frequency of the audio signal gets lower You can define the threshold of the base tone as necessary gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Tone Threshold menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the threshold gt Enter a threshold level in dBm as required Note that it may be possible that the audio signal frequency becomes so high or low that it is no longer audible Defining the gain of the audio signal The change of frequency of the audio signal is a constant change of frequency It is either one octave per 20 dB or one octave per 40 dB gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Tone Gain menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu gt Select the gain setting you pref
234. ion see Managing Datasets on page 21 3 1 6 2 Optimizing Measurement Settings After selecting the standard and applying the signal to the R amp S FSH you can optimize measurement settings to avoid overloading the R amp S FSH gt Press the Adjust Settings softkey The R amp S FSH performs a measurement to determine the ideal reference level ans span SS EEE ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 61 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 6 3 Viewing the Results in a Table You can add a table to the display that shows the measurement results in numerical form gt Press the MEAS key Tx Power 29 6 dBm Tx Bw 5 MHz gt Press the View List softkey Range Hz RBW Hz Freq Hz Power Abs Power Rel 12 750 M 8 500 M 1M 869 828095 M 85 85 dBm 56 35 dB The R amp S FSH shows a list above Gal Gua eera oi AT D 3 500 M 2 500 M 30k 875 778095 M 99 93 dBm 70 43 dB the trace diagram If the list contains more than four entries you can scroll through the list with the rotary knob or the cursor keys to see the other results Note that scrolling works only if there is no active input field The list contains the following information e Tx Power Power level of the transmission channel e Tx Bandwidth Bandwidth of the transmission channel e PASS FAIL information If the signal is within the limits of the spectral mask the R amp S FSH shows IBASSE if not it shows MZE e
235. ion to the pilot channel or the RF channel power The numbers in the C lt x gt element and the walsh code Ch SF depend on the currently selected channel For more information see Changing the Reference Power on page 247 9 5 2 2 Diagram Area The Code Domain Power result display contains the measurement results in graphic form It shows the power of all codes in the signal In the graph each bar represents one Walsh code The displayed codes have different colors The color of the code depends on the state of the channel it belongs to e Yellow active code channels e Turquoise inactive code channels The number of codes that are displayed depends on the base spreading factor For more information see Setting the Base Spreading Factor on page 246 The order the R amp S FSH displays the codes in depends on the code order For more information see Changing the Code Order on page 246 The power of the codes is a relative value The reference power is either the total power of the signal or the power of the pilot channel For more information see Changing the Reference Power on page 247 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 242 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer EH Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 3 The Code Domain Channel Table If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K46E the code domain channel table becomes available to visualize the channel structure of the signal The code domain channe
236. ionality in DTF mode is the same as that of the spectrum analyzer mode For more information on using the display line see Using Display Lines on page 111 For more information on using limit lines see Using Limit Lines on page 112 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 196 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Selecting the Measurement Mode 8 Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Equipped with firmware option R amp S FSH K43 order no 1304 5635 02 you can perform receiver and channel measurements or scans with your R amp S FSH In receiver mode the R amp S FSH measures the power level of a particular frequency or a customized set of frequencies instead of sweeping over parts of the frequency spectrum The R amp S FSH shows the scan results in result displays that have been designed for just such measurement tasks The receiver mode also adds the necessary functions like bandwidths or detectors to perform measurements according to CISPR By default the R amp S FSH is in the operating mode you have been in last after you have turned it on To switch to the receiver mode from another operating mode proceed as follows gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Receiver Mode softkey The R amp S FSH starts the receiver mode in single frequency measurement mode 8 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode In receiver mode the R amp S FSH features two measurement modes e Fixed Frequency Channel e Frequency Scan Channel Sc
237. iple antenna systems is available only for 2 antenna systems If you want to measure all antennas of the system select the Over the air menu item 9 8 6 7 Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSH and that of the device under test If the frequency error is more than 1 kHz the R amp S FSH is not able to synchronize with the signal If possible you should synchronize the receiver and the transmitter The carrier frequency error can have the unit Hz or ppm gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Hz or ppm menu item The R amp S FSH shows the carrier frequency error in the unit you have selected Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 282 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 6 8 Configuring EVM Results In case of the EVM you can define the unit of the EVM and EVM calculation method To obtain EVM values according to standard the channel estimation and EVM windowing methods defined in 3GPP TS 36 141 are used Prerequisites for a standard compliant measurement are signals according to the enhanced test models defined in 36 141 and an external frequency reference delivered via the Ref In connector or via GPS The EVM according to standard measurement is mainly useful for high accuracy signal quality measurements with cable connected eNodeB antenna ports The measur
238. iraa asiera i 39 spectrum emission maek 60 SPUrIOUS emlsslons ONE Ree EE transmission AAA TEE transmission scalar ce cecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees transmission vechor vechor ceeeeeeeeeeeeeer vector voltmeter Measurement bandwidth Measurement format wee Measurement sep Measurement wizard trana na na nrnnnnnnn nnen dataset EE POWEr TEE VECE IV GM Sis ege r EE EN spectrum ANALYSIS zasieg aa Midam Ble icici gou fe cesdcnc netics rdan ianea ee EE MiM NOl iiinis ienen E EEE Min peak Multiple traces n dB down Network analysis Sa Noise power Normalization NA Normalization SA Sg Number of harmonics cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecteeeeeeeseseneeees Occupied bandwidth cccccceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee ACIUSHOVE 2 udeggtugusgeuegubes A Seege SEENEN channel bandwidth power percentage ee eeeeeesceeseeeenceseeeeeeeeteaeeeeeseaeereaeens reference lOVEl dirinin aane iaaa AENA E standardet rois o a e Offset Un Le ER reference level ceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteecnaaeeeeeeeeeseneaeeees 86 Operating mode Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 319 R amp S FSH Index digital MOdUIatiON 00 2 cee etter eeeneeeeeeeeeeee 208 detance io fauht ccc ccc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 180 network apahy zer 148 FECEIV nger E EE E sates 197 spectrum ANALYZE siisii tide iaasa aaa aaa 39 le TEE 2
239. is 10 of the display range gt Press the LINES key gt Press the Display Line softkey The R amp S FSH displays the display line as a blue horizontal line It shows the vertical position of the line in a table above the diagram area When you activate the display line the R amp S FSH also opens an input field to define the vertical position of the line gt Enter the level value you need The R amp S FSH positions the display line accordingly Alternatively you can also move the display line with the rotary knob or the cursor keys Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 111 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 8 Using Limit Lines Limit lines help you to identify if a signal complies with certain level characteristics A limit line is made up out of two or more points that are connected to a line Each of the points that define the shape of the limit line consists of two coordinates One coordinate defines the horizontal position e g frequency the other one the vertical position With the R amp S FSH you can build limit lines that consist of up to 1000 points Values that define the horizontal characteristics of the limit line can be either absolute values e g frequency in MHz or relative values whose reference is the center of the measurement trace e g the center frequency Relative values are of advantage if you for example measure modulated output signals and you change the
240. is function also provides easy access to previous measurement settings so that you do not have to set up the R amp S FSH again gt Press the SAVE RECALL key The R amp S FSH opens the file manager gt Select the dataset you want to use The R amp S FSH restores the configuration that the dataset contains By default the most recently saved dataset is highlighted If you need another dataset navigate to the folder or storage device that contains the dataset you need 1 8 2 1 Previewing a Dataset The R amp S FSH provides a preview of datasets The preview is like a screenshot and lets you take a quick look at that measurement and its settings The R amp S FSH does not yet activate the measurement settings of that dataset gt Browse through the available datasets and select the one you want gt Press the Recall softkey The R amp S FSH shows a preview of the measurement contained in the selected dataset The preview shows the measurement results as well as the measurement settings gt Use the rotary knob to browse the previews of all datasets available in the selected folder gt Press the Exit softkey to return to the Recall Dataset dialog box 1 8 2 2 Loading a Dataset If you find a dataset whose settings you need for your current measurement task you can load it gt Press the Activate softkey The R amp S FSH loads the dataset in question and adjusts its measurement settings to those of the dataset EH O
241. it dBuA m it is not possible to select another unit Level indication is entirely in dBuA m 3 4 2 Setting the Reference Level The transducer shifts the trace by its value as a function of frequency Positive transducer values increase the level negative values reduce it To ensure that the trace is always within the diagram the R amp S FSH adjusts the reference level accordingly The reference level is shifted by the maximum transducer value in the positive or negative direction C O L UUU ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 117 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using Transducer Factors 3 4 3 Frequency Range of Transducer If the set frequency range is wider than the span in which a transducer is defined the R amp S FSH assumes the transducer values outside the defined range to be zero 3 4 4 Data Sets Containing Transducer Factors The R amp S FSH stores data sets together with any transducer factors that may have been active for the measurement in question When such a dataset is recalled the associated transducer factor s are switched on as well Transducer factors recalled as part of a data set do however not appear in the list of transducer factors C SSS SSS eee Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 118 R amp S FSH Power Meter Using a Power Sensor 4 Power Meter For highly accurate power measurements you can connect a power sensor to the R amp S FSH and perform measurements 4 1 Using a Power Sensor A
242. item The R amp S FSH shows the numerical results in a table 4X3 Center 1 93 CHz O Channel 0 Ref Ofset 0 0 68 Trigger Free Run Band c ma2k 1900 Att 00 dB Base SF 128 Preamp on PN Offset Auto RF Channel P Peak to Average Rho 297 PN Found N A Composite EVM IK Taw N A Carrier Freq Error 11 9 Hz Active Chaanels s E abeolate Pwr Rel to RF Chan Pwr Rel to Pilot Pwr Pilot Code 0 3252 dBm 7 03 dB 0 00 dB Syne Code 32 3841 d m 1292 d8 5 89 d8 Current type of result display Currently selected standard 1 2 3 General settings 4 Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed 5 Global results 6 Channel results 7 CDMA2000 softkey menu 9 5 1 1 General Settings For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 209 In addition the application features some settings specific to the 3GPP standard PN Offset Shows the current Pseudo Noise PN Offset of the base station For more information see Changing the PN Offset on page 248 The PN Offset only takes effect in combination with an external or GPS trigger Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 238 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals Trigger Shows the current trigger mode For more information see Working with Trigger Functionality on page 93 In addition to the trigger also available
243. itioning of Markers The R amp S FSH offers functions that make setting the markers easier or allow to make instrument settings on the basis of the current marker position e Set to Peak The Peak function places the active marker or the delta marker on the highest level value of the trace e Set to Next Peak The Next Peak function places the active marker or delta marker on the next highest level value of the trace relative to its current position e Set to Minimum The Minimum function places the active marker or delta marker on the lowest value of the trace gt Press the MKR gt key gt Press the Set to Peak Set to Next Peak or Set to Minimum softkey The R amp S FSH positions the marker accordingly Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 104 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 6 6 Removing Markers Remove markers any time you want Removing selected markers gt Select the marker you want to delete with the Select Marker softkey The corresponding marker symbol turns red and the marker input field opens Press the MARKER key Press the Delete Marker softkey Select the Delete Selected menu item Yvy vV V Confirm the selection with the ENTER key The R amp S FSH deletes the marker Deactivating markers If you delete marker 1 M1 all delta markers that are relative to that marker are also deleted Removing delta markers only gt Press the MA
244. izontal marker you can also use vertical markers in the spectrogram With the help of the marker and the time line you are able to find the exact moment when a specific event has occurred in the spectrum C ES eee EEE ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 77 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements gt Press the MARKER key Ref 20 0 dBm RBW 100kHz SWT 500ms Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB VBW 1 MHz Trig Free Run e Detect RMS 952 4206 MHz 66 3 dB The R amp S FSH activates a marker 00 00 57 8111 TO e 000087811 and sets it on the peak level of the currently displayed spectrum gt Use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to move the marker on the horizontal axis to the frequency you want to analyze or enter the frequency directly with the number keys Center 952 MHz Span 3 84 MHz erie ele Mode Settings Update Spectrogram Spectrogram Time Line gt Press the Select Time Line softkey and browse through the spectrums using the rotary knob or the cursor keys until the spectrum of interest is displayed in the upper window The time stamp of the selected time line gives you a precise indication on when the event shown in the spectrum occurred For more information on marker functionality see e Using Markers on page 196 Switching back to active spectrogram recording To resume recording of a new spectrogram gt Press the Live Update softkey at any time you are in playback mod
245. k Based on the markers the R amp S FSH then calculates the difference between the two signal levels and returns the result as the Carrier to Interference ratio Optimizing the Settings In order to get the best results you can use the automatic adjustment routine that the R amp S FSH offers gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Adjust Settings softkey The R amp S FSH performs a sweep and repeats the peak search sequence for the Er SSS SSS Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 133 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 El Measuring the Spectrum 5 1 3 Analyzing Interference Measurements 5 1 3 1 Trace Mathematics Diff Mode The Interference Analyzer provides a quick way to apply trace mathematics Trace Memory Trace and thus a quick way to compare the current results with a previous one gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Diff Mode softkey When you turn on the Diff Mode the R amp S FSH saves the current trace memory trace and will subtract this trace from the live traces resulting from future sweeps For more information on general trace mathematics supported by the R amp S FSH see Using Trace Mathematics on page 101 Note that Diff Mode is only available in the Spectrum Overview result display of the Interference Analyzer Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 134 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Working with Maps 5 2 Working with Map
246. key gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the Offset Length Port 1 or Offset Length Port 2 menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the electrical length of the accessory gt Enter the electrical length The R amp S FSH now includes the electrical length of the accessory for phase measurements R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Scalar Measurements 6 2 Performing Scalar Measurements With scalar measurements you can measure the magnitude of both reflection and transmission characteristics of a device under test To calibrate the measurements only normalization is available 6 2 1 Measuring the Transmission The example included here is based on a transmission measurement of a two port filter The filter has a center frequency of 2060 MHz and a bandwidth of about 11 MHz Test setup gt Connect the input of the DUT to the tracking generator output port 2 gt Connect the output of the DUT to the RF input port 1 Preset the R amp S FSH Before starting the measurement procedure preset the R amp S FSH to restore the default configuration and connect the filter between the measurement ports gt Press the PRESET key gt Connect the DUT Start scalar measurements gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Scalar menu item Select the type of transmission measurement gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Transmissi
247. king with Maps 5 2 2 Displaying Maps After you have downloaded the maps you need save them to an SD card which you can use with the R amp S FSH 04 07 13 15 34 gt Enter the Maps mode gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Map softkey The R amp S FSH opens a menu that contains all maps that you have stored on the SD card the names correspond to the folder names for Ki EEN every area you have downloaded A Ca Ki CS Burch Settings gt Select the maps of an area The Auto Select menu item automatically selects the map that is most fitting for your current location Using the automatic selection requires an GPS receiver Screen layout of the map display The screen layout in Maps mode is variable You can customize the screen contents and add only information that you need gt Press the Settings softkey The R amp S FSH opens a menu that contains functions to configure the map display If no screen element has been selected the R amp S FSH shows the map only The following list contains all settings that define the screen contents f 100 0 dBm RBW 3 MHz SWT 100 ms tt 0 dB Preamp Off Detect RMS N 48 7 39 472 E 11 36 38 438 Ak 5733m Comp 305 Sats 12 Freq TTT Oi z D KG 8 Zoom In Settings Position Current type of result display Connected device green color GPS connection established red color GPS connection not established Hardware s
248. l identity the numbers in brackets show the group the cell identity belongs to and the ID in that group For more information see Selecting the Cell Identity on page 280 Cyclic Prefix Shows the type of cyclic prefix in use For more information see Selecting the Cyclic Prefix on page 280 Antenna Shows the current antenna configuration For more information see Selecting the MIMO Configuration on page 282 Subframes Shows the number of subframes the R amp S FSH records and analyzes during a single sweep 9 8 1 2 Global Results Global results contain various measurement results of the composite signal These results evaluate the total signal over the period of one frame The global results also contain information about the quality of the measured signal of up to one frame The exact amount of data that is analyzed depends on the number of selected subframes RF Channel Power Shows the total power of the currently measured LTE signal The channel power includes all subcarriers covered by the channel bandwidth Signal power outside the channel bandwidth is not included in the total power even if it is visible in the spectrum overview In case of over the air measurements the total power includes all received signals in the channel bandwidth Overall EVM Shows the overall EVM of the signal The overall EVM includes all signal components regardless of the modulation or channel type Operating Manual 1173 6275 12
249. l table shows various parameters and measurement results on code channel level Screen layout of the code domain channel table result display 1 2 Weal ALS Center 859 9675 MHz Ref Level 25 0 dBm Sweep Cont 7 Channel 79 Ret Offset 0 0 dB Trigger Free Rua Band cdma2k JTACS Att 6048 Base SF 128 Preamp On PN Offset Auto GPS Lat 48 T 38 772 N Long 11 36 43 320 E Alt 575 5 m RF Chaneel Power 25 48 dBm Composi S VM 217 PNFoend N A Channel Walsh Symb Rete RC States Absolute Rel to RF Chan Type Ch SF ksps Pwr dBm Pwr dB Current type of result display Currently selected standard Header table Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed Channel table 6 CDMA2000 softkey menu SS GO oa 9 5 3 1 Header Table The header table contains various settings already discussed in the sections above For more information see The Result Summary on page 238 9 5 3 2 Global Results The global results contain various settings already discussed in the sections above For more information see The Result Summary on page 238 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 243 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 3 3 Channel Table The channel table is made up out of seven columns and a number of rows that depend on the number of channels The columns show the following information Channel
250. ld to define the span manually gt Enter the span you need The largest possible span for the channel power measurement is ten times the channel bandwidth At larger spans the result of the channel power measurement would be increasingly imprecise because too few points of the trace would be in the channel you are measuring gt Press the Auto Span softkey The R amp S FSH again calculates the span automatically C UUU ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 42 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 2 5 Measuring the Maximum Channel Power If signal levels fluctuate significantly you can define the maximum channel power with the Max Hold function gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Power Display softkey gt Select the Max Hold menu item The power display switches from Power to Max Power If you want to deactivate the Max Hold function and return to the normal power display activate Clear Write gt To deactivate the Max Hold function press the Power Display softkey gt Select the Clear Write menu item The power display returns to Power display 3 1 2 6 Unit for Power Display The R amp S FSH can apply different units to the power output The default unit is dBm gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Power Unit softkey gt Select the unit you want from the submenu The R amp S FSH displays the power level in the selected unit ee SSS SS eee Oper
251. le Figure 11 3 graphically shows the mixing process For models with a frequency limit of 3 6 GHz the IFs are 4892 8 MHz 860 8 MHz and 54 4 MHz The conversion from a specific input frequency to the first IF is done by a local oscillator LO This LO can be tuned from 4 8 GHz to 8 4 GHz All other conversions are handled by single frequency oscillators In case of models with a frequency limit of 8 GHz the IFs are 8924 8 MHz 860 8 MHz and 54 4 MHz The conversion from the first to the second IF for these models is done by a second local oscillator The frequency of the local oscillator determines the input frequency at which the spectrum analyzer performs measurements fin flo fir The first mixer produces the sum frequency fio fin image frequency fimage as well as the difference frequency flo fin The image frequency is rejected by the bandpass at the IF so that it does not interfere with the subsequent frequency conversions Input frequency range 0 Hz Input Intermediate Local Image frequency frequency oscillator frequency Frequency in fig flo fimage Figure 11 3 Mixing process EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 312 R amp S FSH How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer The first local oscillator is tuned with a sawtooth which simultaneously acts as the x deflection voltage for the display In practice synthesizer technology is used to generate the frequency o
252. lected code and its spreading factor The first value is the code number the second value is the spreading factor The spreading factor for the codes is variable in the range between 0 and 16 Mod ulation Type Shows the modulation type of the currently selected code For more information see Selecting a Code Channel on page 268 Symbol EVM Shows the EVM of the currently selected code For more information see Selecting a Code Channel on page 268 Code Power Shows the power level of the currently selected code For more information see Selecting a Code Channel on page 268 Slot Number Shows the number of the time slot that the code domain is analyzed for For more information see Selecting a Time Slot on page 268 RF Channel Power Shows the total power of the signal For more information see Global Results on page 256 Composite EVM Shows the composite Error Vector Magnitude EVM in For more information see Global Results on page 256 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 260 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 3 The Code Domain Channel Table If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K48E the code domain channel table becomes available to visualize the channel structure of the signal The code domain channel table shows various parameters and measurement results on code channel level Screen layout of the code domain channel table result displ
253. les on the PC based on the data available on the R amp S FSH 1 8 1 Saving Datasets The R amp S FSH allows you to save the data that is currently analyzed at any time gt Press the SAVE RECALL key The R amp S FSH opens the file manager gt Press the Save softkey The R amp S FSH opens the Save Dataset dialog box Save Dataset 01 02 00 22 12 Stat Name z Date Time Public Datasets jatasct0Ol set Qe 01 02 2000 2211 jatasct0O2 set Re 01 02 2000 2212 Dataset003 set ow 01 02 2000 2212 Available datasets and folder structure Dataset name input field Remaining memory on selected data storage device File manager softkey menu 1 2 3 4 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 22 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets The folder structure shows all available data storage devices Possible storage devices are the internal memory of the R amp S FSH an SD card or a memory stick The default storage device depends on which devices are connected to the R amp S FSH e lf an SD card is connected datasets are always stored there first e f a memory stick is connected datasets are stored there only if no SD card is connected e The internal memory is used only if neither SD card or memory stick are connected The internal memory provides approximately 20 MB of data therefore the number of datasets you save on the R amp S FSH is limited Each dataset needs about 100 kB of memory but this value
254. list contains information for each frequency range that the measurement covers Thus the number of entries in the list depends on the overall frequency span you are using for the measurement The following ranges have been defined e 9kHz to 150 kHz with an RBW of 1 kHz e 150 kHz to 30 MHz with an RBW of 10 kHz e 30 MHz to 1 GHz with an RBW of 100 kHz Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 68 Performing Spectrum Measurements e gt 1 GHz with an RBW of 1 MHz The spurious list contains the following information for each range e Frequency range Start and stop frequencies of the range e RBW Resolution bandwidth that the R amp S FSH uses within that range e Peak Frequency Frequency at which the peak power has been measured in a particular range e Peak Power Peak power that has been measured in a particular range R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 10 Working with the Spectrogram Result Display R amp S FSH K14 K15 With option R amp S FSH K14 or R amp S FSH K15 you can view measurement results in a spectrogram The spectrogram result display shows the spectral density of a signal in the frequency domain and over time simultaneously Like other result displays the horizontal axis represents the frequency span The vertical axis represents time Time in the spectrogram runs chronologically from top to bottom Therefore the top of the diagram is the present A third dimension shows th
255. ls meet the requirements of the standard In order to capture a complete frame you can apply a trigger from a GPS device or another external trigger Screen layout of the burst power result display Ref 20 0 dBm Artt 0 dB Sweep Single Ref Off 0 0 dB Preamp Off TSC Auto Trace Clear Write Trig Free Run RF Channel Power Burst Power TSC Found AS Me 31 2 H KT 40 0 o EH 00 70 0 KH 30 0 100 0 110 0 Sync Idle 5 NB L idie 8 Center 1 GHz 7 e 26 66 ms Quam PUN Cee wmd Display Adjust Current type of result display Currently selected standard Global results Diagram area Modulation type for each slot GSM softkey menu OO Om P Gab Global results For more information on the general results shown above the diagram area see Global Results on page 219 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 222 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on GSM Signals Diagram area The diagram area contains the graphical representation of the power over time When you display the complete frame the result display also contains information about the modulation or burst type applied to the slots that are displayed This information is shown in colored bars one for each slot at the bottom of the diagram area The R amp S FSH supports detection of the following burst types 8PSK normal burst EDGE Dummy burst Frequency correction burst Idle burst no modulation NB normal burst GMS
256. lt the R amp S FSH is in spectrum analyzer mode after you have turned it on To switch to the DTF mode from another operating mode proceed as follows gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Distance to Fault softkey The R amp S FSH starts the DTF mode By default the R amp S FSH performs measurements on port 1 It however also supports measurements on port 2 but you have to configure those first gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the DTF Refl Measurement Port menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu gt Select either Port 1 or Port 2 Screen layout of the cable and antenna analyzer Ref 0 0 dB BW 100 kHz Trig Free Run Att 5 dB TG Power 10 d m 16 51 m Center 1 18053 GHz o Span 2 36087 GHz OTF List C Cable Loss Cable model Hardware settings Marker information Status line S matrix Calibration status Measurement format Trace window Marker blue line Cable length information Cable frequency information Cable test softkey menu SS Go OAND On EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 181 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 a O E N Performing Cable and Antenna Measurements 7 1 Performing Cable and Antenna Measurements In order to get an idea about problems of a cable you can analyze several aspects of the signal 7 1 1 Reflection Measurements The reflection S11 measurement is a good way to get an idea if the transmission sys
257. m menu item The R amp S FSH starts the constellation diagram Screen layout of the constellation diagram Ref 20 0 dBm Sweep Single Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB Preamp Off Ref Offset 0 0 dB RF Channel Pwr 45 02 dBm Overall EVM e Cell Identity 1 0 1 Center 1 GHz ES reng mg isplay Settings Td Current type of result display Currently selected standard Color map Diagram area Currently selected allocation LTE softkey menu OO Om E Go The constellation diagram shows the location of the transmitted symbols in the complex plane It is therefore an indicator of the quality of the modulation of the signal By default the result display shows the symbol locations over all allocations In that case the R amp S FSH distinguishes modulation schemes used in the transmission of data channels by using different colors e QPSK modulation e 16QAM modulation e 64QAM modulation For easy identification of the pilot synchronization and control channels in the diagram the R amp S FSH also uses different colors e PSYNC e SSYNC e Control channels with QPSK modulation Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 276 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals In addition to an overview of all allocations you can also view the constellations of particular channels or modulation schemes gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Constell Settings softkey gt Select the channel type
258. mber of limit lines the R amp S FSH can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 und Using Limit Lines on page 112 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 174 Evaluating the Results 6 4 6 Using Trace Mathematics Trace mathematics that subtract one trace from another are available for most measurement formats in the network analyzer mode For more information see Using Trace Mathematics on page 101 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 6 5 Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 With firmware option R amp S FSH K45 order no 1304 5658 02 you can use a R amp S FSH with tracking generator and VSWR bridge as a vector voltmeter A vector voltmeter performs reflection S11 and transmission measurements S21 The tracking generator provides the signal source that generates an unmodulated sinewave signal on a single frequency Typical applications for a vector voltmeter are e adjustment of the electrical length of cables with a reflection measurement e testing of the antenna elements of a phase controlled antenna array relative to a reference antenna with a transmission measurement Press the MODE key Press the Network Analyzer softkey Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey vY vV vV VvV Yy Select the Vector Voltmeter menu item The R amp S FSH starts the vector voltmeter mode It tu
259. ment range Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 50 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 5 Measuring the Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio ACLR The Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio ACLR measurement is a method to measure the power over more than one transmission channel and also evaluate the power of the adjacent or alternate channels of the transmission channel The ACLR performs measurements according to a specific channel configuration e g a particular radio communications standard gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the ACLR menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the adjacent channel leakage ratio In principle the ACLR measurement works like the channel power measurement in that it determines the spectrum within the channel using a resolution bandwidth that is small compared to the channel bandwidth In addition to the channel bandwidth the ACLR measurement is also defined by the channel spacing the bandwidth of adjacent channels and the adjacent channel spacing The R amp S FSH supports measurements on up to 12 carrier channels and 12 adjacent channels to either side of the carrier When measuring more than one carrier or adjacent channels the R amp S FSH shows the powers of each channel in a list below the marker list The channel itself is marked by red transmission channels or green adjacent channels
260. mit check for that threshold Threshold line and display line i Like the display line a threshold line is a straight horizontal line The difference is that the R amp S FSH performs a limit check for threshold lines but not for display lines A failed limit check may be an issue if you want to create a measurement report because measurements with failed limits are not included in this report Using a display line you can use a line and are able to create a measurement report at the same time regardless if any limits have been violated or not The process of turning off a limit line completely is similar to that of selecting a line gt Press the Upper Limit or Lower Limit softkey gt Select the Unselect Limit menu item The R amp S FSH deactivates the limit line 3 2 8 2 Performing Limit Checks If limit lines are active the R amp S FSH automatically checks the trace for limit violations after each frequency sweep As long as the signal does not violate the limit line the R amp S FSH shows a Pass message in the measurement diagram As soon as one single value i e one pixel is outside of the limits the R amp S FSH displays a Fail message in the diagram area and in addition sounds a beep A limit checks relates only to the frequency range defined by the limit line not the span Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 113 Configuring Spectrum Measurements Audio signal You can turn the acoustic signal that sound
261. n input field to define the trigger level gt Enter the trigger level The R amp S FSH shows the trigger level by adding a horizontal line to the diagram area Performing Gated Sweeps When the external trigger is active it is possible to perform a gated sweep gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Activate an external trigger Now that the external trigger is active the Gated Trigger menu item becomes available gt Press the Trigger softkey again gt Select the Gated Trigger menu item In order to get appropriate results you have to set the gate delay and gate length ina way that the measurement is active during the interesting part of the signal You can also modify the sweep time in order to match the horizontal axis to the length of the signal and thus set the gate delay and gate length parameters more accurately The gate delay parameter defines the time between the trigger event and the beginning of the actual measurement The gate length defines the duration of the measurement before it is interrupted and the next gate signal is anticipated to resume the measurement gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select the Gate Settings menu item C a UUU es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 95 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements The R amp S FSH opens a softkey submenu to control the gate settings At the same time the R amp
262. n italics File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are program code distinguished by their font Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks Other conventions e Remote commands Remote commands may include abbreviations to simplify input In the description of such commands all parts that have to be entered are written in capital letters Additional text in lower case characters is for information only SSS MMIII Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 9 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Screen Layout and Elements 1 Operating the R amp S FSH This chapter provides information about basic functionality and about the user interface of the R amp S FSH 1 1 Screen Layout and Elements The following figure shows the screen layout in cable and antenna test operating mode It shows all elements that are the same for all operating modes of the R amp S FSH Screen layouts that show specifics for each operating mode or measurement are provided in the corresponding sections of this manual 300 kHz SWT 20 ms Trace Clear Write VBW 3 MHz Trig Free Run e Detect RMS e 7 37 374 N Long 11 36 40 926 E Alt 553 7 m 1 GHz 31 5 dim 1 733333 MHz On Vv SW ime SWD ime Sweep 1 Measurement information 13 Horizontal axis labeling 2 GPS and
263. n pilot channels CPICH belonging to the scrambling code You can see the power in numerical form in a table above the diagram area and in graphical form Trace modes Note that the PN Scanner supports several trace modes If you are using a trace mode other than Clear Write the bars depicting the scrambling codes may turn grey A grey color indicates time periods during which no scrambling codes can be found For more information on the trace modes see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 97 C a UUU ee Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 234 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 4 3 Setting the Antenna Diversity By default the R amp S FSH does measurements on base stations with one antenna For base stations with two antennas you have to specify the antenna to synchronize to gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Antenna Settings menu item The R amp S FSH opens another submenu gt Inthe submenu select the Antenna 1 menu item The R amp S FSH synchronizes to the CPICH of antenna 1 The procedure to select antenna 2 is the same You can also perform a measurement on base stations with multiple antennas but display the results of both antennas as a combined result gt Instead of selecting one of the antennas select the Combined menu item gt To measure base stations with one antenna select the menu item Antenna Diversity
264. nalyzer Mode ek ERR EEEEEEEEEEENEn 39 3 1 Performing Spectrum Measurements cccsscceecceeseeeeeeseceeeeesseneeeeseeeeeenseseensneeeeenens 39 3 1 1 Measuring Basic Signal Characteristics 2 0 0 0 eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeesneeeseeaaes 39 3 1 2 Measuring the Channel Power of Continuously Modulated Gonale 40 3 1 3 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidt 44 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 1 R amp S FSH Table of Contents 3 1 4 Power Measurements on TDMA Gonals 48 3 1 5 Measuring the Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio ACLR esccceeeeetteeeeetteeeeeenaes 51 3 1 6 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask sssssssseessssisseerrssrrrsstrrssrtrrsstirnssrtnnssrrnnnt 60 3 1 7 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion 2 0 0 2 ceeeceee cence eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeesaeeeeeeneeeesenaes 63 3 1 8 Measuring the AM Modulation Det 65 3 1 9 Measuring Spurious EMISSIONS ersi seinen naa aiina aAA AAT a 67 3 1 10 Working with the Spectrogram Result Display R amp S FSH K14 KI 70 3 1 11 Using Isotropic Antennas iunc2iccesenca scien cdecgeevecic cessed a N cacy eiedcdevanectevsens 79 3 2 Configuring Spectrum Measurements cccceecceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeneeenseeenenseeenens 81 3 2 1 Configuring the Horizontal AXiS ceeeccceee sence ee eeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaes 81 3 2 2 Configuring the Vertical Avis 85 3 2 3 Setting BANAWIGINS oreren R 89 3 2 4 Configuring and Triggering the Sweep eeec
265. nces in the frequency spectrum Measuring the Channel Power of Continuously Modulated Signals on page 40 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth on page 44 Measuring the Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio ACLR on page 51 Working with the Spectrogram Result Display R amp S FSH K14 K15 on page 70 These measurements work the same and yield the same results as in Spectrum mode You can configure the measurements just as in Spectrum mode For more information see Configuring Spectrum Measurements on page 81 In addition the R amp S FSH K15 provides several dedicated measurements 5 1 1 Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio The Carrier to Noise C N measurement is a tool to determine if a signal has sufficient power compared to the spectrum surrounding it In case of the carrier to noise measurement the R amp S FSH determines the distance between the level of the carrier and the lowest signal level that has been measured usually the noise floor gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the Carrier to Noise menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the carrier to noise ratio After you have started the measurement the R amp S FSH places two markers on the trace The first marker is placed on the peak power level The R amp S FSH assumes that position as the level of the carrier The second marker is positioned on the lowest level that has been measure
266. ndwidth must be at least three times the resolution bandwidth This prevents incorrect results due to the compression of signal peaks by the video filter e you use the RMS detector if possible This ensures that the power measurement is always correct irrespective of the waveform being investigated e the sweep time must be set so that the result is stable If you increase the sweep time the R amp S FSH also increases the integration time for the RMS detector and thus ensures more stable measured values 3 1 3 2 Setting the Reference Level The reference level is the power level that the R amp S FSH expects at the RF input When selecting the reference level make sure that you do not overload the R amp S FSH by applying a signal whose power exeeds the maximum reference level As the power is measured with a small resolution bandwidth compared to the signal bandwidth it is still possible to overload the R amp S FSH even if the trace is within the measurement diagram Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 45 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements To prevent an overload perform the measurement with the largest resolution bandwidth possible using the peak detector If you set these parameters it is not possible for the trace to exceed the reference level To simplify operation and to prevent incorrect measurements the R amp S FSH has an automatic routine for setting the reference level gt Press the AMP
267. ne the level of the measured signal The detector comes after the video filter The detector combines the measured spectrum so that it can be represented as one pixel in the trace The R amp S FSH uses 631 pixels to form the trace i e the whole measured spectrum has to be represented using just 631 pixels Common types of spectrum analyzer detectors are the peak detector PEAK the sample detector SAMPLE and the RMS detector RMS An Auto Peak detector which simultaneously displays the maximum peak and the minimum peak is usually also provided The Fig below explains how these detectors work Level Maximum RMS Sample Minimum The figure above shows 30 measured values which are represented by a single pixel The peak detector determines and displays the maximum measured value The Auto Peak detector takes the maximum and minimum and displays them together The two values are joined by a vertical line segment This gives a good indication of the level variation over the measured values represented by a single pixel The RMS detector is used by the spectrum analyzer to determine the RMS value of the measured values It is therefore a measure of the spectral power represented by a pixel The sample detector takes an arbitrary measurement value and displays it in the Fig above the first The other measured values are ignored Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 314 R amp S FSH How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Functio
268. nent should be displayed truly the cutoff frequency of the filter has to be greater than the modulation frequency If there is noise on the sine signal the modulation signal can be thought of as noise If the video bandwidth is reduced the high frequency noise components above the cutoff frequency of the video filter will be rejected The smaller the video bandwidth the smaller the noise amplitude at the video filter output The R amp S FSH provides video bandwidths from 1 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1 3 10 sequence In its default state the video bandwidth is coupled to the resolution bandwidth and is the same as the resolution bandwidth If you change the resolution bandwidth the R amp S FSH adjusts the video bandwidth accordingly The effects of the video bandwidth on measurements are as follows e if you are performing measurements on modulated signals the video bandwidth must be sufficiently large so that significant modulation components are not rejected 2 RBW e if you want to keep signals free of noise you should select the smallest video bandwidth possible lt 0 1 x RBW e if you are performing measurements on pulsed signals the video bandwidth should be at least three times greater than the resolution bandwidth so that the pulse edges are not distorted Like the resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth has an effect on sweep speed Before each measurement the video filter has to settle gt Press the BW key gt Press the M
269. ng Spectrum Measurements 3 1 4 1 Selecting a Standard If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications standard you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in the R amp S FSH memory When starting the measurement in the default configuration the R amp S FSH automatically activates the GSM EDGE standard However you can create new configurations to perform measurements on other standards as well gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Standard softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the standard gt Select one of the available standards gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH loads the configuration of the selected standard It automatically sets the optimal settings for the selected standard You can create and edit standards with the R amp S FSH4View software and transfer them to the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of standards the R amp S FSH can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 3 1 4 2 Setting the Burst Length The burst length is the measurement time that the R amp S FSH performs measurements with The burst length can be equal or less than the sweep time gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Burst Length softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the burst length gt Ent
270. ngth Offset Length Port 1 Offset Length Port 2 User Calibration Restore Calibration Settings 10 3 2 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the horizontal axis of the measurement diagram Ce kd L rotten pew r 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 5 10 3 6 Functions of the Network Analyzer Span Selection The SPAN key opens the span menu that contains functionality to set the span CD tn kel r kel kd Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the vertical axis of the measurement diagram oT TT Depends on measurement format Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep Cover Jg eine raion r 1 rose Bandwidth Selection The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths Con 2 k kel bet bel ke Functions of the Network Analyzer 10 3 7 Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces Les PEA Le tin Lee Memory Trace 10 3 8 Limit Lines The LINES key opens a menu that contains the functionality to control limit lines aeaa eel Cimes ip re 1 L Lo Audio Beep 10 3 9 Markers The MARKER and MKR gt keys open a menus to control markers and use marker functions Softkey in the Marker Menu
271. nly way to represent the timing of the video signal correctly In the frequency domain the sample detector is a good way to measure noise power because noise usually has a uniform spectrum with a normal amplitude distribution Signals may get lost if you are using the sample detector for measurements with a span that is greater than RBW 631 e RMS If the RMS detector is active the R amp S FSH measures the spectral power over one pixel In case of power measurements the RMS detector always shows the true power of a signal regardless of the shape of the signal The RMS detector is best for measurements on digitally modulated signals because it provides stable and true power readings In combination with a high sweep time you can increase the display stability even more because the measurement time for each pixel increases Noise measurements also provide stable results if you apply the RMS detector in combination with a high sweep time However the bandwidth occupied by the signal to be measured should at least equal the frequency covered by a trace pixel or the selected resolution bandwidth whichever is larger Otherwise the power the R amp S FSH shows is too low because there are spectral components within the frequency range covered by the pixel that do not originate from the signal you want to observe e g noise To get the true power the video bandwidth VBW should also be greater than the resolution bandwidth RBW Othe
272. ns of the Digital Modulation Analyzer On the basis of the operating principles of detectors a few recommendations can be made as to their use e tis best to use the Auto Peak detector or the peak detector for spectrum analysis over large frequency ranges This ensures that all signals are displayed e The RMS detector is recommended for power measurements on modulated signals However the display range should be chosen so as not to exceed 100 times the bandwidth of the signal or the resolution bandwidth whichever is larger e The sample detector or the RMS detector preferred should be used for noise measurements Only these two detectors are capable of measuring noise power correctly e When measurements are made on sine signals the level display does not depend on the detector However if you use the RMS detector or the sample detector ensure that the span is not too great Otherwise the displayed levels of sine signals may be lower than their true value Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 315 R amp S FSH Index Index IXEV DO ET 249 Carrier freqUeNCy eOr 00 eee cece ceeeeteneeeeeneeeeeaes 253 EMM WEE 252 ei Ku 253 POW eege Ee 251 FESUIESUMIMANY EeeECe deed casdadnersncesvacdcstiees 250 TNO WEE 252 WAU WEE 251 6 GB DaMmQwidth EE 205 ACLR absolute results adjacent channel channel bandwidth channel spacing linit CMO CK E measurement Copflguration 54 measurement seitnge AA 52 NOMMAlIZAUON isr
273. nsmission measurement of a two port filter The filter works in the frequency from of 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz Test setup gt Connect the input of the DUT to the tracking generator output port 2 gt Connect the output of the DUT to the RF input port 1 Preset the R amp S FSH Before starting the measurement procedure preset the R amp S FSH to restore the default configuration and connect the filter between the measurement ports gt Press the PRESET key gt Connect the DUT Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 160 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 Start vector measurements gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Vector menu item Select the type of transmission measurement gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Transmission Fwd Port 12 menu item for transmission measurements in forward direction or Transmission Rev Port 1 2 menu item for transmission measurements in reverse direction Define the frequency parameters Before calibrating the measurement you should define the frequency parameters to avoid interpolation of the results gt Press the FREQ key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the center frequency gt Enter a frequency of 1950 MHz gt Press the SPAN key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the span gt Enter a span of 130 MHz to get a high resolution of the
274. nsor on page 119 Performing and configuring channel power measurements The configuration of channel power measurements without a power sensor is similar to measurements with a power meter The following features are available Defining the frequency Zeroing the measurement Selecting the unit Defining the reference level Taking additional loss or gain into account For more information see Performing and Configuring Measurements on page 122 Defining the channel bandwidth In addition you can select the channel bandwidth gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Channel BW softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field gt Enter the required channel bandwidth The R amp S FSH performs a measurement on the selected channel Note that it is not possible to change the measurement time resolution bandwidth and frequency span Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 130 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Using the Channel Power Meter 5 Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 In wireless systems interference causes low data rates dropped calls and poor voice quality often making it impossible to establish or maintain a connection Equipped with option R amp S FSH K15 order no 1309 7488 02 and or option R amp S FSH K16 order no 1309 7494 02 you can track down the source of interferences with your R amp S FSH These options provide tools and means to make the search for interfe
275. nts on downlink GSM signals in accordance to the 3GPP standard with your R amp S FSH gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Dig Mod Analyzer softkey gt Select the GSM EDGE BTS menu item The R amp S FSH starts the signal analysis After you have started the measurement the R amp S FSH starts recording the signal you have applied It records an amount of data that makes sure that at eight GSM time slots are captured The signal analysis itself contains exactly eight time slots The R amp S FSH performs various general measurements based on the complete frame as well as measurements based on an individual slot It then shows the results in tabular form in the Result Summary display or graphically in various diagrams To get highest measurement accuracy it is necessary to synchronize the reference frequency of the R amp S FSH with the base station via the EXT REF IN input or the external GPS frequency reference The GSM option provides several result displays to display the measurement results er SSS SSS eee Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 217 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on GSM Signals 9 3 1 The Result Summary The default result display is the result summary The result summary shows various measurement results and hardware settings in numerical form gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Result Summary menu item The R amp S FSH shows the numerical results in a table
276. o For more information on setting the number of sweeps included in a single sweep see Selecting the Trace Mode Average gt Press the SWEEP BW key gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select the Single Sweep menu item The R amp S FSH activates single sweep mode Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 193 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 El Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests gt Select the Continuous Sweep menu item The R amp S FSH again starts to measure continuously 7 2 4 3 Changing the Number of Measurement Points The number of measurement points defines the number of measurements performed during a sweep Thus it indirectly sets the frequencies of those measurements The distance from one measurement point to the next depends on the currently set frequency range span divided by number of points However the measurement points are spread evenly over the selected frequency range The number of points also defines the resolution and therefore the accuracy of the measurement and affects the measurement time In the default state the R amp S FSH evaluates 201 measurement points This number allows for fast measurement times and sufficient accuracy For measurements with a higher or lower frequency resolution you can change the number of measurement points Note that measurement times increase if you set a higher number of measurement points gt Press the SWEEP BW key gt Press the
277. o account These are defined in terms of an offset in dB relative to the measured level A positive offset corresponds to a loss and a negative offset to a gain The R amp S FSH shows the current offset in the diagram header gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref Offset softkey The value entry box for the reference offset opens gt Enter the required offset The offset is taken into account in the power or level display Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 124 R amp S FSH Power Meter Ell Using a Directional Power Sensor 4 2 Using a Directional Power Sensor For power measurements in both directions forward and reverse you can connect directional power sensors to the R amp S FSH The R amp S FSH supports the following directional power sensors e R amp S FSH Z14 e R amp S FSH 244 With a directional power sensor the R amp S FSH measures the power of a signal from source to load forward power and from load to source reverse power The ratio of forward and reverse power is a measure of the load matching The R amp S FSH displays the results as the return loss or the standing wave ratio gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Power Meter softkey The R amp S FSH activates the mode for power measurements Screen layout of the power meter mode with a directional power sensor 07 01 10 11 00 QB et 0 0 dBm Gigs 0 0 aB Forwarded Power AVG 32 11 d n RER I 20 235 3 3 A0 S0 dBm dBm Reflected
278. of screenshots is either png or jpg depending on your configuration in the User Preference menu gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Capture Screen Format item to select the screenshot file format Previewing screenshots If you want to make sure if a screenshot you took contains the wanted information you can preview screenshots on the R amp S FSH gt Press the SAVE RECALL key gt Press the Recall Screenshot softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select a screenshot for the preview Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 18 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Saving Events 1 7 Saving Events The R amp S FSH provides functionality that automatically saves measurement information if a certain situation or event occurs Saving events is possible in all operating modes gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Save on Event menu item gt Select On from the Save on Event dropdown menu The R amp S FSH turns on automatic event recognition You can select one of several events that trigger the storage of measurement data Data types You can select several data types to save when an event occurs e Ascreenshot of the sweep that contains the event png or jpg file e Adataset of the sweep that contains the event set file e The GPS coordinates of the location where the event happens gpx file a GPS
279. of the Hardware Settings in the spectrum analyzer Most of these settings are available for every application This chapter provides a reference for those general settings that are available for all applications of the digital modulation analyzer amp Center 870 MHz Ref Level 30 0 dBm Sweep Continuous Channel 1023 Ref Offset 0 0 dB Band cdma2k 800 Att 0 0 dB Preamp Off GPS Lat 48 7 38 514 N Long 11 36 43 296 E Alt 584 8 m Center Shows the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH For valid results the center frequency of the R amp S FSH and the signal have to be the same gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Center Freq softkey gt Enter the frequency you need Channel Shows the number of the channel currently selected The number depends on the selected band class Band Shows the name of the band class you have selected gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Freq Mode softkey gt Select the Channel menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select a LTE channel table or band class gt Select the channel table you need with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH now applies the channel table to the measurement Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 209 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer Transducer Shows the name of the transducer if one is in use For more information see Using Transducer Factors on page 116 Re
280. oftkey The R amp S FSH performs a measurement to determine the ideal reference level It uses a resolution bandwidth of 3 MHz a video bandwidth of 3 MHz and the peak detector After finishing the automatic measurement the R amp S FSH sets the ideal reference level 3 1 4 4 Using a Trigger Usually you will apply a trigger when measuring bursts If a trigger is active the R amp S FSH uses the video trigger for TDMA measurements by default The video trigger level is at 50 of the range of the vertical axis but is variable This means the R amp S FSH triggers a measurement if the rising edge of the burst exceeds this 50 line If the DUT features some sort of trigger equipment you can also use an external trigger to trigger measurements gt Connect the DUT trigger output to the R amp S FSH trigger input gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select either the External Rise or External Fall menu item rising or falling edge The R amp S FSH activates the trigger and shows the results of the measurement It may be that the burst is not completely visible on the display To correct that and make the whole burst visible you can set a trigger delay gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select the Trigger Delay menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the trigger delay gt Adjust the trigger delay until the burst is visible inside the vertical lines that show the measure
281. on Drocedure cece ceeeeeeeeetesteeeeeneeeeeaaes 153 Carrier frequency error IXEVEDO EE 253 CDMA2000 nuper e EE 247 GSM arena e S avers 223 LTE pocas egt e a Eeer 282 TD SCDMA crnica ad ist aneii 269 Ve RI 226 Carrier to Interference A 133 Carrierjo hNose 132 CDMA200O eene cactvaevetaeseusiaxsndenenaes itmaeledstepaphep dete 237 Carrier frequency erfor 247 eelere Center frequency CE SIEP S ZE aaor a o EE enee Channel bandwidth AGUR E 55 channel POWET dirita aans aaneen ddai kiada 42 WT E 280 occupied bandwidth ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeees 46 Channel number 209 Channel power osccscs cecesaaidecesaineeeuschcceetesecevessiteciepaseecie 40 Siet level rinia rara ane asia 41 Channel bandwidth ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 42 display mode 43 reference Jee 41 DEn 42 Ile ET DEE 41 Uu E 43 Channel SCAM s uerge deele aia 197 Channel Spacing 00 0 ee cece eeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeetesaeeeeeaeees 55 Channel table sesinin nissa aiai 115 174 Channels Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 317 R amp S FSH Index TXEV DO EE 251 CDMA2O0D0 240 244 Ree dee 274 TD SCDMA ga eeen iienaa a naea na a raai E 262 WCDMA sitesi aia Rete agar asthi Bale 232 W CDMA with geuf geesde d geet EE date haan vedas 228 CISPR bandwidth pasienietis aat 205 Eilean ee 97 212 Clear Spechtogratmg deed aneinander ad 71 Code domain channel table ssnsoeeeneeeeeaen 231 243 261 Code
282. on Fwd Port 12 menu item for transmission measurements in forward direction or Transmission Rev Port 1 2 menu item for transmission measurements in reverse direction gt Select the Transmission Fwd and Rev menu item for a simultaneous display of both forward and reverse transmission measurements In case of a simultaneous display the R amp S FSH shows two traces with a different color in the result display One for the measurement in forward direction and one for the measurement in reverse direction A label in the result display shows the direction a trace belongs to Note that the simultaneous display of both directions is only possible with a high accuracy calibration Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 156 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Scalar Measurements Define the frequency parameters Before calibrating the measurement you should define the frequency parameters to avoid inaccurate results because of invalid calibration gt Press the FREQ key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the center frequency gt Enter a frequency of 2060 MHz gt Press the SPAN key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the span gt Enter a span of 50 MHz to get a high resolution of the results Calibrate the measurement for scalar transmission measurements Scalar measurements provide normalization only Normalization is not as accurate as a full calibration but yields pretty accurate res
283. on includes for example GPS coordinates the time of the measurement or level that has been measured You can evaluate the geotag information directly on site or save the information for later evaluation With the geotagging functionality you can mark locations where you have performed a measurement Thus you are able to analyze the geographical distribution of the received signal strength This allows you to analyze for example the coverage conditions around a base station s coverage area In the map display a geotag is displayed as a dot with a number Option R amp S FSH K15 also shows a straight line The straight line represents the direction you are facing You can create a geotag in several ways Creating geotags manually You can create a geotag of your current position which requires a GPS receiver or create a geotag of any other position that you would like to create gt Press the GPS Position softkey gt Select the Save Current Position menu item The R amp S FSH creates a geotag of your current position A geotag created this way is based on the coordinates of the GPS receiver and includes the azimuth If required you can assign a different azimuth for the GPS coordinates gt Press the GPS Position softkey gt Select the Save Azimuth Only menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to change the azimuth the GPS data itself is not changed Note that the azimuth line is updated in real time when
284. on measurements on port 1 or the Transmission Rev Port 2 gt 1 menu item for transmission measurements in reverse direction Define the frequency parameters Before calibrating the measurement you should define the frequency parameters to avoid interpolation of the results gt Press the FREQ key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the center frequency gt Enter a frequency of 1950 MHz C LIUU ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 177 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 6 5 2 1 Performing Transmission Measurements Calibrate the measurement for transmission measurements gt Press the Calibration softkey asch gt Select the Transmission Rev RBW 10kHz SWT 1s Trace Clear Write BD ae 0 dB Port 2 gt 1 menu item Trig Free Run Detect Sample gt Perform calibration For more information see Performing Calibration AE 5 78 gt Reconnect the DUT The R amp S FSH shows the characteristics of the DUT magnitude and phase as numerical values carne map ae nena Freq Stepsize Magnitude Phase You can change the measurement configuration e g the sweep time or format see Selecting the Measurement Format without affecting the accuracy of the measurement 6 5 2 2 Performing Reflection Measurements Calibrate the measurement for reflection measurements gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the Reflection Port 1 menu item
285. onality as that in Spectrum mode For more information see Using Markers and Deltamarkers on page 102 a ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 202 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode 8 2 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode In addition to the single frequency measurement and the scan measurement the receiver mode also adds features in accordance with EMI measurements 8 2 1 Selecting Detectors for EMI Measurements The receiver mode provides several types of detectors also available in other operating modes In addition it adds the average and quasi peak detectors e Max Peak If the max peak detector is active the R amp S FSH displays only the maximum power of the signal that was measured during the measurement time e Average If the average detector is active the R amp S FSH calculates and displays the linear average power of the signal that was measured during the measurement time e RMS If the RMS detector is active the R amp S FSH calculates and displays the RMS power of the signal that was measured during the measurement time e Quasi Peak If the quasi peak detector is active the R amp S FSH evaluates the signal in a way that complies to the requirements defined by CISPR16 It is designed for EMI measurements and especially useful for the evaluation of pulse shaped spurious emissions When you use the quasi peak detector the R amp S FSH uses a
286. onidase 233 Spreading MET 246 We Ludlnle Rule EE 128 X BEE GENEE eeh eas 81 189 K LEE 85 172 KA SPAM EE 84 KA ET 122 El EE 168 ZVHView cable MOE fis ic cc ccsdveesicssnecssndsvdateadaavsntacoatiteedveesea dence Channel table iriran eninin limit Ines measurement wizard
287. or Secondary Code menu item Enter the primary or secondary scrambling code of the base station you are testing In most cases the secondary scrambling code has the value 0 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 233 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals Performing a search for the scrambling code If you don t know the scrambling code the R amp S FSH is able to determine the scrambling code of one or more 3GPP base stations by itself gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Auto menu item With each sweep the R amp S FSH starts a search for the scrambling code If it finds the code the synchronization will be successful If not the synchronization fails The R amp S FSH shows a corresponding message Ne Codes found Comparing the power of multiple scrambling codes You can also view the scrambling codes and their power graphically gt Press the MEAS key Ref 30 0 dBm RBW 100kHz Sweep Cont Trace Clear Write Ms 0 dB Preamp On Ref Offset 0 0 dB gt Press the Result Display softkey a Sa Sat cm an gt Select the Scrambling Code menu item The R amp S FSH shows all primary and corresponding secondary scrambling codes that it has found during the search in descending order regarding the power level Center 2 1672 GL Bn Level Display S Adjust Settings g In addition the R amp S FSH shows the power of the commo
288. ormation Save Current Position Antenna Save Manual Position Show Saved Positions GPS Position List Go To Triangulation Position Triangulate Save Triangulation Compass Current Position Color Saved Positions Color Trinagulation Color Show Power Bar Show Power Result Show Hardware Settings Squelch Level Tone Threshold Tone Gain Tone Volume Tone HL300 Side HE300 Top Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the horizontal axis of the measurement diagram 9 ee ee ee ee a Functions of the Interference Analyzer Map Mode 10 7 3 Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the vertical axis of the measurement diagram Primary Transducer Manual 0 dB Auto Low Distortion 75 Q FSH Z38 10 7 4 Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep GC W kel el ben bel eg 10 7 5 Bandwidth Selection The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths ea 10 7 6 Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 10 8 Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 10 8 1 This s
289. ot leave the trace and indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the point they are positioned on The horizontal position of a marker is shown by a vertical line which extends from the top to the bottom of the measurement diagram The marker list above the diagram area shows the exact coordinates of all markers in use The position of a delta marker is indicated by a dashed line to distinguish it from a normal marker The delta marker level is always a relative to the main marker level and so the delta marker level unit is always dB The delta marker frequency is always relative to the main marker in other words the delta marker frequency is the frequency difference between the frequency at the point marked by the main marker and the frequency at the point marked by the delta marker To measure complex signals you can activate up to six markers Marker 1 is always a normal marker and the reference of all delta markers Markers 2 to 6 are either markers or delta markers depending on your set up Screen Layout with Active Markers 13 08 10 00 21 SEE amp Bet 0 0 d8 BW 10kHz SWT 113 ms s Att 0 dB Trig Free Run gt 4 6970254 GHz 76 19 im 9 189 3214 MHz 3264 dBm 106 4286 MHz 24 90 dBm ea 3 e o Marker list Marker label M x Delta marker label D x Active marker label red label Delta marker blue dotted line Marker blue line Marker input field Marker menu OO JO Oo E Go bi Operating Man
290. p S FSH couples the sweep time to the span and the resolution bandwidth to avoid invalid settings If the coupling is active the R amp S FSH always sets the shortest possible sweep time to make sure that the display of the spectrum is correct and valid The R amp S FSH requires a minimum sweep time of 20 ms for every 600 MHz of span If you increase the span the R amp S FSH will also increase the sweep time In the time domain span 0 the R amp S FSH shows the video voltage over time The horizontal axis becomes a time axis that starts at 0 s and ends at the sweep time that you selected The range of the sweep time in the time domain is from 200 us to 1000 s gt Press the SWEEP key In the default state Auto SWP Time is active gt Press the Manual SWP Time softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the sweep time gt Enter the sweep time you need If the video bandwidth is no longer coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth the R amp S FSH puts a red dot at the SWT hardware setting e SWT 2 5 s 3 2 4 2 Selecting the Sweep Mode The sweep mode is the way the R amp S FSH performs the measurement In its default state the R amp S FSH measures continuously In this mode the R amp S FSH automatically repeats the sweep in the defined range of the horizontal axis frequency or time and updates the trace accordingly after it has finished with one sweep Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 92 R amp S FSH
291. particular evaluation curve or bandwidth depending on the CISPR band CISPR band A frequencies lt 150 kHz 200 Hz bandwidth CISPR band B frequencies from 150 kHz to 30 MHz 9 kHz bandwidth CISPR band C D frequencies from 30 MHz to 1 GHz 120 kHz bandwidth Frequencies gt 1GHz 120 kHz bandwidth A Bandwidth selection for the quasi peak detector If you select the quasi peak detector the R amp S FSH automatically select a 6 dB filter bandwidth depending on the measurement frequency If you select a 3 dB bandwidth while using the quasi peak detector the R amp S FSH deactivates the quasi peak detector O UUU MMM Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 203 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Detector softkey gt Select the detector you want to use For more information on detectors in general see Selecting the Detector on page 98 Selecting the trace mode and working with memory traces For more information on trace modes and memory traces see Selecting the Trace Mode and Working with Memory Traces on pages 97 and 101 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode 8 2 2 Selecting the Measurement Bandwidths for EMI Measurements The receiver mode adds 6 dB resolution bandwidths to the 3 dB resolution bandwidths already available in other operating modes The 6 dB bandwidths are special bandwidths that are necessary fo
292. perating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 27 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets 1 8 2 3 Quick Recall of Instrument Settings For regular measurement tasks the R amp S FSH allows quick access to previously saved datasets by linking a particular dataset to one of the softkeys Assigning a dataset to one of the softkeys gt Press the SETUP key The R amp S FSH opens the setup menu gt Press the User Preference softkey The R amp S FSH opens the User Preference Setup menu In this menu you can customize the name of one of the softkeys F1 to F6 and assign a dataset to a specific softkey for quick access to that dataset By default the name of the label is User Pref 1 to User Pref 6 gt Select one of the User Key Labels F1 to F6 gt Customize the name of the softkey by entering a new one with the alphanumeric keys e g user label 1 The first word of the key label is displayed in the first row of the label the rest in the second row If a label is too long to be displayed it is truncated If you enter no label the softkey will be inactive gt Select the User Key Dataset corresponding to the customized User Key Label F1 to F6 The R amp S FSH opens the file manager and displays a list of available datasets gt Select the dataset you want to assign to the softkey The R amp S FSH returns to the User Preference Setup menu The dataset is now assigned to the softkey Recalling a dataset gt Press the
293. played frequency range After you have selected the span you can set a particular frequency range whose results the R amp S FSH displays In the default configuration the R amp S FSH adjusts the DTF start and DTF stop frequency according to the span and the center frequency The distance from center frequency to the start and stop frequency is the same Alternatively you can directly set a DTF start and DTF stop frequency gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Center Freq softkey gt Enter the frequency that you d like to be in the center of the horizontal axis The R amp S FSH adjusts the frequency range according to span and center frequency Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 189 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 El Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Start Freq or the Stop Freq softkey gt Enter the start frequency and stop frequency you need The R amp S FSH adjusts the frequency range according to your settings Note that the distance from start to stop frequency has to be equal to the span The R amp S FSH adjusts the values if you enter a frequency range that is not the same as the span 7 2 2 2 Selecting the Cable Length The R amp S FSH uses the cable length to determine the span for the measurement The longer the cable under test the smaller the span Together with the cable model the cable length is also the basis for the calculation of the ca
294. ple Center 1 95 GHz Center 1 95 GHz Span 130 MHz lt a mam m Ref Uni Ref Pos Calibration G Outpu Mode Amp Imp Attenuation Display Changing the display range The display range is the value range the vertical axis covers The default display range depends on the measurement format For more information see Selecting the Measurement Format on page 165 When you change the display range the reference value and position remain the same Merely the scale of the vertical axis is compressed or expanded gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range softkey gt Select the display range you need from the submenu The R amp S FSH adjusts the vertical axis accordingly Automatic scaling of the vertical axis All measurement formats except the Smith chart feature an automatic scale function If you use automatic scaling the R amp S FSH automatically sets the display range ina way that the trace best fits on the display gt Inthe Range submenu select the Auto Scale menu item Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 173 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results For the SWR measurement format instead of selecting one of the predefined ranges you can also define the exact top and bottom values of the vertical axis gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range softkey gt Select the Scale Max or Scale Min menu items to define the top or bottom values of the vertical axis
295. plete signal Channel Power Shows the power of the complete signal Active Channels Shows the number of the currently measured channels Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 231 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 3 3 Channel Table The channel table is made up out of seven columns that show various information about each channel The number of rows depends on the number of channels that are currently active If a channel occupies more than one code the results correspond to all codes in the channel Channel Type Type of code channel All code channels that the R amp S FSH is able to recognize are shown with the correct channel type and spreading factor Channels with the label CHAN are active code channels whose type could not be detected Codes that are inactive are not shown Chan SF Code channel number including the spreading factor in the form lt Channel gt lt SF gt Symb Rate ksps Symbol rate that the code channel is transmitted with 7 5 ksps to 960 ksps T Offs chips Shows the timing offset of the code channel in chips Pilot Bits Shows the number of pilot bits the code channel contains Status Status display of the code channel Power Abs dBm Absolute power of the code channel in dBm Power Rel to CPICH dB Relative power of the code channel in dB The reference channel is the C PICH or the total signal depending on the reference po
296. power sensor measures the power in the frequency range defined in the data sheet of the power sensor This means that you can measure both sine signals and modulated signals precisely over a large dynamic range The R amp S FSH supports the following power sensors The information in brackets indicates if the power sensor is connected via the power sensor port or via the USB interface R amp S FSH Z1 power sensor port R amp S FSH Z18 power sensor port R amp S NRP Z11 USB R amp S NRP Z21 USB R amp S NRP Z22 USB R amp S NRP Z23 USB R amp S NRP Z24 USB R amp S NRP Z31 USB R amp S NRP Z51 USB R amp S NRP Z52 USB R amp S NRP Z55 USB R amp S NRP Z56 USB R amp S NRP Z57 USB R amp S NRP Z81 USB R amp S NRP Z91 USB R amp S NRP Z92 USB R amp S NRP Z211 USB R amp S NRP Z221 USB If you are using one of the NRP power sensors you also need a passive USB adapter R amp S NRP Z4 to connect the power sensor to the R amp S FSH For more information on the characteristics of the supported power sensors see e the datasheet of the R amp S FSH e the website for R amp S power sensors http Awww2 rohde schwarz com en products test_and_ measurement power volt_meter NRPZ html The power sensor function turns the R amp S FSH into a wideband power meter It then always measures the power of the whole signal in the frequency range of the power sensor In most cases the signal shape has no effect on the measurement gt P
297. predefined cable models that you can use without doing anything If you want to test a cable that is not listed you can also define cable models manually either directly on the R amp S FSH or with the Cable Model Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software package that is delivered with the R amp S FSH 7 2 1 1 Selecting a Predefined Cable Model gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Cable Config softkey Cable Model 06 08 10 18 13 Ee Public Cable Models DN Public gt Select the Select Cable Model menu item Ss ikB 31 05 200 1621 5128 HLFR chlmod 1kB 31 05 2010 15 21 5168 HLFR chmod 1kB 31 06 2010 15 21 The R amp S FSH opens the file SS EE manager to select the cable Ss iB 31 06 2010 1821 FLC114 50J cbimod 1kB 31 05 2010 15 21 model FLC12 50J cbimod 1kB 31 05 2010 15 21 FLC158 50J cbimod 1kB 31 05 2010 15 21 FLC78 50J chimod 1kB 31 05 2010 15 21 gt Select the cable model that you ee EE testi Ges He are testing HCF12 50 chimod 1kB 31 05 2010 15 21 HJ12 50 chimod 1kB 31 05 2010 15 21 gt Confirm the selection with the Free 15 MB Select softkey gen Refresh The R amp S FSH shows the currently selected cable model in the diagram header gt Select the Deselect Cable Model item from the Cable Config menu if you want to perform measurements without using a particular cable model 7 2 1 2 Creating a Cable Model The R amp S FSH provides two ways to define customized cable models The first
298. puts a red dot in front of the standard display PA You can create and edit standards with the R amp S FSH4View software and transfer them to the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of standards the R amp S FSH can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 3 1 2 2 Setting the Reference Level The reference level is the power level that the R amp S FSH expects at the RF input When selecting the reference level make sure that you do not overload the R amp S FSH by applying a signal whose power exeeds the maximum reference level As the power is measured with a small resolution bandwidth compared to the signal bandwidth it is still possible to overload the R amp S FSH even if the trace is within the measurement diagram To prevent an overload perform the measurement with the largest resolution bandwidth possible using the peak detector If you set these parameters it is not possible for the trace to exceed the reference level To simplify operation and to prevent incorrect measurements the R amp S FSH has an automatic routine for setting the reference level gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Level Adjust softkey The R amp S FSH performs a measurement to determine the Joes Wait O optimal reference level It uses a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz a video bandwidth of 1 MHz and the peak detector
299. r a particular number of sweeps in the range from 2 to 999 If you are using the average mode P CPICH 15 ksps Code 0 P CCPCH 15 ksps Code 1 the R amp S FSH adds the avg 9 label Power 41 13 dBm avg Power Abs 41 13 dBm avg A Ec lo 10 01 dB avg Ec lo 10 01 dB avg to nume rical resu Its D Symbol EVM rms 0 39 avg Symbol EVM rms 0 43 avg P SCH Power Abs 44 08 dBm avg S SCH Power Abs 43 52 dBm avg e Max Hold The results are based on the maximum values that have been measured The result is updated only if a higher value has been measured for a particular result If you are using the max hold mode the R amp S FSH adds the max label to numerical results e Min Hold The results are based on the minimum values that have been measured The result is updated only if a lower value has been measured for a particular result If you are using the min hold mode the R amp S FSH adds the min label to numerical results In the graphical results for example the Spectrum Overview the trace modes have the same effects as in Spectrum mode For more information on trace modes see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 97 Carrier frequency error Note that the Carrier Frequency Error result supports the average trace mode only if you are using the Precision Reference Frequency R amp S FSH 2114 Min Hold and Max Hold trace modes are not supported by the Carrier Frequency Error result Operating Manual
300. r measurements according to CISPR16 If automatic selection of the CISPR bandwidth is on the R amp S FSH selects an appropriate CISPR bandwidth depending on the receive frequency Frequencies lt 150 kHz 200 Hz CISPR bandwidth Frequencies from 150 kHz to 30 MHz 9 kHz CISPR bandwidth Frequencies from 30 MHz to 1 GHz 120 kHz CISPR bandwidth Frequencies gt 1 GHz 1 MHz CISPR bandwidth You can also select a 3 dB or 6 dB bandwidth manually gt Press the BW key gt Press the Manual RBW softkey to select a 3 dB bandwidth or gt Press the Manual CISPR BW to select a 6 dB bandwidth gt Select the bandwidth you need with the rotary knob or by entering the corresping number gt Press the Auto CISPR BW to select the 6 dB bandwidth automatically according to the list above Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 205 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode 8 2 3 Defining the Measurement Time The measurement time is the time that the R amp S FSH collects data at each measurement frequency to calculate the results for that frequency according to the detector you have selected You can define a measurement time between 5 ms and 1000 s gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Meas Time softkey gt Define the measurement time you need Selecting the scan mode When you enter the receiver mode the R amp S FSH repeatedly measures the receive frequency or set of frequ
301. race mode freezes the current trace and aborts the measurement Using the view trace mode is a good way to evaluate the trace for example with markers EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 97 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Trace Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the trace mode gt Select the trace mode you want to work with If you have selected the average trace mode Average 10 menu item the R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the number of sweeps the R amp S FSH includes in the averaging gt Enter the number of sweeps to include in the averaging In continuous sweep mode the R amp S FSH now calculates the moving average over the number of sweeps you have specified In single sweep mode it stops the measurement after finishing the sweeps and averages the traces 3 2 5 2 Selecting the Detector The number of measurement results collected in a single sweep usually is very high especially if the span is large However the display of the R amp S FSH can display only 631 results in horizontal direction as it is limited by the number of pixels that are available on the display Therefore it has to combine measurement results to fit them on the display In that case one pixel represents a frequency range span 631 The detector determines the way the R amp S FSH combines and displays the results for one pixel
302. ree Run Detect Sample The R amp S ZVH saves the results that it got prior to pressing the softkey as the reference result for future measurements 13 22 015 66 83 be Ref 1 94 dB Ref 5 84 Magnitude Phase The results show the difference of the current measurement and the reference measurement The unit for reference measurements is Center 1 95 GHz Span Zero Span a Iwa ys d B an EE _ Format Option The reference measurement results are always displayed below the current measurement results for better orientation Note that reference measurements are only available for the Vector Voltmeter measurement format 6 5 3 3 Configuring the Vertical Axis If you are using one of the graphical measurement formats all except the Vector Voltmeter format and the Smith Chart you can configure the vertical axis just like with scalar and vector measurements For more information see Configuring the Vertical Axis on page 172 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 179 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 EH Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 7 Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 Equipped with firmware option R amp S FSH K41 order no 1304 5612 02 you can perform distance to fault measurements with your R amp S FSH The distance to fault DTF mode provides functionality to measure cables for mechanical defects in the system that cause a deterioration of the transmission quality Th
303. reesesseeeesesnenseseseeeseeeseenseeeseneeeesaes 130 5 Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 eee 131 5 1 Measuring the Spectrum ceccceccceseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeenaeeeeeeaaeeeeesesseneeseasseeenseeees 132 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 2 R amp S FSH Table of Contents 5 1 1 Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio cc eccceeeeeeeeeeeeieeeeeetieeeeetieeeeetiieeeeesneeeeneae 132 5 1 2 Measuring the Carrier to Interference Ratio 133 5 1 3 Analyzing Interference Measurements sence ee eeneeeeeteeeeeetnaeeeeetneeeeneas 134 5 2 Working with Maps iis cciccssccseccssecstecesecceecssecticeeseeteecy sectiecvseetiecssectiesssaastiesenattede eesti 135 5 2 1 Nei une NEE 135 9 2 2 Displaying Maps seoses aa redeem A N 136 5 2 3 Measuring interferente EEA 141 5 2 4 Gathering Geographic Data EE 144 5 2 5 Analyzing Geographic Data o ecscssnecnieirnirei ianei A 147 6 Network Analyzer Mode EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEN 148 6 1 Calibrating MeaSurements ccccceseeeesesneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseseeesesesneesesesenenessenens 150 6 2 Performing Scalar Measurements esecccceseeeceseeeeeeeseeeeeseseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeenenessenens 156 6 2 1 Measuring the Transmission cece eee eeneee ee teeeee teaser tieeeeneae 156 6 2 2 Measuring the Reflection 0 cc cece eeeeeeeeeeteee ee eeieee ee eneeeeeseeeeeteeeeetieeeertineeee 158 6 3 Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 ccccccs
304. regard to the available step size e Selecting the detector It is best to use the RMS detector This detector correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each measurement point The IF envelope is digitized using a sampling frequency which is at least five times the resolution bandwidth which has been selected Based on the sample values the power is calculated for each measurement point using the following formula 2 i Mz 1 Bus L Y s RMS N i with si linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A D converter N number of A D converter values per measurement point Dous power represented by a measurement point When the power has been calculated the power units are converted into decibels and the value is displayed as a measurement point In principle the sample detector would be possible as well Due to the limited number of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel the sample detector would yield less stable results C LUU es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 53 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 5 1 Selecting a Standard If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications standard you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in the R amp S FSH memory Those predefined standards
305. rers as comfortable as possible To measure interferences you ll also need a directional antenna like the R amp S HL300 order no 4097 3005 02 For more information refer to the Quick Start Guide The interference analyzer provides several measurement modes gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Receiver Interferences softkey Interference analyzer R amp S FSH K15 gt Select the Interference Analyzer menu item The R amp S FSH enters the interference analyzer For more information see Measuring the Spectrum on page 132 Map mode gt Select the Maps menu item The R amp S FSH enters the map application Triangulation R amp S FSH K15 gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Triangulation menu item The R amp S FSH provides the triangulation measurement functions For more information see Working with Maps on page 135 Geotagging R amp S FSH K16 gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Geotagging menu item The R amp S FSH provides the geotagging measurement functions For more information see Working with Maps on page 135 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 131 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Measuring the Spectrum 5 1 Measuring the Spectrum Most spectrum measurements of the interference analyzer are also available in Spectrum mode Using these measurements allow you to locate interfere
306. ress the MODE key gt Press the Power Meter softkey The R amp S FSH activates the mode for power measurements Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 119 R amp S FSH Power Meter Using a Power Sensor Screen layout of the power meter mode Ke Ref 0 0 dBm Ofiser 0 0 dB MeasTime Normal aie 57 55 1 SOULE 6 d 4 Connected power sensor model Reference for relative power measurements Power offset Measurement time Readout of the measured power Analog readout of the measured power Measurement frequency Power sensor softkey menu OD JO Om P Go Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 120 R amp S FSH Power Meter 4 1 1 Connecting a Power Sensor Using a Power Sensor The R amp S FSH controls and powers the power sensors via a special interface on the top of the instrument You can also connect a power sensor via the USB interface on the right If you are using the R amp S FSH Z1 and Z18 power sensors connect the power sensor cable to the power sensor interface and screw it into position Power sensors of the R amp S NRP product line are controlled via the USB interface with a passive USB adapter After connecting the power sensor to the R amp S FSH you can connect the DUT to the N connector of the power sensor Risk of damage to the power sensor Before you start to work with the power sensor make sure that the continuous power applied to the input of the power sensor does not exceed
307. rns on the tracking generator and the zero span mode Screen layout of the vector voltmeter 20 ms Trace Clear Write ig Free Run Detect Sample AET L ET Ref 4 35 dB Center 2 06 GHz Meas R Result Mode Calibrate Display Format Option Result display Hardware settings Results magnitude Results phase Vector voltmeter softkey menu OD E Go Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 176 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 6 5 1 Calibrating Measurements To get the best and most accurate results you have to calibrate the measurement The reflection and transmission measurement of the vector voltmeter each have their own calibration procedures To successfully calibrate the test setup you have to connect one or more calibration standards at the reference plane The process of calibration including the selection of a calibration kit works like that for scalar or vector measurement For more information see Calibrating Measurements on page 150 6 5 2 Performing Measurements With the vector voltmeter you can measure the reflection on port 1 and the transmission in reverse direction The example included here is based on a transmission measurement of a two port filter The filter works in the frequency from of 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz Select the type of reflection measurement gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Reflection Port 1 menu item for reflecti
308. rted to inductance or capacintance Marker frequency and sign are taken into account e R jX Z0 Shows the real and imaginary components of the standardized impedance e G jB Z0 Shows the real and imaginary components of the standardized admittance gt Press the MARKER key The R amp S FSH activates a marker and opens the marker softkey menu Like usual traces you can move the marker around with the rotary knob or the cursor keys or enter a specific marker position C LUU ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 169 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results In its default state the marker position is specified by the marker frequency and complex resistance in Q The complex resistance in that case is calculated according to real component j imaginary component gt Press the Marker Mode softkey amp RBW 10kHz SWT 38ms Ven Trig Free Run Detect Sample Art 0 dR 1 8860317 GHz 2 834 j15 00 gt Select one of the marker formats The R amp S FSH adjusts the marker information accordingly Selecting the reference impedance The default reference impedance the matching point in the center of the Smith chart is 50 Q It is however also possible to perform reflection measurements on networks with another impedance gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the Marker Mode softkey gt Select the Ref Impedance menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select the re
309. rwise an averaging effect caused by video bandlimiting comes into play before the RMS value is calculated The R amp S FSH provides automatic selection of the detector In that case the R amp S FSH selects the detector that is most suitable for the current trace mode Trace mode Detector Clear Write Auto Peak Average Sample Max Hold Max Peak Min Hold Min Peak EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 99 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements If you select the detector manually the detector is independent of the trace mode and will not change gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Detector softkey gt Select the detector you want to use If you automatic detector selection is active the corresponding menu item is marked by an X 3 2 5 3 Working with a Second Trace In spectrum mode you can use two traces Both traces are based on the same settings except the trace settings like the trace mode or the detector You can use the second trace to compare for example two different detector settings In the default state only trace 1 is active gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Show softkey gt Select the Trace 2 menu item The R amp S FSH shows the second trace The second trace is in a Att 0 dB VBW 1 MHz Trig Free Run e Detect RMS different color To show that the second trace is active the R amp S FSH labels the Trace 2 menu item with an X
310. s Options R amp S FSH K15 and K16 allow you to work with maps for example view and save the position of measurements With option R amp S FSH K16 you are also able to determine the source of interference through triangulation The options also provide several other tools that make it easier to locate interference To make full use of the functions available in map mode you will need a GPS receiver and an antenna for example R amp S HL300 which already contains a GPS receiver 5 2 1 Transferring Maps Before you can use any features based on maps you have to download and install the maps on the R amp S FSH The R amp S FSH supports the map material supplied by the Open Street Maps project htto www openstreetmaps org The easiest way for you to transfer the maps to the R amp S FSH is to use the R amp S Open Street Map Wizard OSM Wizard The OSM Wizard is available for download on the R amp S FSH product homepage hitp www rohde schwarz com product fsh html The OSM wizard establishes a connection to the Open Street Maps database and thus needs a connection to the internet The tool allows you to select the area that you need for your measurements and download the corresponding maps For more information on how to download and save maps refer to the documentation of the OSM Wizard The documentation is part of the software Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 135 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 Wor
311. s each file corresponding to one of the performed measurements For easy evaluation the R amp S FSH includes the name of the measurement as defined in the wizard dialog or R amp S FSH4View in the file name All result files that belong to a measurement set are stored in the same directory The directory is named after the measurement name and site The syntax is sitename_measurement_ The R amp S FSH adds numbers in ascending order to files as well as directories if you perform a measurement or measurement set more than once EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 37 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard EH Installing Firmware Options 2 1 3 Evaluating Results The R amp S FSH4View software provides functionality to evaluate results and compile measurement reports However before you can start to evaluate the results you have to download the results to your computer gt Select the Wizard Result Control function with the NI button The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the measurement set s to download gt Select the measurement set you want to upload gt Copy the files with the button Now that the results are available you can start to compile a measurement report with the R amp S FSH4View gt Select the Report Generator with the button The R amp S FSH opens a dialog that provides all functionality to manage measurement sets
312. s Playback Spectrogram gt Press the Spectrogram Settings softkey gt Select the Spectrogram Level Range menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to enter the spectrogram level range In the example the level range of the signal is from about 60 dBm to about 100 dBm gt Therefore set the level range to Ref 20 0 dBm RBW 100 kHz SWT 500 ms Trace Gens 40 dB to get the whole signal eAtt 0 dB VBW 1 MHz Trig Free Run e Detect RMS As the level range is now adjusted the R amp S FSH is able to map its complete color range to the level range of the signal This means that signal parts with a low amplitude are in a shade of green while signal parts with a high amplitude are yellow Center 952 MHz Span 3 84 MHz Playback Mode Settings ww Spectrogram Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 74 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements The best way to display a spectrogram is therefore to reduce the level range until the lowest signal part is mapped to the lower end of the color map and the highest signal part to the upper end of the color map In a last step you can configure the spectrogram in a way that it only shows signal peaks in color and the noise floor in black To get a result like that you have to reduce the level range until the noise floor is outside the displayed range gt Instead of entering a level range of 40 dB enter a level range of 35 dB or even 30 dB This w
313. s in case of a limit violation on and off p gt Press the Options softkey gt Select the Audio Beep menu item An X in front of the Audio Beep menu item indicates that the beeper is active If the audio beep is active the R amp S FSH beeps each time a limit is violated Limit violation Note that a limit check fails only if the signal exceeds the limit line If the signal level is the same as the limit value the limit check passes R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Working with Channel Tables 3 3 Working with Channel Tables Almost all transmission systems divide their assigned frequency ranges into channels Each channel corresponds to a specific frequency To keep the handling of such systems simple you can use channel tables instead of entering frequencies manually The R amp S FSH already comes with an assortment of channel tables that you can use without doing anything If you want to test transmission standards that are not listed you can also build channel tables manually with the Channel Table Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software package that is delivered with the R amp S FSH To use one of those you just have to copy the channel table to the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 Selecting a channel table gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Frequency Mode softkey gt Select the Channel menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select a channel table gt Sel
314. s the way the R amp S FSH writes the trace e Clear Write In its default state the R amp S FSH overwrites the trace after each sweep You can apply all detectors in this mode e Average The trace is the result of the moving average over several sweeps The R amp S FSH calculates the moving average of the power levels for each pixel over a particular number of sweeps in the range from 2 to 999 Averaging reduces the effects of noise but has no effects on sine signals Using the trace averaging therefore is a good way to detect signals in the vicinity of noise You can apply all detectors in this mode e Max Hold The trace shows the maximum power levels that have been measured at each pixel To overwrite a max hold trace change a parameter in a way that the results can not be compared any more e g the span Using the max hold trace mode is a good way to detect intermittent signals or the maximum values of fluctuating signals for example Using the max hold trace mode automatically activates the max peak detector e Min Hold The trace shows the minimum power levels that have been measured at each pixel To overwrite a min hold trace change a parameter in a way that the results can not be compared any more e g the span Using the min hold trace mode is a good way to highlight signals within noise or suppress intermittent signals Using the min hold trace mode automatically activates the min peak detector e View The view t
315. s with one or two ports To enable the features of the network analyzer mode you need at least an R amp S FSH with tracking generator or one that also has an internal VSWR bridge Scalar measurements In its basic configuration an R amp S FSH with tracking generator can only perform scalar measurements and determine the reflection or reverse transmission characteristics of the device under test DUT However scalar measurements determine the magnitude of the transmitted or reflected power only Measurements yield the best results when you calibrate the R amp S FSH to the test setup Although the accuracy of measurements is high in the default factory calibration the R amp S FSH also provides all necessary calibration methods to correct the magnitude for these kinds of measurements and make results even more accurate If the R amp S FSH also has an internal VSWR bridge the R amp S FSH can also determine the reflection on either port or the forward transmission characteristics The VSWR bridge enables the R amp S FSH to switch the tracking generator to each of the measurement ports ports 1 and 2 and can therefore send signals from port 2 to port 1 and vice versa Vector measurements To increase the dynamic range and measurement accuracy you can equip the R amp S FSH with firmware option R amp S FSH K42 order no 1304 5629 02 This enables vector measurements for the network analyzer operating mode Note that vector measurements ar
316. se of the settling time of the filter Possible bandwidths are between 100 Hz and 100 kHz in a 1 3 sequence gt Press the SWEEP BW key In its default state the R amp S FSH selects the bandwidth automatically Auto Meas BW softkey In that state the bandwidth is coupled to the span The default setting is a compromise between measurement speed and good performance gt Press the Manual Meas BW softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the measurement bandwidth gt Enter the measurement bandwidth you want to work with As an indicator that the BW is no longer coupled to the span the R amp S FSH displays a red dot in front of the BW item in the hardware settings 7 2 4 2 Selecting the Sweep Mode The sweep mode is the way the R amp S FSH performs the measurement In its default state the R amp S FSH measures continuously In this mode the R amp S FSH automatically repeats the sweep in the defined range of the horizontal axis frequency or time and updates the trace accordingly after it has finished with one sweep In some cases it may be sufficient to get the results over a single sweep only e g if a particular trigger condition is met In single sweep mode the R amp S FSH performs the sweep a certain number of times depending on the number of averages you have set over the defined range of the horizontal axis frequency or time and then stops measuring It performs another sweep only after you tell it t
317. seeeeseseeeeeeeeeeneeeeseenens 160 6 3 1 Measuring the Transmtssion nannt 160 6 3 2 Measuring the Reflection 0 cc cc eeeeeee tener ee eteeee ee eeneeeeeteeeeetieeeeetieeeeetieeeereieeeeees 163 6 4 Evaluating the Results ccccscseeeceseeneeeeseeeeeeeseceeeenseeeeecnseeeeeesseeeeeeaseseeeenseeenenseeeeen 165 6 4 1 Selecting the Measurement Fommat nannt 165 6 4 2 Configuring the Vertical Avis 172 6 4 3 USING Markerg ec eeeee eee te eee enters ee tattu eerie ee ee tae ee ee taeeeeeteeeennieeeestnneeeersneeeeee 174 6 4 4 Working with Channel Tables cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseneaeeeseeeaeeeseenaeees 174 6 4 5 Using Limit Lines 174 6 4 6 Using Trace Mathematics 175 6 5 Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 cccesceecesceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseseseeeseeeeeeesesesneeseeeseenens 176 6 5 1 Calibrating Measurements cece ee eeee eee e entree ee eeee ee taeeeeeteeeeesneeeeneae 177 6 5 2 Performing Measurements teste ee ee eeee ee teeeeetneeeeesieeeeneaa 177 6 5 3 Evaluating the Results 0 0 0 ec eee eee te eee etie ee eet ie ee ee eaeee ee tneeeeenaeeeeesieeeertineeeee 179 7 Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 cccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 180 7 14 Performing Cable and Antenna Measurements cccceseececesceeeeeenenseesenenseeeseenens 182 7 1 1 Reflection Measurement ccccccceeeecceteeececeeeenceeeseeeneeeeeenaeeeseceaeanenesaeenseeeneaeeeens 182 7 1 2 Distance to Fault Measurements ee eeeee
318. solution bandwidth with the number keys When using the rotary knob or the cursor keys the 200 kHz bandwidth will be skipped In the R amp S FSH s default state the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the span i e if you change the span the R amp S FSH adjusts the resolution bandwidth Therefore you do not have to set the resolution bandwidth manually in many cases because the R amp S FSH automatically sets the resolution bandwidth if you change the span gt Press the BW key By default the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the span gt Press the Manual RBW softkey Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 89 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the resolution bandwidth gt Enter the resolution bandwidth you need The R amp S FSH uses the resolution bandwidth you have entered for the measurement If the resolution bandwidth is no longer coupled to the span the R amp S FSH puts a red dot at the RBW hardware setting e RBW 30 kHz gt Press the Auto RBW softkey to again couple the resolution bandwidth to the span In its default mode the R amp S FSH automatically adjusts the sweep time as soon as you change the resolution bandwidth This is to make sure that the settling time required for the selected resolution filter is properly taken into account The maximum allowed sweep time is 1000 s For narrow resolution filters this value
319. sor during Before zeroing the Power Sensor please the zeroing process remove all signals from the sensor input Press Continue to start zeroing gt Disconnect the power sensor from any signal sources gt Press the Continue softkey to start zeroing gt Press Cancel to abort zeroing for example if you cannot disconnect the signal source The R amp S FSH immediately starts power sensor zeroing R amp S FSH shows the message Zeroing power sensor please wait When zeroing is over the R amp S FSH shows the message Power Sensorzero OKI and switches back to the softkey menu for the power sensor Please Wait Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 122 R amp S FSH Power Meter EH Using a Power Sensor Selecting the unit for the power readout The R amp S FSH can display measured power in relative units dBm or in absolute units W mW W nW and pW It is also possible to set a reference level in dB gt Press the Unit softkey A submenu to select the unit opens gt Select the unit you want The R amp S FSH adjusts the result display accordingly Setting the reference level If you have selected the unit dB Rel the R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the reference level The R amp S FSH shows the currently set reference level in the diagram header gt Enter the reference level you want Alternatively you can set the current level readout as the reference level gt Press the gt R
320. sssssisienisnrmsiissnniiiin na a iiA i 306 10 8 2 Frequency Parameters Eed EEEEEEEREEEREEEdEREEEEEREEEEEEEdEREEEEEREEEEEEEdEREEEEEREREEEESd ENEE ENN 308 10 8 3 Amplitude Parameters sinsin iaaiiai aa iii aaia daaa 309 10 84 Sweep Configuration sessrecccncrnanenrin AEEA 309 10 8 65 Trace Functionally nccc A AA A 310 11 How a Spectrum Analyzer WorkS ssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 311 IT in A 317 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 7 R amp S FSH Documentation Overview Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSH is divided as follows Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide provides basic information on the instrument s functions It covers the following topics overview of all elements of the front and rear panels basic information on how to set up the R amp S FSH information on how to operate the R amp S FSH in a network instructions on how to perform measurements Operating Manual The Operating Manual provides a detailed description on the instrument s functions It covers the following topics e instructions on how to set up and operate the R amp S FSH in its various operating modes instructions on how to perform measurements with the R amp S FSH instructions on how to work with the available software options and applications Service Manual The Service Manual provides information on maintenance It covers the following topics e instructions on how to perform a performance test e instruc
321. st cover the carriers and the adjacent channels plus a measurement margin of about 10 to get valid results If the span is automatically calculated by the R amp S FSH with the Auto Span function the span is calculated as follows No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x transmission channel bandwidth measurement margin with the measurement margin being approx 10 of the value obtained by adding the channel spacing and the channel bandwidth Selecting the frequency span i If the frequency span is too large in comparison to the channel bandwidth or the adjacent channel bandwidths being examined only a few points on the trace are available per channel This reduces the accuracy of the waveform calculation for the channel filter used which has a negative effect on the measurement accuracy It is therefore strongly recommended that the formulas mentioned be taken into consideration when selecting the frequency span e Setting the resolution bandwidth The RBW should not be too high or too small to get both an acceptable measurement speed and a suppression of spectral components outside the channels As a rule of thumb it is recommended to set it to about 1 to 4 of the channel bandwidth You can select a larger resolution bandwidth if the spectrum within the channel to be measured and around it has a flat characteristic In the standard setting e g for standard cdmaOne at an adjacent chann
322. sult displays are the same as those of the spectrum analyzer mode The Spectrum Overview The Spectrum Overview provides an overview of the frequency spectrum with limited functionality The Spectrum Overview is meant for Ref 30 0 dBm RBW 100kHz Sweep Cont lt Clear Write fast measurements that give you a Ja Asame on AA RF Channel Power Power within Span rough idea about the signal s Lab Kai Chan BW 3 84 MHz Span 20 MHz frequency and level characteristics To maintain high measurement speed the R amp S FSH analyzes one FFT and shows the results of the signal and its surrounding frequencies Thus you should use this result display for situations when measurement speed is an issue not accuracy Center 2 1672 GHz Span 20 MHz Restle Cem Display s Settings In addition to the RF Channel Power and the Power Within Span results the Spectrum Overview shows the Occupied Bandwidth The channel bandwidth depends on the selected mobile standard While using the spectrum overview you can only set the resolution bandwidth and the span gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Spectrum Overview menu item Note that the Spectrum Overview also features miscellaneous trace modes to display different aspects of the measurement results For more information see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 97 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 214 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Result Displa
323. t and initiates the subsequent measurement Skipping individual measurements is possible when you turn on Allow to skip measurements and finish wizard sequence in the Wizard Set Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software End the measurement sequence Finish Wizard softkey Ends the measurement sequence and returns to the Measurement Wizard dialog box The results of the measurements you have already finished are kept in the memory of the R amp S FSH Ending the sequence is possible when you turn on Allow to skip measurements and finish wizard sequence in the Wizard Set Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software Abort the measurement sequence Cancel softkey Aborts the measurement and returns to the Measurement Wizard dialog box The results of the measurements you have already finished are lost When you have finished all measurements that are part of the measurement set the R amp S FSH asks you if you want to save the measurement results gt Press the Save Meas Results softkey The R amp S ZVH saves the results on the selected storage device Limited internal memory If you have to store the results on the internal memory make sure that it has enough space left to store them Else the results might get lost If the space is not enough you can delete old data with the file manager For more information see Deleting Datasets on page 29 The results for a measurement set consist of a number of file
324. t as well as saving a dataset gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 23 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets gt Select the Capture Dataset item and turn it on If on pressing the gy key saves a dataset of the current measurement Pressing the gy key saves the selected data of the current measurement Saving events You can configure the R amp S FSH to save a dataset when an event occurs gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Capture Dataset item and turn it on If on the R amp S FSH saves a dataset of the current measurement if an event occurs For more information on events see Saving Events on page 19 1 8 1 2 Renaming File Names If necessary you can rename files or file directories directly on the R amp S FSH gt Enter the File Manager gt Select the file or directory you want to rename gt Press the Select Action softkey gt Select the Rename menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to change the name of the file 1 8 1 3 Quick Naming of Datasets The R amp S FSH provides a quick naming feature that speeds up the process of naming a file Putting together a file name Basically using the quick naming feature is a way of compiling a file name by putting one or more predefined text modules or terms together in a logical way The various terms are combine
325. t contains the measurement set that you require Wizard Measurement Definition VSWR Test User Confirm the selection with the WEE EE Select softkey Hi Site Name Comments The R amp S FSH returns to the A 5 Use Wizard Cable Setti N measurement wizard dialog box It cemal now displays information about the measurement set you have just Cable Length Calibration Settings loaded S Use Stored Calibrations Yes Measurements BESSE SEN aS SS ae SE Meas Set Mea Ser WELE is Wizard The dialog box contains the following information Measurement Definition Name of the wizard definition file currently in use Pressing the ENTER key on this field has the same effect as the Load Meas Set softkey Measurement Description Short description of the measurement task This is a read only field that shows the description as defined with the R amp S FSH4View software User Name of the person that performs the measurement Number of Sequence Steps to Perform Number of individual measurements in the measurement sequence The field allows you to reduce the number of individual measurements and perform only those measurements that are really necessary If you reduce the number of measurements the R amp S FSH omits the last measurements in the sequence You can edit this field only if you have turned on the Allow Variable Number of Sequence Steps in the Wizard Set Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software Oper
326. table Markers P1 to P4 are fix and always remain on the peak level of the corresponding subrange If you d like to analyze other locations on the trace use normal marker and deltamarker functionality For more information see Using Markers and Deltamarkers on page 102 3 1 9 1 Defining the Channel Bandwidth Several frequency bands have been defined for 3GPP transmissions Depending on the frequency band you are testing you have to adjust the start and stop frequencies of the carriers gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Carrier Start softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the lower frequency of the channel gt Press the Carrier Stop softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the upper frequency of the channel Note that the standard defines spurious emissions as transmission outside the frequency band 12 5 MHz below the first carrier and 12 5 MHz above the last carrier Keep these values in mind when defining the start and stop frequencies of the carrier 3 1 9 2 Viewing the Results in a Table You can add a table to the display that shows the measurement results in numerical form gt Press the MEAS key Limit Line 3GPP BTS Category A gt Press the View List softkey Range Hz RBW Hz Peak Freq Hz Peak Power 1k 9 993 k 9 000 k 150 000 k 43 54 dBm The R amp S FSH shows a list above eas IE cay EE ee SP the trace diag ram 1 000 G 8 000 G 1M 1 8110000 G 15 06 dBm The
327. tandard at the reference plane usually the output of the RF measurement cable During calibration the R amp S FSH removes systematic errors from the measurement This process is based on correction data it gets while performing the calibration The correction data for transmission measurements is based on the results of comparing the transmission characteristics of the test setup to the frequency response of the tracking generator The correction data for reflection measurements is based on the results of a reflection measurement at a short and an open on the bridge Calibration remains valid after turning off the R amp S FSH or changing into another operating mode as calibration data is saved in the internal memory of the R amp S FSH If you save the measurement in a dataset calibration data is part of that dataset When you restore the dataset and perform the same measurement again you do not have to recalibrate the R amp S FSH 6 1 1 1 Calibration States The R amp S FSH features several calibration states It displays the current state in the status line The possible states depend on the calibration type see below e call The R amp S FSH uses factory calibration Factory calibration is restored after a preset or self alignment The R amp S FSH also uses factory calibration if you change a frequency parameter span start stop or center frequency to a value outside the calibrated frequency range or if you measure another s paramet
328. te before the R amp S FSH is able to save the data e Limit failure Saves measurement data if a limit line is violated not supported by Geotagging mode yet The R amp S FSH provides different modes for handling limit check failures You can select one via the Limits Save Mode Start on failure starts to save measurement data if a limit line is violated Stop on failure stops to save measurement data if a limit line is violated Save only failure saves only the sweeps that actually fail a limit check e Distance interval Saves measurement data after you have covered a certain distance You can define the distance that must covered before data is saved via the Distance Interval menu item e Every sweep Saves the data of all measurement sweeps that are performed Storage device To use the Save on Event functionality you need an SD card or USB stick to store the data on The internal memory would probably not be sufficient gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Recording Storage menu item gt From the dropdown menu select the storage device you prefer SD card or USB device EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 20 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets 1 8 Managing Datasets The R amp S FSH provides functionality to manage save restore etc datasets available in its internal memory or an external storage device The USB
329. tem works properly If unusual amounts of signal power are being reflected you can guess that there is something wrong in the system This measurement helps to find reflections by displaying the magnitude of the reflections in dB in a specified frequency range gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Reflection menu item The R amp S FSH starts the reflection measurement over its entire frequency range The figure shows an example of a reflection measurement without any major faults in the cable or the antenna You can perform reflection measurements on the complete system or on individual components of the system If you measure while two or more system components are connected the results of the reflection measurement are an aggregate over these components Therefore you can only see the aggregated magnitude of the reflected power in a specified frequency range Center AA GHz Distance to Fault To draw conclusions about which component is affected and determine the location of the fault you need to perform further analysis using other measurements C LUU MM Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 182 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 EE Performing Cable and Antenna Measurements 7 1 2 Distance to Fault Measurements The distance to fault DTF measurement determines the exact location of possible faults in a transmission system If you connect the end of the cable to the R amp S FSH the D
330. terference analyzer or geotagging application gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Antenna menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select or disable the antenna gt Select the antenna type you are using or turn using the antenna off Disabled Disables the use of an antenna HL300 Side Selects an antenna connected to the AUX port on the left side of the R amp S FSH for example R amp S HL300 _HE300 Top Selects an antenna connected to the power sensor jack on the top of the R amp S FSH for example R amp S HE300 The currently selected antenna model is displayed in the title bar The color of the label indicates the state of the satellite lock of the the GPS receiver of the antenna model For more information on the GPS receiver states see the Quick Start Guide 5 2 3 2 Using an Audio Signal to Locate Interferers You can configure the R amp S FSH to play back an audio signal when it receives a signal The audio signal changes its volume and frequency depending on the strength of the received signal gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Tone TT menu item The R amp S FSH turns the audio signal on The R amp S FSH allows you to define various aspects of this audio signal Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 141 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Working with Maps Defining a squelch level The squelch level defines the signal level above which the aud
331. the or dB menu item The R amp S FSH shows the EVM in the unit you have selected Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 269 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 Measurements on LTE Signals Equipped with the software application R amp S FSH K50 and R amp S FSH K51 you can perform measurements on downlink LTE FDD R amp S FSH K50 and TDD R amp S FSH K51 signals in accordance to the 3GPP standard with your R amp S FSH Bandwidth of LTE signals Because of the bandwidth of LTE signals measurements are possible only with instruments that support a bandwidth of 20 MHz serial numbers 105000 and higher Press the MODE key Press the Dig Mod Analyzer softkey Select the LTE FDD BTS menu item for FDD measurements Y vV vV Yy Select the TD LTE BTS menu item for TDD measurements The R amp S FSH starts the signal analysis To get highest measurement accuracy it is necessary to synchronize the reference frequency of the R amp S FSH with the base station via the EXT REF IN input Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 270 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 1 The Result Summary The result summary shows various measurement results and hardware settings in numerical form Center 1 815 CHz Rel levet 60 0 dBm Sweep Cont GE _ Ref Offset 00 48 Cell Grp ID Auto z aa Att 0048 Cyclic Prefix Auto Transd Preamp On Antenna M 2x2 OTA Ch
332. the reference value itself gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref Pos softkey gt Enter the reference position you want The R amp S FSH moves the trace accordingly 7 2 3 2 Setting the Attenuation The R amp S FSH provides functions to attenuate the signal at both the tracking generator output and the RF input gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the TG Output Attenuation softkey gt Enter the attenuation of the signal at the tracking generator output You can attenuate the signal from 0 dBm to 40 dBm An input of 10 dB for example corresponds to an attenuation of 10 dBm gt Press the RF Att Amp Imp softkey gt Select the Manual menu item or one of the automated attenuation modes gt Enter the attenuation of the signal at the RF input You can set an RF attenuation in the range from 0 dB to 40 dB in 5 dB steps Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 192 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 El Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests 7 2 4 Setting and Triggering the Sweep When setting up the sweep you have to deal with several parameters that are interdependent For easy and quick access most of these parameters are combined in the sweep menu 7 2 4 1 Setting the Measurement Bandwidth The measurement bandwidth determines the noise figure of the receiver Small bandwidths result in higher measurement dynamics for S21 measurements However small bandwidths cause longer measurement times becau
333. the DUT The reflection coefficient is the ratio of the amplitude of a reflected wave and that of the incidental wave that occur in an electrical transmission line e Cable Loss The cable loss measurement evaluates the power attenuation of a cable over a specified frequency range in dB The amount of power that gets absorbed depends on the frequency and the length of the cable The cable loss format is available for reflection measurements The following pictures show the results of a reflection measurement in Magnitude format left side and VSWR format right side 0 kHz Trig Free Run gt Ref 2048 BW 10kHz Trig Free Run TG Power 18 dBm Am 5 dB TG Power _ 10 d n B Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 184 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 a E N Performing Cable and Antenna Measurements 7 1 5 Calibrating Measurements To get the best and most accurate results you have to calibrate the measurement The R amp S ZVH provides several calibration methods You will need one of the available calibration standards R amp S FSH Z28 Z29 order no 1300 7804 03 and 1300 7504 03 or R amp S ZV Z121 order no 1164 0496 02 03 To successfully calibrate the test setup you have to connect the calibration standard at the reference plane usually the output of the RF measurement cable Calibration is performed over the R amp S FSH s entire frequency range full span This eliminates the need for recalibration
334. the horizontal axis for spectrum measurements The contents of the menu depend on the currently selected measurement Usually the horizontal axis contains frequency information in spectrum mode You can specify the frequency in terms of the center frequency or by defining a start and stop frequency for a particular span If you Know the frequency of the signal you are measuring it is best to match the center frequency to the signal s frequency If you are investigating signals e g harmonics that are within a particular frequency range the best option is to enter a start and stop frequency to define the span 3 2 1 1 Defining the Center Frequency The center frequency represents the frequency at the center of the horizontal axis in the diagram area gt Press the FREQ key The R amp S FSH opens the frequency menu When you press the FREQ key the R amp S FSH automatically opens an input field to define the center frequency If the input field is inactive you can open it with the Center Freq softkey gt Enter the center frequency you need The frequency you have entered becomes the new center frequency While adjusting the center frequency you may obtain a value that is outside the R amp S FSH maximum span If this happens the R amp S FSH automatically reduces the span 3 2 1 2 Defining a Frequency Step Size If you set the center frequency with the rotary knob or the cursor keys the distance of each step that you take
335. the stop frequency If you have entered a stop frequency that is outside the maximum frequency range the R amp S FSH sets the stop frequency to the possible maximum The label of the horizontal axis changes from Center and Span to Start and Stop 3 2 1 5 Setting the Span The span is the frequency range around the center frequency that a spectrum analyzer displays on the screen The span you should select depends on the signal and the measurement that you are performing A rule of thumb is that it should be at least twice the bandwidth occupied by the signal The available span for frequency domain measurements depends on the instrument model R amp S FSH4 10 Hz to 3 6 GHz R amp S FSH8 10 Hz to 8 GHz R amp S FSH13 10 Hz to 13 6 GHz R amp S FSH20 10 Hz to 20 GHz If you set a span of 0 Hz zero span the R amp S FSH performs measurements in the time domain gt Press the SPAN key When you press the SPAN key the R amp S FSH automatically opens an input field to define the span If the input field is inactive you can open it with the Manual Span softkey gt Enter the span you need The R amp S FSH adjusts the span of the horizontal axis Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 83 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements If you have to switch between full span and a smaller span you can do so without having to enter the numeric values gt Press the SPAN key gt Press the
336. time slots which are not numbered and have a shorter duration than the normal time slots These are the special time slots that belong to each subframe two time slots that conatin the pilot information and one time slot that serves as a guard period Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 264 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals The switching point is represented by a red vertical line All time slots after the switching point are considered as downlink slots Because the R amp S FSH K48 only allows measurements on the downlink it evaluates the results EVM or C I only for the time slots that carry downlink information So if a time slot contains power but does not show EVM or C I results the switching point is probably set in a way that this time slot is considered as an uplink slot For each time slot 0 to 6 and the two pilot time slots DWPTS and UpPTS the result display shows the following results Slot number Shows the time slot type The normal time slots are numbered from 0 to 6 Time slot 0 is always reserved for the downlink and time slot 1 always reserved for the uplink The remaining time slots can either carry uplink or downlink information depending on the switching point you have set The special time slots are labeled DwPTS and UpPTS They are shorter than normal time slots and carry the pilot information for uplink UpPTS and downlink DWPTS Note that the UpPTS is not analyzed
337. ting the Results 6 4 1 Selecting the Measurement Format Depending on the measurement mode scalar or vector and result display reflection or transmission you can select one of several measurement formats Each of the measurement formats shows a different aspect of the measurement results Note that some of the measurement formats become available only after you have calibrated the measurement gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Format softkey gt Select the measurement format from the menu The R amp S FSH displays the results in the new measurement format and adjusts the trace and the scale of the vertical axis accordingly The current measurement format is part of the status line information RMEIEES Magnitude dB Mag Shows the magnitude of the transmission or reflection in dB The diagram is a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic vertical axis The horizontal axis represents the measured frequency range The magnitude format is the default format for all measurements Available for all measurements Phase Shows the phase characteristics of the DUT in degrees The diagram is a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis The horizontal axis represents the measured frequency range In the default state the R amp S FSH shows the phase only from 200 to 200 In that case the R amp S FSH displays measurement results correctly only if the phase difference between two adjacent test points is less than 180
338. tions on how to repair the R amp S FSH including a spare parts list e mechanical drawings Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The current release notes are provided on the internet Internet Site The internet site at htto www rohde schwarz com product fsh htm provides the most up to date information on the R amp S FSH The most recent manuals are available as printable PDF files in the download area Also provided for download are firmware updates including the corresponding release notes instrument drivers current data sheets application notes and image versions O a UUU es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 8 R amp S FSH Conventions Used in the Documentation Conventions Used in the Documentation The following conventions are used throughout the R amp S R amp S FSH Operating Manual Typographical conventions Convention Description Graphical user interface elements All names of graphical user interface elements both on the screen and on the front and rear panels such as dialog boxes softkeys menus options buttons etc are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters and enclosed by quotation marks Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed i
339. tive to CPICH menu item All power display now relate to the pilot channel 9 4 4 6 Performing Fast Measurements Faster measurements are possible if you skip the channel search during the measurement gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Channel Search Off menu item The R amp S FSH stops performing a channel search If the channel search is off measurements are faster However some results like the Composite EVM can not be calculated if the channels are not known Thus turning the channel search off is useful if you are interested in signal powers only The channel search is always on for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Channel Table result displays All other result displays work both ways SSS SSS Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 236 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals Equipped with the software application R amp S FSH K46 you can perform measurements on downlink CDMA2000 signals according to the 3GPP2 standard with your R amp S FSH You can expand the functionality by adding the R amp S FSH K46E firmware application This application performs code domain power measurements on downlink CDMA2000 signals according to the standard gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Dig Mod Analyzer softkey gt Select the CDMA2000 BTS menu item The R amp S FSH starts the signal analysis When start
340. tkey if changes are not required and proceed with the measurement After each measurement step you have several options Continue with the next measurement Continue softkey Finishes the current measurement and begins with the next measurement by showing the necessary preparations Repeat the current measurement Repeat Meas softkey Repeats the current measurement e g if the results don t match your expectations and you want to validate the results Interrupt the measurement set sequence Interrupt Wizard softkey Interrupting the sequence of measurements may become necessary if the measurement doesn t yield the expected results e g violated limit lines In that case you can interrupt the measurement sequence and try to find the origin of the problem by using different settings or measurements than those defined in the wizard When you interrupt the wizard sequence the complete functionality is available as if you would not use the wizard When you interrupt a measurement sequence the R amp S FSH keeps the results of measurements you have already performed When you are finished reconfiguring the measurement press the WIZARD key and resume the measurement sequence with the Resume Sequence softkey ee EEE ees Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 36 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard Installing Firmware Options Skip a measurement Skip Meas softkey Skips a single measuremen
341. ts Depending on the distance you can also get an idea of the component that is defective Center 1 18053 GHz Span 2 360687 GHz OTF List As 521 Cable Loss Config Marker 1 for example shows a defect in the cable Marker 2 shows a fault at the end of the cable probably a bad or loose connection 7 1 3 Spectrum Measurements The spectrum measurement provides an overview of the spectrum of the DUT without the necessity to change the operating mode This measurement is well suited for a quick check if there are any interfering signals that may impair results before you start the actual measurement gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Spectrum menu item The R amp S FSH shows the current spectrum Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 183 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 EE Performing Cable and Antenna Measurements 7 1 4 Selecting the Measurement Format You can select several measurement formats for each measurement The measurement format selects the way the results are displayed e Magnitude dB Mag This is the default format It shows the magnitude of the results in dB e VSWR The VSWR shows the standing wave ratio in a cartesian diagram The VSWR is the ratio of the maximum voltage and the minimum voltage that occur in an electrical transmission line The VSWR format is available for DTF and reflection measurements e Reflection Coeffcient Shows the reflection coefficient of
342. u have defined the cable characteristics you still have to activate the use of the customized cable gt Press the Cable Config softkey gt Select the User Model menu item If the R amp S FSH uses the customized cable model it shows an X at the User Model menu item 7 2 1 3 Working with a DTF List The DTF list shows the results of the distance to fault measurement in numerical form gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the DTF Settings softkey gt Press the DTF List softkey The R amp S FSH opens a table that lists the peaks it has found during the measurement Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 187 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 El Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests The table contains the following information e Peak Shows the peak the results refer to e Distance Shows the distance from the measurement plane to the peak e Return Loss Shows the magnitude of the peak To limit the information in the list you can define a threshold for the DTF list so that only peaks above a certain level are included in the list gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the DTF Settings softkey gt Press the DTF List Threshold softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define a threshold in dB gt Enter the threshold you want The R amp S FSH now only shows the peaks that are above the level you have entered Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 188 R amp S FSH Distance to F
343. ual 1173 6275 12 24 102 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 6 2 Positioning Markers gt Press the MARKER key The marker menu opens If as yet no marker has been activated the R amp S FSH automatically activates the main marker and positions it on the maximum level that has been measured In addition the marker frequency input field opens You can perform the following actions e Position the marker with the cursor keys When positioning the marker with the cursor keys the step size is 10 of the span e Position the marker with the rotary knob When positioning the marker with the rotary knob the step size is one pixel e Enter a marker position with the number keys and confirm the entry with one of the unit keys gt Confirm the marker position with the ENTER key The marker input field closes By default the marker list above the diagram area is active The marker list shows the horizontal position of all markers and the corresponding vertical value If inactive the list shows only the coordinates of markers 1 and 2 You can turn it off and on again whenever you like gt Press the View List softkey The marker list turns off or on depending on its original state 3 2 6 3 Positioning a Delta Marker When a normal marker is already in use you can add delta markers gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the New Marker softkey The R amp S FSH activates a delta m
344. uanan nd idana 223 9 4 Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals cccssecceceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeseeneeeeeaes 224 941 TheResut Summa e0etied Ee toevreedtevad eege ceeidadeas EEE 225 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 4 R amp S FSH Table of Contents 9 4 2 The Code Domain AnalyZ r sc vcsvccccvividesststacusietsaaetecaranectateaeig SEENEN BEEN AE 229 9 4 3 The Code Domain Channel Table cece eeeeeeeeeeneee ee etneeeeeteeeeeteeeeeeneeeeneaa 231 9 4 4 Configuring the Measurement cccteeeeeseeceeeeeeeceedeneecesecneeeeeeeeteceeeeaeeeeedenseeeeeeee 233 9 5 Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals ccccsccccesserceseseeeeeseseeeeeeeseneeeeseeneeeeseaes 237 9 5 1 The Result SUMMA ccc ccccitececnnnecy cesttiaceeetcead e i 238 9 5 2 The Code Domain Analyzer essor ainaani aaa EES dE A AA 241 9 5 3 The Code Domain Channel Table aeeeeeesseeeessseerneeernnseennnnssnnnseinnnnsannnniannnnnnnnnanann 243 954 The PN Scanner EE 245 9 5 5 Configuring the Measurement cccccceeceeeccceeeeneneeeeeneeeeeeeneneeeeeneneeeeeneneeeeeneneneeens 246 9 6 Measurements on 1XEV DO Signal ccccessesceeeseeeeeeesneneeseeeeeeeeesneeeeeeseeeseeeeaes 249 9 6 1 The Result Summa EE 250 9 6 2 The PN En LTE 252 9 6 3 The Burst Power Result Display c ccccccsccceeeesneeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseenaceeeeenaneeeeeaaeeneeens 252 9 6 4 Configuring the Measurement 0eEEEREEEERERREEEREENEEEREEREEEEREEREEEREEEEEEEREERSEERRRN
345. ues into account for future measurements When performing measurements on multi carrier signals you can define the spacing of the transmission Tx channels to one another By default the R amp S FSH assumes equal spacing between all Tx channels in the system Therefore the spacing you enter for the first two Tx channels is automatically applied to all other Tx channels If you do measurements on systems with a different channel spacing for each Tx channel you can also set the channel spacing for each Tx channel separately by entering the respective number in the fields If the spacings are not equal the channel distribution according to the center frequency is as follows e Odd number of TX channels The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency e Even number of TX channels The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the frequency between those two channels This frequency is aligned to the center frequency Adjacent or alternate channel spacing is also available for single carrier measurements The R amp S FSH can perform measurements on up to 12 adjacent channels Usually the first adjacent channel to the Tx channel is referred to as the Adjacent Channel ADJ All others are called Alternate Channels ALT1 to ALT11 By default the R amp S FSH assumes that the distance of the adjacent channels to each other is the same In that case you only have to enter the first spacing value The R amp S FSH then calculates
346. uip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K44E the code domain channel table becomes available to visualize the channel structure of the signal The code domain channel table shows various parameters and measurement results on code channel level Screen layout of the code domain channel table result display ater 21672 GHz Ref Level 30 0 dBm Sweep Comt Channel Bei Offset 0 0 4B Antenna Div None Band e Att 0048 P CPICH Siet Transi Preamp On Ch Search On Scr Code Auto Global Results RF Channel oei 57 83 dBm Active Change 36 ChaeW SF Symb Rate T Offs Status Power Abs Power Rel to Type ksps chips Bits dBm CPICH dB 0 256 Active V Di F Active SCH one ome Active 3 98 25 P CCPCH 126 150 Active 66 50 5 08 PICH 3256 15 0 0 o Active EE 787 HSPOSCH 416 240 0 0 o Active 81 52 20 10 0 o Active 0o o Active 0 o Active 1 Current type of result display 2 Currently selected standard 3 Header table 4 Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed 5 Global results 6 Channel table 7 WCDMA softkey menu 9 4 3 1 Header Table The header table contains various settings already discussed in the sections above For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 209 and The Result Summary on page 225 9 4 3 2 Global Results The global results include information about the com
347. ulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals Equipped with the software application R amp S FSH K44 you can perform measurements on WCDMA signals in accordance to the 3GPP standard with your R amp S FSH You can expand the functionality by adding the R amp S FSH K44E firmware application This application performs code domain power measurements on downlink WCDMA signals according to the standard gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Dig Mod Analyzer softkey gt Select 3GPP WCDMA BTS menu item The R amp S FSH starts the signal analysis When starting a measurement the R amp S FSH first records a section of the signal that lasts 20 ms or 2 WCDMA frames From this information it gets all necessary information for further analysis of the WCDMA signal The R amp S FSH performs various measurements on a WCDMA slot in general as well as measurements on specific channels When you perform measurements on slot level you can either analyze a single slot or over all of the 15 slots of one frame Measurements on slot level include the power level error vector magnitude EVM the code domain error and the frequency error To get sufficient measurement accuracy it is necessary to synchronize the reference frequency of the base station and the R amp S FSH via the EXT REF IN input In addition you can analyze the following channel types in more detail e Common Pilot Channel CPICH Note
348. ulator to demodulate and monitor audio signals It demodulates the signal at the marker frequency You can listen to the demodulated signal with the internal speaker or headphones that you can connect to the 3 5 mm headphone jack on the top of the R amp S FSH When demodulating an AM modulated signal the R amp S FSH turns the video voltage into an audible sound You should therefore set the reference level to about the level of the signal that you are demodulating If you perform measurements in the time domain the R amp S FSH demodulates continuously In the frequency domain you can define a time period the R amp S FSH demodulates the signal at the marker frequency The frequency sweep then stops at the marker frequency for that time before finishing the sweep gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the Marker Function softkey gt Select the demodulation scheme you require from the menu The R amp S FSH starts to demodulate the signal Demodulating signals If you turn on the demodulator the R amp S FSH automatically turns off the noise marker or the frequency counter eee EEE es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 109 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements Defining the demodulation time period gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the Marker Function softkey gt Select the Time menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the demodulation time gt Enter the demo
349. uld have been obtained if it had been directly connected to the test point gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref Offset softkey The input field to enter the reference offset opens gt Enter the offset you need The selected offset is displayed in the diagram header and is taken into account in the power level and matching results If high powers are applied that exceed the maximum input level of the R amp S FSH Z214 or R amp S FSH Z44 a directional coupler or an attenuator has to be connected ahead of the power sensor In such cases the coupling attenuation of the directional coupler or the attenuation value of the attenuator are to be entered as positive dB values see above into the R amp S FSH to ensure true measured power readout In both cases a termination or an attenuator of sufficient power handling capacity has to be connected to the power sensor at the load end The matching readout is irrelevant in such case since it is likewise corrected by taking into account the attenuation value of the termination or attenuator Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 129 R amp S FSH Power Meter Using the Channel Power Meter 4 3 Using the Channel Power Meter The R amp S FSH also supports power measurements without using a power sensor In that case you can connect the DUT directly to the R amp S FSH and still perform accurate channel power measurements The screen layout is the same as is described in Using a Power Se
350. ults on page 283 All results in the allocation summary are normalized to one resource element or one subcarrier respectively Ref Signal Power and EVM of the reference signal The R amp S FSH evaluates the results over all resource blocks and subframes QPSK 16QAM 64QAM Power and EVM of the data channels PDSCH that you are measuring The R amp S FSH evaluates the results over all resource blocks and subframes of the respective modulation P SYNC S SYNC PBCH PCFICH Power and EVM of the corresponding channel Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 274 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 1 4 Reference Signal Overview The reference signal overview becomes active when you perform over the air MIMO measurements The reference signal overview contains the power and EVM for each antenna The number of results depends on the number of antennas you are measuring 1 2 or 4 In addition the R amp S FSH shows the Time Alignment Error vor each antenna The Time Alignment Error is the deviation of an antenna from the reference antenna The reference antenna is antenna 1 The power values are normalized to one resource element or one subcarrier respectively The R amp S FSH evaluates the results over all resource blocks and subframes If you Know the cell ID you can synchronize the R amp S FSH with the reference signal Synchronizing with the reference signal gt Press the MEAS key
351. ults in a diagram gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Resource Allocations menu item The R amp S FSH shows the resource allocation Screen layout of the resource allocations result display Ref 20 0 dBm H Sweep Single Tra Clear Write KM Art 15 dB Preamp On Ref Offset 0 0 dB RF Channel Pwr 31 2 dBm Overall EVM m Coll Identity 1 Current type of result display 2 Currently selected standard 3 Color map 4 Diagram area 5 General signal information 6 LTE softkey menu The resource allocations result display shows the power of each resource element in the signal Each row of the diagram corresponds to a resource block The columns represent a subframe each The resource allocation is thus a good way to measure the amount of traffic currently on the carrier based on the power levels of each resource block The power of the resource elements is represented by colors with a map showing the corresponding power levels next to the diagram By default the R amp S FSH automatically scales the color map according the signal powers it receives Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 278 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals Customizing the color map Alternatively you can customize the color map and customize it for over the air measurements and cable connected measurements separately gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Over The Air Ma
352. ults nonetheless In addition normalization needs one calibration standard only and therefore is faster than a full calibration gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the Normalize Ref 0 0 dB RBW 18 Vis SWT 20ms Trace Clear Write Transmission Rev Port 4 gt 2 s Art 0dB Trig Free Run Detect Sample menu item gt Perform normalization For more information see Performing Calibration gt Reconnect the DUT The R amp S FSH shows the results of the scalar transmission D 2 06 GH Span 50 MH measurement on the filter Z z SSS z Mode Calibrate Display Format Trace You can change the measurement configuration e g select another sweep time or detector without affecting the accuracy of the measurement except the frequency parameters and attenuation Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 157 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Scalar Measurements 6 2 2 Measuring the Reflection The example included here is based on a reflection measurement of the same two port filter used for the transmission measurement The filter has a center frequency of 2060 MHz and a bandwidth of about 11 MHz You can skip the preset scalar measurement selection and frequency settings if you have already set up the R amp S FSH for the measurement You can also skip the calibration if you have performed the appropriate calibration already Preset the R amp S FSH Before starting the measurement pro
353. up the horizontal axis of the measurement diagram Cosa iar r pri poise Span Selection The SPAN key opens the span menu that contains functionality to set the span Seat RA RA k le eg Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer 10 2 4 Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the vertical axis of the measurement diagram in Scale Adjust Primary Transducer 150 dB 15 0 dB Div 130 dB 13 0 dB Div 120 dB 12 0 dB Div 100 dB 10 0 dB Div 50 dB 5 0 dB Div 30 dB 3 0 dB Div Manual 0 dB 20 dB 2 0 dB Div Auto Low Distortion 10 dB 1 0 dB Div Auto Low Noise 5 dB 0 5 dB Div 3 dB 0 3 dB Div Preamp On 2 dB 0 2 dB Div Preamp Off 1 dB 0 1 dB Div Linear 0 100 Ref Position 0 10 2 5 Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep 10 2 6 Bandwidth Selection The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths Con re k rel k rel ke 10 2 7 10 2 8 10 2 9 Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces Trace 2 og Cid Memory 1 Display and Limit Lines The LINES key opens a menu that contains the functionality to control display and limit SREY parse HR ome Unselect Limit Threshol
354. urement mode the R amp S FSH determines the power level of a single frequency only The available frequency range depends on the R amp S FSH model you are using gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Freq softkey Enter the frequency you want to measure For a quick change of frequencies with the rotary knob define a frequency stepsize gt Press the Freq Stepsize softkey Enter a frequency stepsize For measurements on systems that use channels instead of single frequencies you can also load a channel table and measure the channel power gt Press the Channel Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select a channel table For measurements based upon a channel table you can select a single channel instead of a single receive frequency gt Press the Channel softkey gt Enter a channel number Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 198 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Selecting the Measurement Mode 8 1 1 2 Customizing the Bargraph Aspects The bargraph is a graphical representation of the power level with one dimension the power level of the receive freuqency The R amp S FSH provides several ways to customize the aspects of the bargraph Selecting the Unit By default the unit the R amp S FSH uses in receiver mode for the measured power levels in general is dBuV In addition to dBuV the receiver mode provides other units as well gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Unit softke
355. urement results and hardware settings in numerical form gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Result Summary menu item The R amp S FSH shows the numerical results in a table 1 00001 GHz Tramsd Preamp On Max Users 16 Ser Code Auto e 99 Results 4 pe NOT FOUND RF Channel Power 10494 dBm PCCPCH Symbol EVM 3 rms Slot 0 Carrier Freq Error Hz Absolute Power Rel to RF Chan Pwr Data Power dBm dB Data 1 Power dBm dB Data 2 Power dBm dB Midamble Power dBm gp Current type of result display Currently selected standard General settings Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed Global results fora TD SCDMA time slot Power results for a TD SCDMA time slot 7 TD SCDMA softkey menu SS Go oun 9 7 1 1 General Settings For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 209 In addition the application features some settings specific to the 3GPP standard Scrambling Code Shows the scrambling code of the base station The scrambling code is a number between 0 and 127 If you have selected automatic detection of the code the R amp S FSH shows the label Auto Automatic detection is the default method to find the scrambling code For more information see Specifying the Scrambling Code on page 266 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 2
356. ures a data synchronization that matches the data available on the R amp S FSH and that on the computer with the R amp S FSH4View installation gt Press the Synchronization Control E button The software opens another dialog box to control synchronization By default the software synchronizes a selected set of data depending on the synchronization direction e Synchronization from PC to R amp S FSH Templates button Updates all files on the R amp S FSH that have been created or edited with the R amp S FSH4View software package cable models limit lines transducers channel tables etc Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 21 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets e Synchronization from R amp S FSH to PC Resuts gt gt button Updates all files on the PC that have been created on the R amp S FSH datasets screenshots and wizard results Removing outdated files When you turn on Remove Orphans the software removes all files from the R amp S FSH that it cannot find on the PC Alternatively you can synchronize all files at the same time fz Synchronize templates and datasets in one direction PC to R amp S FSH a or R amp S FSH to PC regardless of the file type FSH lt PC gt Turn on Synchronize All FSH gt PC gt Press either the FSH lt PC button to update all files on the R amp S FSH based on the data available on the PC or the FSH PC button to update the fi
357. ust feature an VSWR bridge in addition to the tracking generator Unlike scalar measurements vector measurements also measure the phase characteristics of a DUT Vector measurements also have a higher dynamic range and accuracy because of the advanced calibration methods that vector measurements provide In addition to normalization vector measurements feature full calibration methods that require a 50 Q termination in addition to an open or short circuit Instead of the characteristics of the VSWR bridge the decisive factor of the quality of results is the quality of the calibration standards Because of the higher dynamic range vector measurements allow more accurate measurements of well matched DUTs at a higher display resolution Vector measurements also unlock more measurement formats and therefore provide more information from different perspectives about the DUT If you are performing measurements on active DUTs e g amplifiers you can supply them with DC voltage by connecting an RF cable to the BIAS ports The DC voltage is fed in from a suitable external power supply max 600 mA max 50 V Supplying DC voltage to active DUTs To measure the antenna coupling of mobile radio base stations the DC voltage must be supplied to two tower mounted amplifiers TMA This is done by applying a suitable voltage at the BIAS 1 and BIAS 2 BNC ports 6 3 1 Measuring the Transmission The example included here is based on a tra
358. ve downloaded different zoom levels of your maps you can change the scale of the map to get a more detailed view or a more general overview gt Press the Zoom In softkey to decrease the scale of the map gt Press the Zoom Out softkey to increase the scale of the map 5 2 2 2 Aligning the Map The R amp S FSH provides several tools to align the map This is useful if you want your current location to be in the center of the display or if you have moved out of the visible map area Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 137 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Working with Maps Manual alignment gt Use the cursor keys to move the map in a particular direction You can move the maps until you reach the borders of the downloaded content Note that the borders of the maps might be different for different scales Automatic alignment For most automatic map alignment functions you have to establish a GPS connection gt Press the GPS Position softkey The R amp S FSH opens a menu that contains various functions to control and work with GPS data In this menu you can select from the following automatic alignment functions e Go To Current Position Moves your current position to the center of the display once e Trace Current Position Keeps your current position in the center of the display even if you move e Go To Triangulation Position Moves the location of the triangulation result to the cent
359. ver softkey menu While scanning the R amp S FSH indicates the frequency it is currently measuring with a triangle at the bottom of the diagram Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 200 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Selecting the Measurement Mode Selecting the trace style The trace style defines the way the trace looks gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Trace Style softkey gt Select the trace style you prefer from the menu The R amp S FSH provides two trace styles in receiver mode e Lines The Lines trace style shows a vertical line for each receive frequency as described above e Polygon The Polygon trace style shows the trace as a continuous horizontal line The gaps between the actual measurement frequencies are interpolated 8 1 2 1 Defining the Scan Range The scan range defines the frequency range that the scan takes place in Therefore you have to define a start and stop frequency for the scan range and a scan step size The step size defines the equidistant space between the receive frequencies and thus in combination with the start and stop frequency the number of receive frequencies considered in the scan Example If you define a scan range from 100 MHz to 200 MHz with a step size of 10 MHz the receive frequencies that are analyzed are 100 MHz 110 MHz 120 MHz 200 MHz Overall this scan range defines a set of 11 receive frequencies gt Press the SPAN key gt
360. veseazays 93 195 Factory calibrato sinesine ieii 150 File management 21 Blog UE 29 FM demodulator 109 SPSCIOGK AN sesk sasscocacescaetsdiseetanevsaey dee demenarestemeacanennieecas 76 Free MUM EE 93 195 Frequency COUNTE 5 svssecaccassasctshesavessvasacasevanapareuansvanevanevevensversesecvese Gated sweep WE GPS position GPS synchronization burst power ae carrier frequency error Se S Sg EMMER Harmonic distortion cccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenereeess AdjUSESCIHINGS EE lg e Hold spectrogram cccceeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeee Horizontal avis Impedance Smith Chatt EE Input Cancellation e hneisa reitera eiieeii Lee Confirmation numbers Instrument setup Isotropic antenna e D S digital modulation 2 cece cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeetees Key AMpt GAM oi deet de alioa airian nai oan 191 Ampt NA 2secci sleeves Maida dae deae 172 Freg CAT E 189 ErertSetiiesde eeneg Seege EE ee eee 81 Mark oi E 102 OR EE 182 Meas NA 150 156 160 165 Messe PM eet ENEE duncan 122 127 Meas SA E 39 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 318 R amp S FSH Index Ee EE Limit CHOCK 2 veuderieesh iede A een eee deed dere e carrier frequency error ll RE Channel bandwidth cece cece eeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaee CYIG PROTX E EVM es eege A E E Manual span Marker ierre automatic positioning delta marker
361. way is to define a cable model with the Cable Model Editor that is part of the R amp S FSH4View software package The R amp S FSH4View is delivered with the R amp S FSH With this software you can define a cable model on a PC and then transfer it to the R amp S FSH Then you can select it just like any other predefined cable model For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 186 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 El Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests If you do not have access to a PC but still need a cable model that is not stored on the R amp S FSH you can also define the characteristics of a cable temporarily on the R amp S FSH itself It is not possible to save these in a data set however They are lost as soon as you change them or load another cable model gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Cable Config softkey gt Select the Define User Model menu item A submenu opens Select the Frequency menu item Enter the frequency of the cable you are testing Select the Velocity menu item Enter the cable velocity Select the Loss menu item YY vV VvV V Y Enter the cable loss You can now perform measurements on the temporary cable definition Note that as soon as you change any cable parameter or load another cable model the temporary data is lost and you have to define it again if you have to perform further measurements After yo
362. wer level that has been measured first Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 13 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements gt Press the Spectrogram Settings softkey gt Select the Spectrogram Reference Level menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to enter the spectrogram reference level The reference level should be near the maximum level that has been measured while the spectrogram was running In the example the reference level should be at about 60 dBm gt Enter the reference level you need The R amp S FSH now shifts the reference level of the spectrogram to the value you have entered Note that the spectrogram reference level does not affect the spectrum result display as well as the spectrum reference level Amplitude menu does not affect the spectrogram In the screenshot the spectrum trace is therefore exactly the same as in the previous picture The result however still does not Ref 20 0 dBm RBW 100kHz SWT 500ms Trace Clear Write e Att 0 dB VBW 1 MHz Trig Free Run e Detect RMS show signal differences in detail The only thing that happened is that the colors have shifted in the example to yellow because the color that corresponds to the reference level has shifted from green to yellow All other colors that are part of the color scheme are still unused because the spectrogram level range is still the ETE Span 3 84 MHz same 150 dB Mode Setting
363. wer over the total span the percentage of the total power The R amp S FSH now displays the occupied bandwidth graphically in the trace window and numerically above the trace window Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 46 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 3 5 Changing the Span Usually the span the R amp S FSH sets yields optimal results But sometimes you also need to see the spectrum outside the current span to detect other signal components that you need to include in the measurement Therefore you can adjust the span to up to ten times the channel bandwidth and still be able to see the spectrum outside the measurement channel gt Press the SPAN key In the default configuration Auto Span is active The R amp S FSH automatically sets the optimal span for the channel power measurement gt Press the Manual Span softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the span manually gt Enter the span you need The largest possible span for the channel power measurement is ten times the channel bandwidth At larger spans the result of the channel power measurement would be increasingly imprecise because too few points of the trace occur in the channel to be measured gt Press the Auto Span softkey The R amp S FSH again calculates the span automatically Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 47 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements
364. wer you have selected Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 232 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 4 Configuring the Measurement Some of the results depend on the measurement configuration 9 4 4 1 Selecting the Analysis Length The R amp S FSH allows you to analyze one slot only or a complete WCDMA frame which is made up out of 15 slots gt gt gt Press the MEAS key Press the Display Settings softkey Select the One Slot or One Frame menu item The R amp S FSH analyzes the slot or frame depending on your selection The results are updated accordingly Defining the scope of the frequency error In case of the frequency error you can display the results on a frame or slot basis regardless of the selected analysis length gt gt gt Press the MEAS key Press the Display Settings softkey Select the Slot or Frame menu item Carrier Freq Error Meas Range The R amp S FSH updates the frequency error accordingly 9 4 4 2 Specifying the Scrambling Code To demodulate a 3GPP signal you have to know the primary and secondary scrambling codes of the base station you are testing You can enter the scrambling code manually or let the R amp S FSH automatically find the right scrambling code s Defining the scrambling code manually gt gt gt gt Press the MEAS key Press the Signal Settings softkey Select the Primary Code
365. would be exceeded for large spans In order to avoid this the R amp S FSH adjusts the span automatically as soon as the maximum sweep time is reached A Automatic adjustment of the sweep time 3 2 3 2 Setting the Video Bandwidth The video bandwidth VBW basically smoothes the trace by reducing the noise and therefore making power levels easier to see The noise reduction is a result of the video filter This lowpass filter defines the video bandwidth and filters the higher frequency parts of the voltage from the signal Video voltage is the DC voltage that results from the IF signal passing through the envelope detector which removes the IF components and outputs the envelope only This output is also known as the video signal The figure below shows that process on an AM modulated signal in the time domain In case of an AM modulated signal the envelope or video signal contains a DC component that corresponds to the level of the carrier The video signal also contains an AC component whose frequency is the same as the AM frequency Envelope Signal AM RF Signal Sc video voltage Amplitude DC voltage from carrier gt AC voltage from modulation Time Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 90 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements If the bandwidth of the video filter is less than the frequency of the AC component it is suppressed depending on its maximum frequency If the AM compo
366. ws the number of the primary and secondary scrambling code regardless if it has been found automatically or entered manually Occupied Bandwidth Shows the occupied bandwidth of the signal in Hz You can control if the occupied bandwidth is measured or not By default it is not gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Settings softkey gt Select the Occupied Bandwidth menu item The R amp S FSH determines the occupied bandwidth in addition to the other global results When the measurement has been turned on the menu item is marked by an X Peak CDE 15 ksps Shows the Peak Code Domain Error of the signal in dB The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum code domain error power that occurs in the measurement The code domain error is the difference in power of the test signal and an ideal reference signal This value is valid only when the R amp S FSH is in channel search mode Avg RCDE 64QAM Shows the Average Relative Code Domain Error of the signal Note that only channels with a 64QAM modulation are considered in this measurement This value is valid only when the R amp S FSH is in channel search mode Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 227 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 1 3 Channel Results Channel results contain various results that are specific to one or more channels P CPICH Power Shows the power of the P CPICH in dBm P CPICH Ec lo
367. ximum or the Over The Air Minimum menu item to define a color map for over the air measurements gt Select the Cable Connected Maximum or the Cable Connected Minimum menu item to define a color map for cable connected measurements In both cases the Minimum menu item defines the lower threshold of the color map while the Maximum menu item defines the upper threshold of the color map The threshold is the minimum or maximum signal level that is included in the color map The application also allows you to select the color scheme gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Color Table menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu gt Select the color scheme you want Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 279 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 6 Configuring the Measurement Some of the results depend on the measurement configuration 9 8 6 1 Selecting the Channel Bandwidth The LTE standard specifies the following bandwidths with the appropriate number of resource blocks Channel bandwidth MHz 1 4 3 5 10 15 20 Number of resource blocks 6 15 25 50 75 100 gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Channel Bandwidth menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the bandwidth gt Select one of the bandwidths available in the menu The R amp S FSH sets the bandwidth
368. y Select the unit you need Defining the Bargraph Scale The scale of the bargraph is defined by the reference level and the level range The reference level is the maximum power level that the bargraph displays You should set the reference level in a way that the signal level does not exceed the reference level and high enough so that the signal does not disappear in the inherent noise gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref Level softkey gt Define the reference level that best fits the measurement In the default state the reference level corresponds to the level at the right of the bargraph The reference level position is shown by a triangle in the bargraph scale label I I I I L U L H I 33 0 23 0 13 0 30 7 0 17 0 27 0 37 0 C 57 0 67 0 You can move the reference position to another position on the scale gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range Ref Pos softkey gt Select the Ref Position 10 menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the reference position gt Enter the number of the grid line you want the reference level at The range is from 0 to 10 0 corresponds to the left side of the bargraph 10 corresponds to right side of the bargraph You can also select the level range that the bargraph covers In the default state the bargraph covers 100 values of the unit you have selected e g 100 dBuV gt Press the Range Ref Pos softkey The R amp S FSH opens a su
369. y default the 3GPP WCDMA standard is active Two vertical lines show the channel bandwidth Screen layout for channel power measurements Ref 0 0d8m RBW 30 kHz SWT 100 ms Trace Clear Write Att 20 dB VBW 300 kHz Trig Free Run e Detect RMS Channel BW 2 3 84 MHz Center 1 GHz Span 4 608 MHz Heed tear Gi Mode Standard Adjust Standard Channel bandwidth Channel power numerical Channel bandwidth graphical blue lines Channel power measurement softkey menu OO E ob Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 40 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 2 1 Selecting the Standard If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications standard you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in the R amp S FSH memory However you can create new configurations to perform measurements on other standards as well gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Standard softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the standard gt Select one of the available standards gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH loads the configuration of the selected standard It automatically sets the optimal span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth sweep time and detector for the standard If the measurement is not according to the selected standard anymore e g if you make changes to a parameter the R amp S FSH
370. y is lower than that of a full calibration available for vector measurements Vector measurements Vector measurements provide several calibration methods that correct the magnitude and the phase e Full 2 Port Both test ports are calibrated for both reflection and transmission measurements on either port or direction The calibration routine therefore requires the connection of the standards load open and short to both test ports and a through connection of the test ports The influences of the test setup and of the isolation between the test ports are thereby determined and taken into account in the subsequent measurement of the device under test While this method is the most time consuming during calibration it does provide the greatest accuracy for all measurements at both test ports without recalibration and is thus the most flexible e Full 2 Port High Accuracy Both test ports are calibrated like the full 2 port calibration In addition the load match is taken into account more accurately and correction data is applied in both directions forward and reverse This method provides even more accurate results than the normal full 2 port calibration but takes a while longer to finish e Reflection Port 1 2 Test port 1 or 2 is calibrated for reflection measurements on that port S11 or S22 The calibration routine requires the calibration standards open short and load to be connected one after another e Transmission Fwd
371. y of the transmission channel and the center frequency to the next transmission channel or the distance between the center frequency of the transmission channel and the center frequency of the adjacent channel Specific channel spacing definitions O Note that some some radio communication standards e g CDMA2000 DS MC1 MC3 and IS95 B C IS97 B C IS98 B C define the channel spacing differently namely the distance from the center of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel The R amp S FSH does not consider these specifics It always regards the channel spacing as the distance between the center of a channel and the center of its neighboring channel gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the Channel Spacing menu item Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 55 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box TX AGP Channel Spacing to define the spacings for all TX1 2 E pos TX2 3 20kHz transmission channels and TX3 4 20kHz H TX4 5 20kHz adjacent alternate channels Se See TX6 7 20kHz gt Select the channel you want to 1X78 20kHz TX8 9 20kHz change the spacing for TX9 10 20 kHz TX10 11 20kHz gt Activate the input by pressing the Se See U d 2 ENTER key AR 20kHz Alt2 20kHz i Alt3 20kHz gt Enter the channel spacing you De ORE need The R amp S FSH now takes the new val
372. you change its angle Alternatively create a geotag of an arbitrary location gt Select the Save Manual Position menu item gt Enter the GPS data and location information The R amp S FSH creates a geotag with the geographic data you have entered Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 144 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 EH Working with Maps Creating geotags automatically The R amp S FSH is able to save geographic information automatically if you are using the Save on Event functionality For more information see Saving Events on page 19 The R amp S FSH adds all geotags that you create to the GPS Position List If you are using the Geotagging application R amp S FSH K16 you can turn on the Save on Event functionality in the application itself Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey Select the Geotagging menu item Press the MEAS key Press the Settings softkey Select the Save on Event menu item YY vV vV V V Y Select the Event Source menu item to select the event that triggers data storage Managing geotags The application features a GPS Position List that allows you to manage and edit geotags The GPS Position List contains all geotags that you have created gt Press the GPS Position softkey gt Select the GPS Position List menu item The R amp S FSH opens a list of geotags that you have saved In this list the R amp S FSH shows some
373. you have entered and calculates the corresponding number of resource blocks according to the standard 9 8 6 2 Selecting the Cyclic Prefix The cyclic prefix serves as a guard interval between OFDM symbols to avoid interferences The cyclic prefix is either Normal slot contains 7 OFDM symbols Extended slot contains 6 OFDM symbols or Auto the application automatically detects the type of cyclic prefix gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select either the Normal Extended or Auto menu item 9 8 6 3 Selecting the Cell Identity The cell ID cell identity group and physical layer identity are interdependent parameters In combination they are responsible for synchronization between network and user equipment The LTE standard defines 504 unique physical layer cell identities These are split in 168 cell identity groups with 3 unique identities per group In the default state the R amp S FSH automatically detects the cell identity its group and ID If you need results for a specific identity you can also select it manually Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 280 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals Setting the cell ID gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Cell Identity menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the cell identity gt Enter a number between 0 and 503 to set the cell
374. you want to see the results for The R amp S FSH adjusts the contents of the diagram and shows the channel you have selected to the right of the diagram 9 8 4 The BTS Scanner If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K50E or K51E the BTS scanner becomes available If you are measuring over the air OTA signals you can use the BTS scanner to identify base stations in the area Every base station is identified by its Cell ID The BTS Scanner shows the Cell ID for every base station it has detected For every base station it also shows the power graphically each yellow bar represents an active and detected base station and numerically in a table above the diagram The table also shows the power of the S SYNC or P SYNC of the basestation Trace modes Note that the BTS Scanner supports several trace modes If you are using a trace mode other than Clear Write the bars depicting the Cell ID may turn grey A grey bar is shown in case of base stations that have been detected in the past but are not currently detected For more information on the trace modes see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 97 pe i SS SSS eee Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 277 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer EH Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 5 The Resource Allocations Result Display If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K50E or K51E the resource allocations result display becomes available to visualize the res
375. ype set into the csv format The conversion is possible with a command line option for the FSH4View exe file The general syntax you have to use is FSH4View exe csv lt InputDataset set gt lt DestinationFile csv gt Note that you have to use quotation marks for the file name if it contains blank spaces Example FSH4View exe csv Dataset set Dataset csv Renames the file Datset set into Dataset csv Environment variables The command line option only works if you execute the command from the installation folder of R amp S FSH4View software Otherwise you have to set a Path environment variable to the destination of the location of the exe file You can access the environment variable via the MS Windows control panel Start Menu gt Control Panel gt System gt Advanced System Settings gt Advanced tab gt Environment Variables button gt System Variables gt Path gt Add anew variable with the installation path of the software The default installation path is e C Program Files Rohde Schwarz FSH4View for Windows XP Vista and 7 32 bit e C Program Files x86 Rohde Schwarz FSH4View for Windows 7 64 bit If necessary change the path as required Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 24 26 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets 1 8 2 Restoring Datasets You can preview and load previously saved measurement results with the recall function of the R amp S FSH Th
376. ys of the Digital Modulation Analyzer The Isotropic Antenna Result Display The isotropic antenna result display also provides an overview of the spectrum The results of measurements with an Ref 30 0 dBm RBW 100 kHz Sweep Cont Clear Write isotropic antenna are based on data ELE EEN e P CPICH dBm 73 63 22 67 25 62 89 from the three axes of the antenna GE oa 65 57 16 60 35 56 68 Scrambling Code 471 0 471 0 When performing measurements with an isotropic antenna the R amp S FSH performs a measurement on each of the three antenna axes and then averages the results to draw the trace Measurement speed will decrease because of the multiple Center 2 1672 GH Span 3 84 MHz measurements Result teym Display Settings You can see the results for each antenna axis x y and z and for the channels that are part of the signal in a table above the diagram area gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Isotropic Antenna menu item For more information on isotropic antennas see Using Isotropic Antennas on page 79 While using the isotropic antenna result display you can set up the measurement as usual Limits A limit check tests the actual results against a set of predefined values to see if the measurement results are inside a specified boundary In the Limits result display the R amp S FSH shows the results of the limit check If the results are in the allowed range of values the limit

R&S FSH Operating Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSH Operating Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSH Operating Manual